elcome to the safetran systems - home -...

Welcome to the Safetran Systems

Global Net Systems, 322 Culver Blvd, Suite 122, Playa Del Rey, California, 90293

Phone : (714) 418-1700 Fax: (310) 306-3071 Email : [email protected]

This Manual was published by

Click the First Page button in the toolbar toreturn to this opening screen. Click the Next Page button in the toolbar togo to the next page of the manual.

Click the Previous Page button in the toolbar togo to the previous page of the manual. Click the Go back button in the toolbar to return toyour previous location.

Click any bookmark in the list to the left to go toa specific topic.

This electronic document was created from the printed version usingAdobe® Acrobat® software. Because it is saved in the AdobePortable Document Format (PDF), this file not only retains all thevisual richness of the printed original, but also includes some specialnavigational features to help you easily access the information youneed. Here’s how the viewing tools work:

On-Line Manual

Safetran Systems

®

A Brief Note to The Reader.......

This manual is a revision of the Instruction & Installation Manual for the Microprocessor Based GradeCrossing Predictor Model 3000 Family, Document No. SIG-00-96-05, Version B, dated November 1996.In addition to minor revisions, this document now includes information covering the 8-DAX versions of the3000 GCP (Models 3008 and 3008D2) which were previously covered by a separate document. Verticalchange bars located in the outside margin indicate revisions and additions.

For those not familiar with the equipment comprising Safetran’s Model 3000 GCP family, it is essentialthat this manual is read and its contents thoroughly understood before attempting to install, program, oroperate the unit.

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: C

CHANGE NOTICE

The following change(s) have been made to the Instruction & Installation Manual for theMicroprocessor Based Grade Crossing Predictor Model 3000 Family dated July 1997, DocumentNo. SIG-00-96-05, Version C

• 21 August, 1997-65

Added WARNING to figure 3-39 regarding connection of the 80049 DCShunting Enhancer Panel to 3000 GCP UAX terminals.

$35.00

PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Safetran Systems

®

INSTRUCTION & INSTALLATION MANUAL

MICROPROCESSOR BASEDGRADE CROSSING PREDICTOR

MODEL 3000 FAMILY

July 1997Revised 21 August, 1997

Document No. SIG-00-96-05Version C

Safetran Systems CorporationElectronic Division

10655 7th StreetCucamonga, California 91730

ii

PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION has a proprietary interest in the informationcontained herein and, in some instances, has patent rights in the systems and componentsdescribed. It is requested that you distribute this information only to those responsiblepeople within your organization who have an official interest.

This document, or the information disclosed herein, shall not be reproduced or transferredto other documents or used or disclosed for manufacturing or for any other purpose exceptas specifically authorized in writing by SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION warranty policy is as stated in the currentTerms and Conditions of Sale document. Warranty adjustments will not be allowed forproducts or components which have been subjected to abuse, alteration, improper handlingor installation, or which have not been operated in accordance with Seller's instructions.Alteration or removal of any serial number or identification mark voids the warranty.

SALES AND SERVICE LOCATIONS

Technical assistance and sales information on SAFETRAN products may be obtained atthe following locations:

SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION4650 MAIN STREET, N.E. ELECTRONIC DIVISIONMINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA 55421 10655 7th STREETTELEPHONE: (612) 586-3202 CUCAMONGA, CALIFORNIA 91730FAX: (612) 586-3209 TELEPHONE: (909) 987-4673SALES & SERVICE: 1-800-328-5098 1-800-793-SAFE

FAX: (909) 945-2662

FCC RULES COMPLIANCE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digitaldevice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in acommercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment ina residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will berequired to correct the interference at his own expense.

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Ciii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Page

PROPRIETARY INFORMATION ........................................................... iiWARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................... iiSALES AND SERVICE LOCATIONS .................................................... iiFCC RULES COMPLIANCE ................................................................... iiTABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................... iiiLIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ..................................................................... xLIST OF TABLES .................................................................................... xiiiNOTES, CAUTIONS, AND WARNINGS ................................................ xvELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) PRECAUTIONS ..................... xvi

I INTRODUCTION .................................................................................... 1-1

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-11.1 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ........................................................ 1-21.2 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 1-41.3 TRACK LEADS .............................................................................. 1-71.4 MINIMUM APPROACH LENGTH VS. FREQUENCY .................. 1-81.5 TYPICAL APPLICATION DRAWINGS ......................................... 1-9

II PRIMARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION ...................................... 2-1

2.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 2-12.1 PLUG-IN PRINTED CIRCUIT MODULES .................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Island Module, 80011 ........................................................... 2-102.1.2 Transceiver Module, 80012 ................................................... 2-102.1.3 Relay Drive Module, 80013 .................................................. 2-102.1.4 Processor Module, 80014 ..................................................... 2-102.1.5 Processor Module, 80044 ..................................................... 2-112.1.6 Processor Module, 80214 ..................................................... 2-122.1.7 Data Recorder Module, 80015 .............................................. 2-122.1.8 DAX Module, 80016 (3000, 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008, And

3008D2 Only) ....................................................................... 2-132.1.9 Control Interface Assembly, 80020 (All Models

Except 3000ND2) ................................................................. 2-132.1.10 Transfer Timer, 80028 (3000D2, 3000D2L,

And 3000ND2 Only) ............................................................. 2-132.1.11 Control Interface Assembly, 80029 (3000ND2 Only) ............. 2-152.1.12 Transfer Timer, 80037 (3008D2 Only) .................................. 2-16

2.2 KEYBOARD/DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT, 80019 ......................... 2-172.2.1 Keyboard .............................................................................. 2-182.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display ........................................................... 2-18

2.3 MODULE INDICATORS, CONTROLS, SWITCHES,TEST JACKS, AND CONNECTORS .............................................. 2-19

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Civ

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Title Page

2.4 FRONT PANEL TERMINALS, INDICATORS,AND CONTROLS ........................................................................... 2-19

2.5 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................ 2-19

III AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION .................................. 3-1

3.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 3-13.1 BIDIRECTIONAL SIMULATION COUPLER, 62664-MF ............. 3-13.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER TIMER UNIT, 80024 .......................... 3-63.3 DATA RECORDER INTERFACE ASSEMBLY, 80025 ................. 3-123.4 SOLID-STATE VITAL AND-GATE, 90975 ................................... 3-153.5 NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62775-F ............................................... 3-193.6 MULTIFREQUENCY NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62775-XXXX .. 3-213.7 NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62780-F ............................................... 3-233.8 MULTIFREQUENCY NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62780-XXXX .. 3-243.9 WIDEBAND SHUNT, 8A076A ....................................................... 3-263.10 SIMULATED TRACK INDUCTOR, 8V617 (Used With

Multifrequency Shunts) .................................................................... 3-273.11 ADJUSTABLE INDUCTOR ASSEMBLY, 8A398-6 ....................... 3-303.12 TRACK CIRCUIT ISOLATION DEVICES .................................... 3-32

3.12.1 Steady Energy DC Track Circuits ......................................... 3-333.12.2 Safetran S-Code Electronic Coded System ............................ 3-343.12.3 Electro Code Electronic Coded System ................................. 3-343.12.4 Relay Coded DC Track ......................................................... 3-35

3.12.4.1 Single Polarity Systems (Fixed Polarity) ................. 3-353.12.4.2 GRS Trakode (Dual Polarity) Systems .................... 3-373.12.4.3 Dual Polarity (Polar) Coded Track Systems

Other Than GRS Trakode ....................................... 3-373.12.5 Cab Signal AC ...................................................................... 3-373.12.6 Style C Track Circuits ........................................................... 3-38

3.13 TUNABLE INSULATED JOINT BYPASS COUPLER, 62785-F ... 3-39• Field Tuning Instructions ............................................................. 3-42

3.14 TAKING A TRACK OUT OF SERVICE USINGSIMULATED TRACK ASSEMBLY, 80071 ................................... 3-433.14.1 Instructions For Taking a Track Out of Service ..................... 3-443.14.2 Returning a Track to Service ................................................ 3-46

3.15 3000 GCP SLAVING UNIT, 80065 ................................................. 3-463.16 SIX-WIRE SIMULATED TRACK BURIAL ASSEMBLY, 80074 .. 3-483.17 EXTENDER MODULE, 80021 ....................................................... 3-483.18 MS/GCP TERMINATION SHUNT BURIAL KIT, A62776 ............ 3-493.19 SURGE PANELS, 80026 ................................................................. 3-493.20 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT PANELS ............................................. 3-51

3.20.1 Rectifier Panel Assembly, 80033 ........................................... 3-51

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cv


Section Title Page

3.20.2 Sentry Data Recorder Panel Assembly, 91041 ....................... 3-513.20.3 Cable Termination Panel Assembly, 91042 ............................ 3-513.20.4 Data Recorder Interface And Vital AND-Gate

Driver Panel Assembly, 91043 .............................................. 3-513.20.5 Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91044 .................... 3-51

3.21 DC SHUNTING ENHANCER PANEL, 80049 ................................ 3-64

IV KEYBOARD/DISPLAY AND MENU DESCRIPTIONS ......................... 4-1

4.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 4-14.1 SYSTEM STATUS KEY ................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Current Status of EZ And EX ............................................... 4-34.1.2 EX at Highest EZ ................................................................. 4-34.1.3 EZ at Lowest EX .................................................................. 4-44.1.4 Transmit Current ................................................................... 4-44.1.5 Transmit Voltage .................................................................. 4-44.1.6 ±5 Volt Power Supply Status ................................................ 4-44.1.7 ±8 Volt Power Supply Status ................................................ 4-44.1.8 ±15 Volt Power Supply Status .............................................. 4-44.1.9 Time/Date Display With Data Recorder Module Installed ...... 4-5

4.2 PROGRAM KEY ............................................................................. 4-54.2.1 Number of Tracks ................................................................. 4-74.2.2 Frequency ............................................................................. 4-74.2.3 Unidirectional/Bidirectional ................................................... 4-74.2.4 Xmit Level ............................................................................ 4-74.2.5 Predictor/Motion Sensor ....................................................... 4-84.2.6 Warning Time ....................................................................... 4-84.2.7 Approach (Distance) ............................................................. 4-84.2.8 UAX Pickup Delay ............................................................... 4-94.2.9 Island (Distance) ................................................................... 4-104.2.10 Number of DAX’s ................................................................ 4-104.2.11 DAX Track (Track Assignment) ........................................... 4-114.2.12 DAX Distance ...................................................................... 4-114.2.13 DAX Warning Time .............................................................. 4-124.2.14 Slaving Master/Slave ............................................................. 4-134.2.15 Password Disabled/Enabled ................................................... 4-134.2.16 Recorder Not Installed/Installed ............................................ 4-144.2.17 RS232C Baud Rate ............................................................... 4-144.2.18 RS232C Data Bits ................................................................. 4-144.2.19 RS232C Stop Bits ................................................................. 4-144.2.20 RS232C Parity ...................................................................... 4-154.2.21 Date ...................................................................................... 4-154.2.22 Time ..................................................................................... 4-15

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cvi


Section Title Page

4.2.23 Daylight Savings Time .......................................................... 4-154.3 NEW DATA KEY ........................................................................... 4-154.4 CLEAR KEY ................................................................................... 4-164.5 SETUP KEY .................................................................................... 4-16

4.5.1 Setup For Calibration Procedure ........................................... 4-164.5.2 Setup For Approach Length Procedure ................................. 4-184.5.3 Setup For Linearization Procedure ........................................ 4-18

4.6 HISTORY KEY ............................................................................... 4-194.6.1 Warning Time (History) ........................................................ 4-204.6.2 Detected Speed (History) ...................................................... 4-204.6.3 Average Speed (History) ....................................................... 4-204.6.4 Island Speed (History) .......................................................... 4-20

4.7 UP ARROW KEY (ñ) ..................................................................... 4-204.8 DOWN ARROW KEY (ò) .............................................................. 4-214.9 ENTER KEY ................................................................................... 4-214.10 SYSTEM RESET KEY .................................................................... 4-214.11 TRACK 1 KEY (1) .......................................................................... 4-224.12 EVENT KEY (3) ............................................................................. 4-234.13 ERROR KEY (5) ............................................................................. 4-234.14 TRACK 2 KEY (2) .......................................................................... 4-234.15 NEXT KEY (4) ................................................................................ 4-244.16 FUNCTION KEY (6) ....................................................................... 4-24

4.16.1 Switch to MS EZ Level ....................................................... 4-264.16.2 Transfer Delay MS to GCP .................................................. 4-264.16.3 Prime Prediction Offset ........................................................ 4-274.16.4 Pickup Delay Prime ............................................................. 4-284.16.5 Pickup Delay DAX .............................................................. 4-294.16.6 Compensation Value ............................................................ 4-304.16.7 Enhanced Detection, T1/T2 (Units Equipped

With 80044/80214 Processors Only) .................................... 4-314.16.8 Back To Back T1 And T2 (Units Equipped With

80044/80214 Processors Only) ............................................ 4-324.16.9 Station Stop Timer (Units Equipped With

80044/80214 Processors Only) ............................................ 4-334.16.10 Number of Track Wires ....................................................... 4-344.16.11 Low EX Adjustment (Units Equipped With

80044/80214 Processors Only) ........................................... 4-344.16.12 Set to Default ...................................................................... 4-35

4.17 NUMBER KEYS (0 AND 1 THROUGH 9) ..................................... 4-37

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cvii


Section Title Page

V SYSTEM APPLICATION PROGRAMMING .......................................... 5-1

5.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 5-15.1 MAKING PROGRAM CHANGES .................................................. 5-35.2 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING ........................................................... 5-5

• Set To Default .............................................................................. 5-5• Application Programming ............................................................ 5-6• Enable Password ......................................................................... 5-12• Change Password ........................................................................ 5-12• Disable Password ........................................................................ 5-13• Data Recorder Programming ....................................................... 5-14• Extended Application Programming ............................................ 5-17

5.3 CONDENSED PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES ......................... 5-24• Set To Default .............................................................................. 5-25• Application Programming ............................................................ 5-25• Enable Password ......................................................................... 5-28• Change Password ........................................................................ 5-28• Disable Password ........................................................................ 5-28• Data Recorder Programming ....................................................... 5-29• Programming For an External PC or Printer ............................... 5-29• Date And Time Programming ...................................................... 5-30• Extended Application Programming ............................................ 5-30

VI SYSTEM CALIBRATION ....................................................................... 6-1

6.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 6-16.1 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS ............................ 6-16.2 SET TO DEFAULT, REPROGRAMMING, AND

RECALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 6-16.3 RECALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS FOR IN-SERVICE

3000 GCP’S...................................................................................... 6-26.3.1 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements

Due to Module Replacement ................................................. 6-26.3.2 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements

Due to Programming Changes ............................................... 6-26.3.3 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements

Due to Track Equipment Changes ......................................... 6-46.4 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE ....................................................... 6-4

• Automatic Switch Over Systems Only (Main Unit) ........................ 6-4• Setup For Calibration - Track 1 And Track 2 ............................... 6-5• Setup For Calibration - Track 2 (Models 3000, 3000D2, And

3000D2L Only) ............................................................................ 6-6

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cviii


Section Title Page

• Setup For Approach Length And Linearization (Combined Calibration Procedure) .............................................. 6-6

• Island Adjustment - Track 1 And Track 2(0.12 Ohm Shunting Sensitivity) ................................................. 6-11

• Automatic Switch Over Systems (Standby Unit)(Models 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2, AND 3000ND2) ................ 6-12

• DAX Setting on Transfer Timer Module (80028/80037)(3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2, And 3000ND2 Units Only) ............ 6-13

• Automatic Switch Over Test - Models 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2,And 3000ND2 GCP’s And Models 3000 And 3000ND WhichOperate in Conjunction With External Automatic Transfer TimerUnit, 80024 .................................................................................. 6-14

6.5 OPERATIONAL CHECKS .............................................................. 6-15• UAX Checkout ............................................................................. 6-15• Operational Performance Checks ................................................ 6-16• Clearing Recorded Diagnostic Messages From Memory .............. 6-18• Clearing Train Move History From Memory ................................ 6-18

6.6 DATA RECORDER MODULE SETUP .......................................... 6-196.7 DATA RECORDER OPERATIONAL CHECKS ............................. 6-22

• Verify Correct Time And Date ...................................................... 6-22• Verify Event Recording Operation ............................................... 6-22

VII DIAGNOSTICS (MAINTENANCE) ........................................................ 7-1

7.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 7-17.1 STATUS MODE .............................................................................. 7-17.2 VIEWING STATUS MODE MENU ENTRIES ............................... 7-2

7.2.1 Current Status of EZ And EX ............................................... 7-27.2.2 EX at Highest EZ ................................................................. 7-27.2.3 EZ at Lowest EX .................................................................. 7-37.2.4 Transmit Current ................................................................... 7-37.2.5 Transmit Voltage .................................................................. 7-37.2.6 ±5 Volt Power Supply Status ................................................ 7-37.2.7 ±8 Volt Power Supply Status ................................................ 7-37.2.8 ±15 Volt Power Supply Status .............................................. 7-37.2.9 Time/Date Display With Data Recorder Module Installed ...... 7-4

7.3 ERROR MODE ............................................................................... 7-47.4 HISTORY MODE ........................................................................... 7-5

7.4.1 Warning Time ....................................................................... 7-67.4.2 Detected Speed ..................................................................... 7-67.4.3 Average Speed ...................................................................... 7-67.4.4 Island Speed ......................................................................... 7-7

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cix


Section Title Page

7.5 MODULE-MOUNTED STATUS INDICATORS ............................ 7-77.6 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 7-8

7.6.1 High Signal Detection (Open Track) ....................................... 7-87.6.1.1 Defective Termination Shunts .......................................... 7-87.6.1.2 Defective Couplers .......................................................... 7-97.6.1.3 Open Or High Resistance Bond, Broken Rail ................... 7-9

7.6.2 Low EX ................................................................................. 7-97.6.2.1 At New Installations ........................................................ 7-97.6.2.2 At In-Service Installations ................................................ 7-9

• Low EX Test (80044 & 80214 Processor Modules Only) .. 7-9• Low EX Adjustment (80044 & 80214 Processor Modules Only) ................................................................ 7-10

VIII SYSTEM ENHANCEMENTS .................................................................. 8-1

8.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 8-18.1 NEW FEATURES OF THE 80044 AND 80214

PROCESSOR MODULES .............................................................. 8-18.1.1 Additional Features Of The New 80214 Processor Module ... 8-18.1.2 Additional Programming Steps Required When

Using 80044 And 80214 Processor Modules ......................... 8-28.1.3 Eight-DAX Operation ........................................................... 8-58.1.4 Default Value Changes For 80044 And 80214

Processor Modules ................................................................ 8-58.2 APPLICATION INFORMATION FOR ENHANCED

DETECTION OPERATION ............................................................ 8-58.3 PROCESSOR MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS ...... 8-68.4 PROM REPLACEMENT (FIRMWARE UPGRADE)

(80014 And 80044 Processors Only) ................................................ 8-68.4.1 GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING MODULES

AND PROM’S ..................................................................... 8-68.4.2 PROM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ............................. 8-7

8.5 SOFTWARE UPGRADES ON THE 80214 PROCESSOR MODULE 8-11

IX DATA RECORDER ................................................................................. 9-1

9.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................... 9-19.1 DATA RECORDER PROGRAMMING .......................................... 9-29.2 CLEARING DATA RECORDER MEMORY .................................. 9-69.3 DOWNLOADING RECORDED DATA TO A

COMPUTER FILE .......................................................................... 9-69.4 PRINTING RECORDED DATA ..................................................... 9-9

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cx


Section Title Page

9.4.1 Printer Compatibility ............................................................. 9-99.4.2 Printing Procedure ................................................................ 9-10

• Selecting A Specific Event For Printout .......................... 9-10• Printing .......................................................................... 9-10

9.4.3 Print Control Option ............................................................. 9-119.5 PC FILE/PRINTOUT FORMAT ...................................................... 9-129.6 REFERENCE INFORMATION FOR SERIAL

PORT CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 9-149.7 DATA RECORDER MODULE (80015) SPECIFICATIONS .......... 9-159.8 PROM REPLACEMENT (FIRMWARE UPGRADE) ...................... 9-16

9.8.1 Guidelines For Handling Modules And PROM’s ................... 9-169.8.2 PROM Replacement Procedure ............................................. 9-17

9.9 BATTERY REPLACEMENT .......................................................... 9-189.10 INTERFACE CABLES .................................................................... 9-19INDEX .................................................................................................... Index 1

3000 GCP APPLICATION HISTORY CARD3000 GCP TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure No. Title Page

1-1 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application,One Track .................................................................................... 1-11

1-2 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application,Two Tracks .................................................................................. 1-13

1-3 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Unidirectional Application,Back-to-Back ............................................................................... 1-15

1-4 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP Track Connections,Unidirectional Application, Two Tracks, Back-to-Back ................ 1-17

1-5 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional DAX-UAXInterconnect Application With Remote Unidirectional Unit,One Track .................................................................................... 1-18

1-6 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application,Unidirectional Unit With Remote Feed Point,One Track (Six-Wire) ................................................................... 1-20

1-7 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional ApplicationWith External Automatic Transfer, One Track .............................. 1-22

1-8 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP UnidirectionalApplication With Frequency Slaving And CascadedRelay Drives, Two Tracks ............................................................ 1-23

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxi

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)


1-9 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP DAX-UAXInterconnections, Two Crossings .................................................. 1-24

1-10 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Motion Sensor ApplicationWith Style “C” Track Circuit ........................................................ 1-25

1-11 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional ApplicationWith Remote Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track .......................... 1-27

1-12 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application,One Track .................................................................................... 1-29

1-13 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP UnidirectionalApplication, One Track ................................................................ 1-30

1-14 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional ApplicationWith Crossover in MS/GCP Approach, Two Tracks(With Crossover Relay Logic) ...................................................... 1-31

1-15 Typical 3000 GCP Four-wire And Six-wire UnidirectionalInstallations Operating in The Bidirectional Simulation Mode ....... 1-33

1-16 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application With Remote3008/3008D2 Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track ....................... 1-34

1-17 Recommended Surge Suppression Wiring For 3000 GCP’s .......... 1-361-18 Model 3000, 3008, 3000ND, And 3000ND2 GCP

Mounting Dimensions .................................................................. 1-371-19 Model 3000D2 And 3008D2 GCP Mounting Dimensions ............. 1-381-20 Model 3000D2L GCP Mounting Dimensions ............................... 1-392-1 Model 3000 GCP With All Optional Modules

Installed, Front View .................................................................... 2-22-2 Model 3000D2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View ................................................................................... 2-32-3 Model 3000D2L GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View ................................................................................... 2-42-4 Model 3000ND GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View ................................................................................... 2-52-5 Model 3000ND2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View ................................................................................... 2-62-6 Model 3008 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View .................................................................................. 2-72-7 Model 3008D2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed,

Front View .................................................................................. 2-82-8 Switch Locations on Transfer Timer Module, 80028 .................... 2-142-9 Switch Locations on Transfer Timer Module, 80037 .................... 2-162-10 3000 GCP Keyboard/Display ........................................................ 2-172-11 Typical Display Indications For Operating Modes ......................... 2-182-12 Location of Display Viewing Angle Switch, S1 ............................ 2-192-13 Model 3000 And 3000D2 GCP Module Locator Guides ............... 2-202-14 Model 3000D2L GCP Module Locator Guide .............................. 2-21

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxii



2-15 Model 3000ND And 3000ND2 GCP Module Locator Guides ...... 2-222-16 Model 3008 And 3008D2 GCP Module Locator Guides .............. 2-232-17 3000 GCP Simplified Block Diagram ........................................... 2-373-1 Bidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf ................................. 3-23-2 Typical Unidirectional 3000 GCP Installation With

Bidirectional Simulation Applied to East Approach ...................... 3-43-3 Bidirectional Simulation Coupler Assembly

Mounting Dimensions .................................................................. 3-53-4 Automatic Transfer Timer Unit, 80024 ......................................... 3-63-5 Transfer Interval Select Switch (S1) Location .............................. 3-73-6 Typical Single Track, Bidirectional Application With

Automatic Transfer Timer Unit And Two 3000 GCP’s ................. 3-83-7 Automatic Transfer Timer Unit Mounting Dimensions .................. 3-93-8 Data Recorder Interface Assembly, 80025 .................................... 3-133-9 Data Recorder Interface Assembly Mounting Dimensions ............. 3-143-10 Solid-state Vital AND-Gate, 90975 .............................................. 3-153-11 Typical Vital AND-Gate Application ............................................ 3-173-12 Solid-state Vital AND-Gate Assembly Mounting Dimensions ....... 3-183-13 Safetran Narrow-band And Wideband Termination Shunts ........... 3-203-14 Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617 ................................................ 3-273-15 Typical Installation of 8V617 in 62775/62780 Shunt .................... 3-283-16 Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6 ....................................... 3-323-17 62648/8A065A Battery Choke With Mounting Dimensions .......... 3-343-18 DC Code Isolation Unit, 6A342, With Mounting Dimensions ....... 3-363-19 AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A466-3 ................................................ 3-383-20 AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A471-100 And -180,

With Mounting Dimensions .......................................................... 3-393-21 Terminal Identification, 62785-f Tunable Insulated

Joint Bypass Coupler .................................................................... 3-413-22 Typical Installation Diagrams Using The 62785-f Coupler ............ 3-423-23 Simulated Track Inductor Assembly, 80071 .................................. 3-453-24 3000 GCP Slaving Unit, 80065 .................................................... 3-473-25 Six-wire Simulated Track Burial Assembly, 80074 ....................... 3-483-26 Surge Panels, 80026-01, -02, And -22 .......................................... 3-523-27 Surge Panels, 80026-31 And -32 .................................................. 3-533-28 Surge Panels, 80026-33 And -34 .................................................. 3-543-29 Surge Panels, 80026-35 And -36 .................................................. 3-553-30 Surge Panels, 80026-37 And -38 .................................................. 3-563-31 Surge Panels, 80026-39, -41, And -41A ....................................... 3-573-32 Surge Panel, 80026-50 ................................................................. 3-583-33 Rectifier Panel Assembly, 80033 ................................................... 3-593-34 Sentry Data Recorder Panel Assembly, 91041 .............................. 3-603-35 Cable Termination Panel Assembly, 91042 ................................... 3-61

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxiii



3-36 Data Recorder Interface And Vital AND-Gate DriverPanel Assembly, 91043 ................................................................. 3-62

3-37 Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91044 ........................... 3-633-38 DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049 ............................................ 3-643-39 DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, Typical Application With

Overlapping Track Circuits ........................................................... 3-654-1 Status Mode Menu Structure ........................................................ 4-24-2 Program Mode Menu Structure .................................................... 4-64-3 Function Mode Menu Structure .................................................... 4-254-4 Location of Keyboard/Display Interface Assembly

(80020 or 80029) With Keyboard/Display ControlUnit (80019) Removed ................................................................. 4-37

4-5 3000 GCP Application History Card ............................................. 4-386-1 Transfer Switch Location on 80023/80028/80037 Modules .......... 6-56-2 Location of DAX Selection DIP Switches S1 (80028) And

SW1/SW2 (80037) ...................................................................... 6-136-3 Reset Switch And Transfer Indicator Locations ............................ 6-146-4 Location of DIP Switches S1, SW3, And S4 ................................ 6-156-5 Data Recorder Module Component Locations .............................. 6-208-1 PROM Locations on 80014 Processor Module ............................. 8-98-2 PROM Locations on 80044 Processor Module ............................. 8-109-1 Data Recorder Module, 80015 ..................................................... 9-29-2 Windows™ Terminal Communications Dialog Box ...................... 9-79-3 Receive Text File Dialog Box ....................................................... 9-89-4 Typical Data Recorder Printout .................................................... 9-129-5 Data Recorder Module Serial Port Mode Select Switch Positions . 9-14

LIST OF TABLES

Table No. Title Page

1-1 3000 GCP Basic Model Options ................................................... 1-41-2 Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by

Frequency, Bidirectional Applications ........................................... 1-61-3 Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by

Frequency, Unidirectional Applications ......................................... 1-61-4 Maximum Transmit Wire Lengths (Four-wire Applications) ......... 1-71-5 Minimum Bidirectional Approach Length Vs. Frequency .............. 1-81-6 Minimum Unidirectional Approach Length Vs. Frequency ............ 1-92-1 System Module/Assembly Requirements ....................................... 2-92-2 Transfer Timer Interval Selection ................................................. 2-142-3 Module-Mounted LED Status Indicators ...................................... 2-24

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxiv

LIST OF TABLES (Continued)

Table No. Title Page

2-4 Module-Mounted Control And Switches ...................................... 2-252-5 Module-Mounted Test Jacks And Connectors .............................. 2-262-6 Front Panel Terminals, Indicators, And Controls (Models

3000, 3000D2, And 3000D2L) ..................................................... 2-262-7 Front Panel Terminals, Indicators, And Controls (Models

3000ND And 3000ND2) .............................................................. 2-302-8 Front Panel Terminals, Indicators, And Controls (Models

3008 And 3008D2) ..................................................................... 2-323-1 Approach Distance Selection Strapping For Bidirectional

Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf ..................................................... 3-33-2 Transfer Timer Interval Selection ................................................. 3-73-3 Automatic Transfer Timer Unit Controls And Indicators .............. 3-103-4 Automatic Transfer Timer Unit Terminal Connections .................. 3-103-5 Data Recorder Interface Assembly Connector J1

Pin Assignments ........................................................................... 3-133-6 Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775,

Frequency Selection Jumpers ........................................................ 3-223-7 Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62780,

Frequency Selection Jumpers ........................................................ 3-253-8 Simulated Track Inductor Part Number Listing ............................. 3-273-9 Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617, Mounting Terminals ............... 3-293-10 Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6, Terminal Connections ... 3-313-11 Minimum Distance to Insulated Joints When Coupled With

62785-F Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Couplers ........................ 3-413-12 80026-XX Surge Panel Applications ............................................ 3-504-1 Recalibration And Reprogramming Requirements ......................... 4-174-2 System Default Parameters ........................................................... 4-365-1 Paragraph 5.2 Programming Step Index ........................................ 5-45-2 Programming Changes Requiring System Recalibration ................ 5-46-1 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Module Replacement .................................................................... 6-36-2 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Programming Changes ................................................................. 6-36-3 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Track Equipment Changes ............................................................ 6-47-1 Module-Mounted Status Indicators .............................................. 7-77-2 Diagnostic Message Code Reference ............................................ 7-108-1 80014/80044 Processor Module PROM ID And

Software Version Numbers .......................................................... 8-89-1 Data Recorder Printout Status Message Descriptions ................... 9-139-2 Data Recorder Module RS232C Connector (J1) Pin Assignments . 9-159-3 Interface Cable Configurations ..................................................... 9-19

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxv

NOTES, CAUTIONS, AND WARNINGS

Throughout this manual, notes, cautions, and warnings are frequently used to direct the reader’sattention to specific information. Use of the three terms is defined as follows:

NOTE

Generally used to highlight certain informationrelating to the topic under discussion.

CAUTION

REFERS TO PROPER PROCEDURES ORPRACTICES WHICH IF NOT STRICTLYOBSERVED, COULD RESULT IN APOTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATIONAND/OR POSSIBLE DAMAGE TOEQUIPMENT. CAUTIONS TAKE PRECEDENCEOVER NOTES AND ALL OTHERINFORMATION, EXCEPT WARNINGS.

WARNING

INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUSSITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, COULDRESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. WARN-INGS ALWAYS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVERNOTES, CAUTIONS, AND ALL OTHERINFORMATION.

If there any questions, contact Safetran Application Engineering.

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: Cxvi

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) PRECAUTIONS

Static electricity can damage electronic circuitry, particularly low voltage components such as theintegrated circuits commonly used throughout the electronics industry. Therefore, procedureshave been adopted industry-wide which make it possible to avoid the sometimes invisible damagecaused by electrostatic discharge (ESD) during the handling, shipping, and storage of electronicmodules and components. Safetran has instituted these practices at its manufacturing facility andencourages its customers to adopt them as well to lesson the likelihood of equipment damage inthe field due to ESD. Some of the basic protective practices include the following:

• Ground yourself before touching card cages, modules, or components.

• Remove circuit boards (modules) from card cages by the ejector lever only. • Handle circuit boards by the edges only.

• Never physically touch the circuit board contact fingers or allow these fingers to come incontact with an insulator (e.g., plastic, rubber, etc.).

• When not in use, place circuit boards in approved static-shielding bags, contact fingers first.Remove circuit boards from static-shielding bags by grasping the ejector lever or the edge ofthe board only. Each bag should include a caution label on the outside indicating static-sensitive contents.

• Cover workbench surfaces used for repair of electronic equipment with static dissipative

workbench matting. • Use integrated circuit extractor/inserter tools designed to remove and install electrostatic-

sensitive integrated circuit devices such as PROM’s (OK Industries, Inc., Model EX-2 Ex-tractor and Model MOS-40 Inserter (or equivalent) are highly recommended).

• Utilize only anti-static cushioning material in equipment shipping and storage containers.

For information concerning ESD material applications, please contact the Safetran ElectronicDivision Technical Support Staff in Rancho Cucamonga, California. ESD Awareness Classes andadditional ESD product information are also available through the Technical Support Staff.

1-1Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: C

SECTION I

INTRODUCTION

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

This manual provides installation information and detailed operating instructions for Models 3000,3000D2, 3000D2L, 3000ND, 3000ND2, 3008, and 3008D2 Grade Crossing Predictors (3000GCP’s). The information is essential to proper system operation and problem diagnosis. It isstrongly recommended that each system operator/maintainer become familiar with the informationprovided herein before attempting to program, calibrate, or troubleshoot the 3000 GCP system.This manual is divided as follows:

SECTION I INTRODUCTION - Contains a brief overview of system operation plusequipment specifications and typical application drawings.

SECTION II PRIMARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION - Provides a briefdescription of the 3000 GCP cases and plug-in modules, including indicatorsand controls, plus a simplified block diagram of the system.

SECTION III AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION - Provides a briefdescription of the auxiliary equipment available for use in conjunction withthe 3000 GCP system. Also provided are installation and adjustmentprocedures for this equipment, where applicable.

SECTION IV KEYBOARD/DISPLAY AND MENU DESCRIPTIONS - Describes thefunctions, displays, and menus associated with each key on thekeyboard/display assembly.

SECTION V SYSTEM APPLICATION PROGRAMMING - Provides step-by-stepsystem programming instructions.

SECTION VI SYSTEM CALIBRATION - Provides step-by-step instructions for systemcalibration (required following programming) and operational checks to beperformed immediately prior to placing the system in operation.

SECTION VII DIAGNOSTICS - Includes procedures for utilizing self-diagnosticcapabilities of the 3000 GCP. Diagnostic message code listings are alsoprovided.

SECTION VIII SYSTEM ENHANCEMENTS - Describes the optional Processor Mod-ules, 80044 and 80214, which are equipped with an enhanced track shuntingdetection program. Also provided are detailed instructions for PROM re-placement on the standard processor module (80014) and the 80044 optionalprocessor module, plus software update instructions for the optional 80214processor module which is equipped with flash memory.


SECTION IX DATA RECORDER - Describes system operations associated with optionalData Recorder Module, 80015.

1.1 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

The 3000 GCP is a microprocessor-controlled system that reliably computes the speed of anapproaching train and its distance from the crossing and activates the crossing protection deviceon a time basis by computing the arrival time of the train at the crossing. The 3000 GCP isdesigned to provide a constant warning time at grade crossings for constant-speed trains,regardless of train speed.

Operation of the 3000 GCP is based upon the maximum impedance of an unoccupied trackcircuit, which is determined by the location of the termination shunts, and the rate of change in theimpedance resulting from the physical location of a train as it moves within the track circuit.

The 3000 GCP applies a constant current AC signal to the track and measures the level of theresulting voltage. The level varies with approach track impedance, which also varies with thedistance of the train from the crossing. The distance voltage and rate of change of the voltage aresensed by the 3000 GCP, which then activates the crossing warning device at the proper time.

A shunt is connected across the rails to terminate the 3000 GCP approach circuit. This devicepresents a low impedance at the 3000 GCP operating frequency and may consist of a wireconnected between the rails (hardwire shunt) when no other signals (AC or DC) are present onthe rails, or when noncoded DC track circuits only are present, a wideband shunt may be used. Anarrow-band shunt is used when other AC signals are present.

When required for signaling purposes in noncoded DC track circuits, existing insulated jointslocated within an approach are bypassed by wideband shunts. In DC coded track, 3000 GCPapproach track circuits are extended beyond insulated joints by DAXing to the controlledcrossing. For DAXing applications, refer to the Application Guidelines manual, Section X, 3000GCP DAX Applications.

Insulated joints in DC coded track can be coupled using Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Couplers,62785-f, provided the insulated joints are located in the outer one-third of a 3000 GCP approach.The 62785-f couplers can also be used to bypass insulated joints that are located within the innertwo-thirds of a 3000 GCP approach, provided the minimum distance restrictions specified inSection III, table 3-11 are adhered to. The minimum distance to the first set of insulated joints isgenerally a function of the 3000 GCP operating frequency (i.e., the lower the operating frequency,the longer the minimum distance). It should be noted, however, that the minimum distancesspecified in table 3-11 apply only to Model 3000 GCP’s, not to earlier model Safetran GCPequipment (Model 660, 600, 400, and 300 GCP’s).

An island circuit is a short (up to 300 feet) track circuit which enables the 3000 GCP to provideprotection for limited distances on both sides of a highway crossing. The 3000 GCP island circuitis established and controlled by a high-frequency island module which contains separatetransmitter and receiver circuits. The length of the island circuit is established by the location ofthe track connections on either side of the crossing. A train located at any point within the island


circuit will activate the 3000 GCP. The island frequency may be selected from a number ofavailable frequencies ranging from 4.0 kHz to 20.2 kHz.

When 3000 GCP’s are installed in a unidirectional or simulated bidirectional manner, insulatedjoints are located in the rails to electrically isolate the adjacent crossing circuits. These insulatedjoints must not be bypassed with frequency-coupling devices in any way. If approach distances arelimited by insulated joints, the 3000 GCP provides a means of extending the approach lengththrough use of the prime prediction offset function, or if more than one output is required, by aDownstream Adjacent Crossing (DAX) Module, 80016 (see table 1-1).

Traffic signal preemption is performed by a DAX module. The module outputs are routed via lineor cable to the local traffic signal control equipment where they are used to control operation ofthe traffic signal lights at the crossing.

Intermittent poor shunting can result just about anywhere due to numerous causes, but generallyoccurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/or transit operation. Lack of any shunting generallyoccurs in dark territory where no DC or AC track circuits exist and few trains run per week.Track shunting in dark territory can be easily improved using methods similar to those employedin style-C track circuits, but without the need for so many insulated joints.

The Safetran DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, (see Section III) provides a very simple andcost effective solution for improving shunting in dark territory, thus enabling the 3000 EnhancedDetection software to function properly. The panel applies a nominal 6 volts DC to the track atthe crossing to break down the film on the rails. This DC voltage is isolated from battery and isgenerated from a 110 volt AC step-down transformer when AC is present, or from a batterypowered DC-to-DC converter when AC is off (panel switches automatically to DC-to-DCconverter output if AC fails). The presence of the 6 volts is checked for by the 3000 GCP UAXinput. Only two insulated joints are required to confine the 6 volts on the track; one at the far endof each GCP approach. The DC Shunting Enhancement Panel can also be easily incorporated inapplications involving overlapping approaches from two or more crossings without additionalinsulated joints. Narrow-band termination shunts are required in all applications of the 80049panel. The 80049 panel can be rack, wall, or shelf mounted.

Operating parameters, including warning time, are programmable via a detachable keyboard andliquid crystal display. Self-check circuits in the 3000 GCP test the unit at specific intervals,ensuring safe operation. Module status LED indicators plus microprocessor-controlled diagnosticmessages, which are displayed on the liquid crystal display, combine to permit rapid trouble-shooting.

Model 3000 GCP’s are available as single-track systems (control single-track circuits) or asdouble-track systems (control two track circuits). Automatic transfer systems consisting of twoidentical module sets plus a transfer module are also available (see table 1-1). One module setserves as the primary system and the other as the backup. In the event of a system failure, controlautomatically switches to the backup system. The 3000 GCP operates from battery power toensure continued operation in the event of AC power failure.


Table 1-1 3000 GCP Basic Model Options

GCP Model

One-Track Operation

Two-Track Operation

DAX Capability

InternalAutomaticTransfer

3000 Yes Yes 1 to 4 No3000D2 Yes Yes 1 to 4 Yes

3000D2L Yes Yes 1 to 4 Yes3000ND Yes No None No3000ND2 Yes No None Yes

3008 Yes No 1 to 8 No3008D2 Yes No 1 to 8 Yes

1.2 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Input Power

Voltage 9.0-16.5 VDC; 12 VDC nominal

Current Single-track system - 1.50 amperesTwo-track system - 2.2 amperesOptional modules up to 0.65 ampere eachMaximum current - 3.75 amperes

Transmitter Output Current Medium power - 250 mA nominalHigh power - up to 500 mA, varies with frequency

Program Selection Keystroke entry via keyboard/display - Program is displayed by LCD readout

Frequencies Available Frequencies can be programmed between 45 and 999 Hz in1 Hz increments.

Frequency Stability ±0.01 percent

Island Frequencies 4.0, 4.9, 5.9, 7.1, 8.3, 10.0, 11.5, 13.2, 15.2, 17.5, or 20.2 kHzAvailable (fixed - determined by individual Island Modules, 80011)

Island Circuit Length Determined by island track wire connections - 120 feet (36.58 meters) (minimum) to 300 feet (91.44 meters) (maximum)

Relay Drive Outputs 400 to 1,000-ohm load

Surge Protection Built-in surge protection for track and battery connections. Requires only primary arresters and equalizers


SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS (Concluded)

Diagnostics And Accomplished via two-line, 16-character, alphanumeric, liquidMonitoring crystal display. Diagnostic information, application programming,

and train move data plus internal voltages are displayed.

Mounting The 3000 GCP can be wall, rack, or shelf mounted. Except for certain installations that require six-wire track hookup, all track, power, and slaving connections use standard AAR terminals.

DimensionsModel Width Depth Height

3000/3008 (single-baycase)

23 inches (58.4 centimeters)

11.34 inches(28.8 centimeters)


3000D2/3008D2(automatic transfer)(dual-bay, vertically-stacked case)

23 inches(58.4 centimeters)



3000D2L (automatictransfer) (dual-bay, side-by-side long case)




3000ND (nonredundant,no backup) (single-baycase)




3000ND2 (automatictransfer) (single-baycase)




Weight

Temperature Range -40° F to +160° F (-40° C to 71° C)

Operating Distance Tables 1-2 and 1-3 indicate minimum and maximum bidirection-aland unidirectional approach lengths, respectively, for each standardSafetran 3000 GCP operating frequency with ballast resistances of 2,4, and 6 ohms per 1,000 feet. Maximum oper-ating distances for anygiven frequency are governed by ballast resistance conditions, increas-ing with higher ballast and de-creasing with lower ballast. Minimumapproach distances are determined by available system gain, resultingin shorter approaches at higher frequencies. The minimum approachdistance figures indicate the shortest approach distance over which agiven frequency will operate.

Model (all modules in place) Weight (approximate)3000/3008 32 pounds (14.5 kilograms)3000D2/3000D2L/3008D2 43 pounds (19.5 kilograms)3000ND 22 pounds (9.9 kilograms)3000ND2 30 pounds (13.6 kilograms)


Table 1-2Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by Frequency, Bidirectional Applications

3000 GCPOperating

Bidirectional Approach Length (Feet)

Frequency(Hz)

2 Ohms/1,000 FeetDistributed Ballast



Minimum* Maximum Minimum* Maximum Minimum* Maximum86 1,000 5,100 1,000 7,600 1,000 9,280114 750 4,300 750 6,100 750 7,448156 600 3,750 600 5,200 600 6,349211 475 3,200 475 4,500 475 5,494285 400 2,800 400 3,900 400 4,762348 400 2,500 400 3,400 400 4,151430 400 2,200 400 3,100 400 3,785525 400 2,050 400 2,900 400 3,541645 400 1,850 400 2,600 400 3,175790 400 1,650 400 2,300 400 2,808970 400 1,475 400 2,025 400 2,472

*Based upon use of hardwire or wideband shunts

Table 1-3Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by Frequency, Unidirectional Applications

3000 GCPOperating

Unidirectional Approach Length (Feet)

Frequency (Hz)




Minimum* Maximum Minimum* Maximum Minimum* Maximum86 700 4,200 700 5,900 700 7,080114 525 3,700 525 5,300 525 6,360156 420 3,200 420 4,600 420 5,520211 400 2,650 400 3,900 400 4,680285 400 2,150 400 3,300 400 3,960348 400 1,850 400 2,850 400 3,420430 400 1,650 400 2,500 400 3,000525 400 1,450 400 2,150 400 2,580645 400 1,250 400 1,850 400 2,220790 400 1,075 400 1,550 400 1,860970 400 1,000 400 1,425 400 1,710

*Based upon use of hardwire or wideband shunts


1.3 TRACK LEADS

In most installations in which a 3000 GCP is operating in a single track circuit, four track leadsare used to connect the 3000 GCP to the track; transmitter leads on one side of the crossing andreceiver leads on the other. Transmitter and receiver track lead connections that run from theinstrument house to the rails are to be twisted number 6 AWG, or larger if needed. In unidirec-tional or simulated bidirectional installations, the transmitter leads are to be located adjacent tothe insulated joints. Since the transmitter leads should be as short as possible, the leads should beconnected to the rails on the same side of the crossing as the instrument housing. Within theinstrument housing, all wires carrying transmit and receive signals are to be number 10 AWG orlarger. Leads connecting the transmitter to the rails are not to exceed the maximum lengthsspecified in table 1-4. The lengths of the wire runs inside the instrument housing should be asshort as possible. Generally, total track lead length should be limited to 500 feet. This includes thelength of both the transmitter and receiver pairs. Each pair of wires should be twisted at least twoturns per foot. When an island circuit is used, the GCP transmitter pair should be separated to themaximum extent possible from the receiver pair, both below ground and within the instrumenthousing.

NOTE

When individual lead lengths exceed the distancesspecified in table 1-4, a six-wire application shouldbe considered.

Table 1-4 Maximum Transmit Wire Lengths

(Four-wire Applications)Standard Safetran GCP

Frequency (Hz)Maximum TransmitLead Length (Feet)

86 100114 125156 150211 200

285-970 250

For six-wire hookups, the minimum recommended wire size is number 6 AWG with a maximumdistance from the GCP to the remote track wire feed points of 3,500 feet. Refer to the notesregarding six-wire hookups on figure 1-6 and tables 1-5 and 1-6.

NOTE

When splicing track connections, welded splicesshould be used. Use of Kearney connectors shouldbe avoided.


1.4 MINIMUM APPROACH LENGTH VS. FREQUENCY

The shortest approach distance at which a low-frequency 3000 GCP will provide reliableoperation is generally a function of the GCP operating frequency plus the gauge and length of thecopper transmit wires connected to the rails. When a low-frequency 3000 GCP is controlling botha main track and a short siding track as illustrated below, the shortest permissible approachdistance at the installation is indicated in tables 1-5 and 1-6. The minimum approach distancesgiven are based upon GCP operating frequency versus the transmit wire type and length forbidirectional and unidirectional installations.

Tables 1-5 and 1-6 indicate that, for the lower GCP operating frequencies, the shortest approachdistance is obtained by using a six-wire connection to the rails. The next shortest distance requiresdoubling of each transmit wire (two number 6 AWG copper wires in parallel for each transmitwire) or single number 4 AWG copper wires. Refer to the tables to determine the appropriatetransmit wire gauge and length for the applicable minimum approach distances.

Table 1-5 Minimum Bidirectional Approach Length Vs. Frequency

Minimum Approach Length (Feet)3000 GCP Transmit Wire Length (No. 6 Copper)Transmit

Frequency(Hz)

Six-WireConnection(See Note)

100 FeetDouble

(Or 1 No. 4)100 Feet 150 Feet 200 Feet

86 1000 1000 1350 ----- -----114 750 800 1150 ----- -----156 600 700 1000 1150 1350211 475 600 850 1000 1150285 400 550 750 850 1000348 400 500 700 800 850430 400 500 650 750 750525 400 500 600 700 700645 400 500 550 650 650790 400 500 500 600 600970 400 500 475 550 550


NOTE

In tables 1-5 and 1-6, when an island frequency istransmitted on the same leads as the GCP operatingfrequency in a six-wire hookup, maximum transmitwire length is 250 feet.

Table 1-6 Minimum Unidirectional Approach Length Vs. Frequency

Minimum Approach Length (Feet)3000 GCP Transmit Wire Length (No. 6 Copper)Transmit

Frequency(Hz)

Six-WireConnection(See Note)

100 FeetDouble

(Or 1 No. 4)100 Feet 150 Feet 200 Feet

86 700 700 945 ----- -----114 525 560 805 ----- -----156 420 490 700 805 945211 400 420 595 700 805285 400 400 525 595 700348 400 400 490 560 595430 400 400 455 525 525525 400 400 420 490 490645 400 400 400 455 455790 400 400 400 420 420970 400 400 400 400 400

Installations containing an approach that does not meet the minimum distance restrictions speci-fied in tables 1-5 and 1-6 will frequently exhibit a 30-second overring condition at the crossing.This is caused by a T1 or T2 gain check error, which is indicated by a 9111 or 9112 errormessage being generated by the 3000 GCP.

1.5 TYPICAL APPLICATION DRAWINGS

The following figures illustrate a variety of typical 3000 GCP applications. Also included areequipment wiring and mounting diagrams. For more comprehensive application information, referto the Application Guidelines Manual for the 3000 GCP Family.

Figure No. Title

1-1 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, One Track

1-2 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, Two Tracks

1-3 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Unidirectional Application, Back-to-Back


Figure No. Title

1-4 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP Track Connections, UnidirectionalApplication, Two Tracks, Back-to-Back

1-5 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional DAX-UAX Interconnect Application With Remote Unidirectional Unit, One Track

1-6 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, UnidirectionalWith Remote Feed Point, One Track (Six-Wire)

1-7 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application With External Automatic Transfer, One Track

1-8 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP Unidirectional Application WithFrequency Slaving And Cascaded Relay Drives, Two Tracks

1-9 Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP DAX-UAX Interconnections,Two Crossings

1-10 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Motion Sensor Application With Style “C” TrackCircuit

1-11 Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application With Remote Unit,Multiple DAXing, One Track

1-12 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application, One Track

1-13 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Unidirectional Application, One Track

1-14 Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application With Crossover in MS/GCP Approach, Two Tracks (With Crossover Relay Logic)

1-15 Typical 3000 GCP Four-wire And Six-wire Unidirectional InstallationsOperating in The Bidirectional Simulation Mode

1-16 Typical 3000 GCP Bidirectional Application, Unidirectional 3008 GCP With Remote Feed Point, One Track

1-17 Recommended Surge Suppression Wiring For 3000 GCP’s

1-18 Models 3000, 3008, 3000ND, And 3000ND2 GCP Mounting Dimensions

1-19 Model 3000D2 And 3008D2 GCP Mounting Dimensions

1-20 Model 3000D2L GCP Mounting Dimensions


Figure 1-1Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, One Track

(Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-1Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, One Track

(Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-2Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, Two Tracks

(Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-2Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, Two Tracks

(Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-3Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Unidirectional Application, Back-to-Back

(Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-3Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Unidirectional Application, Back-to-Back

(Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-4Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP Track Connections, Unidirectional Application,

Two Tracks, Back-to-Back


Figure 1-5Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional DAX-UAX Interconnect

Application With Remote Unidirectional Unit, One Track (Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-5Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional DAX-UAX Interconnect

Application With remote Unidirectional Unit, One Track (Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-6Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, Unidirectional Unit

With Remote Feed Point, One Track (Six Wire) (Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-6Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application, Unidirectional Unit

With Remote Feed Point, One Track (Six Wire) (Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-7Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application

With External Automatic Transfer, One Track


Figure 1-8Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP Unidirectional Application

With Frequency Slaving And Cascaded Relay Drives, Two Tracks


Figure 1-9Typical 3000/3000D2/3000D2L GCP DAX-UAX Interconnections, Two Crossings


Figure 1-10Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Motion Sensor Application

With Style “C” Track Circuit (Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-10Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Motion Sensor Application

With Style “C” Track Circuit (Sheet 2 of 2)



With Remote Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track (Sheet 1 of 2)



With Remote Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track (Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-12Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application, One Track


Figure 1-13Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Unidirectional Application, One Track


Figure 1-14Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application With Crossover In MS/GCP

Approach, Two Tracks (With Crossover Relay Logic) (Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-14Typical 3000ND/ND2 GCP Bidirectional Application With Crossover In MS/GCP

Approach, Two Tracks (With Crossover Relay Logic) (Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-15Typical 3000 GCP Four-Wire And Six-Wire Unidirectional Installations

Operating In The Bidirectional Simulation Mode


Figure 1-16Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application With

Remote 3008/3008D2 Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track (Sheet 1 of 2)


Figure 1-16Typical 3000/3000D2 GCP Bidirectional Application With

Remote 3008/3008D2 Unit, Multiple DAXing, One Track (Sheet 2 of 2)


Figure 1-17Recommended Surge Suppression Wiring for 3000 GCP’s


Figure 1-18Model 3000, 3008, 3000ND, And 3000ND2 GCP Mounting Dimensions


Figure 1-19Model 3000D2 And 3008D2 GCP Mounting Dimensions


Figure 1-20Model 3000D2L GCP Mounting Dimensions


SECTION II

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION

2.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Each 3000 GCP is housed in an aluminum case assembly containing a backplane-mountedmotherboard (see figures 2-1 through 2-7). The motherboard provides connectors to accommo-date a maximum of 10 plug-in-type printed circuit modules in Models 3000 and 3008, 21 modules(includes a transfer timer module) in Models 3000D2, 3000D2L and 3008D2, 6 modules in the3000ND, and 12 modules (includes a transfer timer module) in the 3000ND2. Refer to table 2-1for complete system module/assembly requirements.

With the exception of installations that require six-wire track hookup, all external wiringconnections to a 3000 GCP case are accomplished via standard AAR terminals arranged inhorizontal rows across the front panel of the case. When a track is connected in a six-wireconfiguration, the two additional check receiver wires per track are routed through a small holeequipped with a protective rubber grommet which is provided in the left side of the Model 3000,3000D2, 3008, and 3008D2 GCP cases. Indicators (LED’s) located on the front panel of each3000 GCP case and on each plug-in module provide a visual indication of module operating statusplus various system functions. The functions of each AAR terminal and LED indicator, as well asany switches located on the case and modules, are described in the following paragraphs.

2.1 PLUG-IN PRINTED CIRCUIT MODULES

Each plug-in module used in the 3000 GCP is 8 inches (20.3 centimeters) high by 8.9 inches (22.6centimeters) wide and is equipped with a dual 43-pin connector on one edge which plugs into acorresponding edge connector on the motherboard. An ejector lever is mounted on the top cornerof each module (except 80017, 80028, and 80153) to facilitate removal from the case. Eachejector lever is stamped with the module part number. See table 2-1 for system modulerequirements.

NOTE

The following module descriptions refer to the mod-ules comprising a single module set which occupiesa single bay of a card cage. For dual-bay cases(Model 3000D2, 3008D2, and 3000D2L) or splitsingle-bay case (Model 3000ND2), the module setsin each bay (or each half bay in the Model3000ND2) must be identical except as indicated intable 2-1. The card cage module slots are numberedfrom left to right as viewed from the front of thecase. For discussion purposes, the module slots arereferred to by slot number as M1, M2, M3, etc.


Figure 2-1Model 3000 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-2Model 3000D2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-3Model 3000D2L GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-4Model 3000ND GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-5Model 3000ND2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-6Model 3008 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Figure 2-7Model 3008D2 GCP With All Optional Modules Installed, Front view


Table 2-1System Module/Assembly Requirements

System Module Slot Assignments1

Module Part No. Configuration Models3000 & 3008

Models3000D2 &3008D2

Model3000D2L

Model3000ND

Model3000ND2

Island (1 or 2) 80011 1 Island (Track 1) M1 M1 & M112 M1 & M113 M1 M1 & M113

(Optional) 2 Islands6 (Track 1) M1 M1 & M112 M1 & M113 n/a n/a(Track 2) M2 M2 & M122 M2 & M123 n/a n/a

80012 1 Track (Track)10 (M2)7 (M2 & M12)8 n/a n/a n/aTransceiver Track 1 M3 M3 & M13 M3 & M13 M2 M2 & M10

(Minimum 1) 2 Tracks4,6 M3 & M4 M3, M4,M13, & M14

M3, M4,M13, & M14

n/a n/a

Relay Drive 80013 All (M3)7

M5(M3 & M13)8

M5 & M15M5 & M15 M3 M3 & M9

Processor 800145 All6 M6 M6 & M16 M6 & M16 M4 M4 & M8Processor 800449 All 8-DAX units (M4)7 (M4 & M14)8 n/a n/a n/a

Data Recorder(Optional)

80015 --- (M5)7

M7(M5 & M15)8

M7 & M17M7 & M17 M5 M5 & M7

80016 1 DAX Module (M6)7

M8(M6 & M16)8

M8 & M18M8 & M18 n/a n/a

DAX(Optional)

2 DAX Modules (M6 & M7)7

M8 & M9(M6, M7,

M16 & M17)8

M8, M9,M18, & M19

M8, M9,M18, & M19 n/a n/a

3 DAX Modules10 (M6, M7 &M8)7

(M6, M7, M8,M16, M17 &

M18)8n/a n/a n/a

4 DAX Modules10 (M6, M7, M8& M9)7

(M6, M7, M8,M9, M16,

M17, M18 &M19)8

n/a n/a n/a

Control InterfaceAssembly (IncludesKeyboard Interface

Printed Circuit Board,80017)

80020(3000, 3000D2,

3000D2L, 3000ND,3008, & 3008D2)

M10 M10 & M20 M10 & M20 M6 n/a

Transfer Timer 80028 3000D2, 3000D2L, &3000ND2

n/a M21 M21 n/a M12

Transfer Timer 80037 3008D2 only n/a (M21)8 n/a n/a n/aControl Interface

Assembly (IncludesKeyboard Interface

Printed Circuit Board,80153

80029(3000ND2) n/a n/a n/a n/a M6

1. Module slots are numbered from left to right as viewed from the front of the case and are identified as M1, M2,M3, etc.

2. Corresponding island modules in the upper and lower bays of the card cage should be the same frequency.3. Corresponding island modules in the right and left halves of the card cage should be the same frequency.4. When two transceivers are used (two tracks), both must operate at the same frequency.5. May be equipped with processor module(s), 80044 or 80214, in place of processor module, 80014.6. This configuration not applicable to 8-DAX units (models 3008 & 3008D2).7. Module slot assignment(s) for model 3008 8-DAX unit only.8. Module slot assignment(s) for model 3008D2 8-DAX unit only.9. 8-DAX units (3008 & 3008D2) may be equipped with processor module 80214 in place of 80044 module.10. Applicable to 8-DAX units only (models 3008 & 3008D2).


2.1.1 Island Module, 80011

Each island module consists of separate transmitter and receiver circuits. The transmitter sectionconsists of a frequency-shifted oscillator operating at a frequency (4 to 20.2 kHz) which providesa well defined island circuit. The transmitter circuits are transformer-coupled to the front panelXMT 1 and XMT 2 terminals which are then connected by a pair of wires to the GCP transmitfeed points on the rails, providing a path for both the GCP and island transmitter signals.

The island receiver circuits are transformer-coupled to the TRACK RCV 1 and RCV 2 terminalson the front panel. The transmitted signal passes through the island track circuit into the receiverwhere it enters a bandpass filter, an amplifier, and a two-input relay drive signal gate. The signalfrom the amplifier also follows a parallel path where the frequency shift modulation applied to thetransmitter is compared to ensure that the correct signal is being received.

The output from the island’s check channel is the second input to the island relay drive signal gatewhich maintains the island relay voltage. This voltage is applied to the ISL RLY terminal(s) on thefront panel. When a train reaches the island circuit, the island relay drive signal ceases, ensuringthat the voltage continues to be removed from the GCP RLY terminals. When the last car clearsthe island circuit, the transmitter signal returns to normal, activating the receiver and allowing thecrossing protection to recover.

2.1.2 Transceiver Module, 80012

The basic 3000 GCP system includes a single transceiver module. However, in the Model 3000,3000D2, and 3000D2L cases, a second identical transceiver module can be added to enable asingle system to operate with two unidirectional approaches, two bidirectional approaches, or oneunidirectional and one bidirectional approach. When two transceiver modules are used, theprogrammed GCP frequency is common to both track circuits and the two transceivers cannot beprogrammed for different frequencies. High power transmitter drive is also a standard feature andeliminates the requirement for a high-current transmitter coupler.

The transceiver module contains transmitter and receiver transformers, transmitter driver, receiverfilters, amplitude and zero-crossing detectors, plus digitally-controlled gain and attenuatorcircuits.

2.1.3 Relay Drive Module, 80013

A single relay drive module is required for each system. The relay drive module contains a relaydriver circuit, analog-to-digital converters, system power supply (DC-to-DC converter), plusisland, UAX1, and ENA/UAX2 isolation circuits.

2.1.4 Processor Module, 80014

Each system requires a single processor module which contains the microprocessor, memory(including both RAM and ROM), and a digitally-controlled frequency generator. The operatingprogram for the 3000 GCP is contained in programmable read only memory (PROM) devices that


are located on the processor module. This permits operational features to be enhanced by simplyinstalling updated firmware (system operating program stored in a hardware device).

2.1.5 Processor Module, 80044 (Equipped With 9V065 Software)

The later 80044 processor module is interchangeable with the earlier 80014 processor in all 3000GCP units, including eight-DAX Models 3008 and 3008D2. The module improves 3000 GCPoperation in areas where poor track shunting conditions are prevalent. A unique software feature(selectable during programming) detects the nonlinear fluctuations in track impedance (EZ) whichresult from poor shunting and automatically switches to an enhanced detection (ED) operatingmode. In the ED mode, the 3000 GCP effectively operates as a highly sensitive motion sensor andinternal software logic compensates for any track impedance fluctuations that are detected as atrain approaches or moves away from a crossing.

WARNING

EVEN THOUGH ENHANCED DETECTION ISDESIRED AND PROGRAMMED “ON”, IFTRAIN TRAFFIC IS MINIMAL, ESPECIALLYIN DARK TERRITORY, RUST BUILD-UP ONTHE RAILS MAY NOT ALLOW ANY TRACKSHUNTING TO OCCUR. THE 3000 GCPMUST DETECT TRAIN SHUNTING (REA-SONABLE EZ FLUCTUATION) IN ORDERTO DETECT POOR SHUNTING.

NOTE

Intermittent poor shunting can result just aboutanywhere due to numerous causes but generallyoccurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/ortransit operation. Lack of any shunting generallyoccurs in dark territory where no DC or AC trackcircuits exist and few trains run. Track shunting indark territory can be easily improved using methodssimilar to those employed in style-C track circuits(but without the need for so many insulated joints).This involves the use of one insulated joint at thefar end of each approach and the application of aDC voltage to the track at the crossing to improveshunting and thus allow the 3000 EnhancedDetection software to function properly.


The Safetran DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049,(see Section III) provides a very cost effectivesolution for improving shunting in dark territory byapplying a nominal 6 volts DC to the track at thecrossing to break down the film on the rails. ThisDC voltage is isolated from the battery. Only twoinsulated joints are required; one at the far end ofeach approach. The DC Shunting EnhancementPanel can also be easily incorporated inapplications involving overlapping approachesfrom two or more crossings. Narrow-bandtermination shunts are required in all applicationsof the 80049 panel.

To accommodate the extensive requirements of the enhanced track shunting detection softwareprogram, the 80044 processor is equipped with additional onboard memory and operates at afaster internal clock speed. For a description of the 80044 processor module, refer to SectionVIII, System Enhancements.

2.1.6 Processor Module, 80214 (Equipped With 9V121 Software)

In addition to all of the features described in paragraph 2.1.5 for the 80044 processor module, the80214 processor module also provides independent frequency operation on both track 1 (T1) andtrack 2 (T2) when installed in either of Safetran’s new dual-frequency 3000 GCP cases. While the80214 processor module is fully compatible with all 3000 GCP models (including eight-DAXunits), the dual-frequency feature is available only when the module is installed in one of the dual-frequency cases, which are identified as follows:

GCP Model

Single-FrequencyCase Part Number

Dual-FrequencyCase Part Number

3000 80000 802003000D2 80100 80110

For a description of the 80214 processor module, refer to Section VIII, System Enhancements.

2.1.7 Data Recorder Module, 80015

The optional data recorder module allows information concerning train moves and system statusmessages to be stored for future use. The module contains a microprocessor, onboard memory(RAM and ROM), plus a real-time clock. A long-life lithium battery provides backup power in theevent of failure of the primary power source. An RS232C interface is provided for local access tostored information via a personal computer (PC) or portable printer.

A basic system will retain train history information for a maximum of 20 moves without the datarecorder module. However, only warning time and speed for each move is stored (not date and


time). When two transceiver modules are used, a maximum of 10 moves will be retained for eachtrack circuit (T1 and T2). With the data recorder module installed, event capacity is increased toapproximately 3,000 events, including the date and time for each event. Refer to Section IX, DataRecorder, for additional information.

2.1.8 DAX Module, 80016 (3000, 3000D2, 3008, 3008D2, And 3000D2L Only)

For Model 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L GCP’s only, a maximum of two DAX modules may beused in each module set in the system. Each module provides two independent DAX relay drivesfor a maximum of four per module set in the system.

A maximum of four DAX modules may be used per module set in the 3008 and 3008D2 8-DAXsystems. This provides a maximum of 8 DAX’s per module set in these systems only.

2.1.9 Control Interface Assembly, 80020 (All Models Except 3000ND2)

The control interface assembly (80020) contains the keyboard interface printed circuit board(80017) and is used in Model 3000, 3008, 3000D2, 3008D2, 3000D2L, and 3000ND GCP’s. Theinterface assembly is part of the basic 3000 GCP system and is installed at the right end of thecard cage (the center in the 3000ND). The unit provides the interface between the detachableKeyboard/Display Control Unit, 80019, and the 3000 GCP data bus.

2.1.10 Transfer Timer, 80028 (3000D2, 3000D2L, And 3000ND2 Only)

The far right card slot (M21) in the lower bay of the Model 3000D2 GCP, the far right card slot(M21) of the standby module set on the left side of the case near the center of the Model3000D2L GCP, and the far right slot (M12) in the Model 3000ND2 GCP contain the transfertimer module (80028). If the main GCP circuits (located in the upper bay of the 3000D2 GCP andthe left half of the bay in the 3000D2L and 3000ND2 GCP’s) fail, relays and associated controlcircuits on the transfer timer module provide switch over from the main GCP circuits to identicalstandby circuits (located in the lower bay of 3000D2, the left half of the bay in the 3000D2L, andthe right half of the bay in the 3000ND2). A switch-over interval ranging from 1 to 31 minutes in1-minute increments is selectable on the module. Programming is generally not required, however,since the unit is set at the factory for the recommended delay of 3 minutes.

During the switch-over period, the crossing protection equipment (gates, lights, bells, etc.) isenabled. In the event the standby circuits fail following switch over, circuits on the transfer timermodule will continue to search for operational GCP circuits.

The switch-over interval is programmable via DIP switch S4 located on the transfer timer module(see figure 2-8). The five S4 segments correspond to the binary values printed on the printedcircuit board adjacent to S4. To select a value, the corresponding switch lever(s) is/are presseddown (ON) as shown. Table 2-2 lists the switch settings for available transfer intervals.


Figure 2-8Switch Locations on Transfer Timer Module, 80028

Table 2-2Transfer Timer Interval Selection

Transfer Time

Transfer Timer Switch S4 Positions (80028 only)

Switch SW3 Positions (80037 only)(Minutes) 16 8 4 2 1

1 Up Up Up Up Down2 Up Up Up Down Up3 Up Up Up Down Down4 Up Up Down Up Up5 Up Up Down Up Down6 Up Up Down Down Up7 Up Up Down Down Down8 Up Down Up Up Up9 Up Down Up Up Down10 Up Down Up Down Up11 Up Down Up Down Down12 Up Down Down Up Up13 Up Down Down Up Down14 Up Down Down Down Up15 Up Down Down Down Down16 Down Up Up Up Up17 Down Up Up Up Down18 Down Up Up Down Up


Table 2-2 ConcludedTransfer

TimeTransfer Timer

Switch S4 Positions (80028 only)Switch SW3 Positions (80037 only)

(Minutes) 16 8 4 2 119 Down Up Up Down Down20 Down Up Down Up Up21 Down Up Down Up Down22 Down Up Down Down Up23 Down Up Down Down Down24 Down Down Up Up Up25 Down Down Up Up Down26 Down Down Up Down Up27 Down Down Up Down Down28 Down Down Down Up Up29 Down Down Down Up Down30 Down Down Down Down Up31 Down Down Down Down Down

Since the transfer timer module also controls switch over of the 3000D2/D2L GCP DAX circuits,DIP switch S1 on the module must also be set to the corresponding number of DAX'sprogrammed for the system. A switch section is set to the DAX NOT USED position when thesystem is not programmed for the associated DAX (see figure 2-8). For example, when thesystem is programmed for DAX's A and B, switch sections A and B (identified on the PC boardadjacent to S1) must be set to the DAX USED position while switch sections C and D must be setto the DAX NOT USED position. For 3000ND and 3000ND2 GCP’s, all S1 sections must beset to the DAX NOT USED position. For a description of the remaining switches shown infigure 2-8, refer to table 2-4.

2.1.11 Control Interface Assembly, 80029 (3000ND2 Only)

The control interface assembly (80029) contains the keyboard interface printed circuit board(80153) and is used in the Model 3000ND2 GCP only. The interface assembly is part of the basic3000ND2 GCP system and is installed in the center of the card cage. The unit provides theinterface between the detachable keyboard/display control unit (80019) and the 3000ND2 GCPdata bus in each half of the card cage.

Control signals from the transfer timer module (80028) are applied to tri-stated switching circuitson the keyboard interface printed circuit board (80153) to determine which half of the card cage isinterfaced to the keyboard.


2.1.12 Transfer Timer, 80037 (3008D2 Only)

The far right card slot (M21) in the lower bay of the Model 3008D2 GCP contains the 80037Transfer Timer Module. If the main GCP circuits in the upper bay fail, relays and associatedcontrol circuits on the 80037 module provide switch over from the main GCP circuits to identicalstandby GCP circuits in the lower bay. A switch-over interval ranging from 1 to 31 minutes in1-minute increments is selectable on the module. Programming is generally not required, however,since the unit is set at the factory for the recommended delay of 3 minutes.

During the switch-over period, the crossing protection equipment (gates, lights, bells, etc.) isenabled. In the event the standby circuits fail following switch over, circuits on the 80037 modulewill continue to search for operational GCP circuits.

The switch-over interval is programmable via DIP switch SW3 located on the 80037 module(Figure 2-9). The five segments of SW3 correspond to the binary values printed on the 80037circuit board adjacent to SW3. To select a value, press the corresponding switch lever(s) to thedown or closed (ON) position as indicated in Figure 2-9. See Table 2-2 for time interval switchsettings.

Figure 2-9Switch Locations On Transfer Timer Module, 80037


Since the 80037 module controls switch over of the 3008D2 GCP DAX circuits, switches SW1and SW2 on the module must also be set to correspond with the number of DAX's programmedfor the system. The ON position marked on the switch is the "DAX NOT USED" position (seeFigure 2-9). Therefore, if DAX's A and B are programmed, then switch sections A and B(marked on the PC board adjacent to SW2) must be set to the off position and the remainingswitch sections on both switches must be in the ON position.

The remainder of the switches identified on Figure 2-9 are described in Table 2-4.

2.2 KEYBOARD/DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT, 80019

The keyboard/display control unit attaches to an edge connector on the keyboard interface printedcircuit board (80017 or 80153) via an opening in the front of the control interface assembly(80020 or 80029) and serves as the communications interface between the user and the system.Programming the system for specific applications is accomplished through simple keystrokeswhile the liquid crystal display enables the user to view diagnostic information, applicationprogramming entries, and train move data.

Figure 2-103000 GCP Keyboard/Display


2.2.1 Keyboard

The one-piece membrane keyboard (figure 2-10) contains 20 embossed keys arranged in fourvertical columns of five keys each. Refer to Section IV, Keyboard/Display And MenuDescriptions, for a discussion of the keys and the function(s) that each controls.

2.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display

The liquid crystal, alphanumeric display consists of two rows, each containing 16 characterpositions. All programmed parameters, system power supply voltages, and recorded data areviewed on the display. Figure 2-11 illustrates typical displays for each of the various keyboardselected operating modes. Refer to Section IV, Keyboard/Display And Menu Descriptions, forexamples and explanations of each display.

The display viewing angle can be changed to permit easier viewing when the 3000 GCP ismounted at or below eye level. Switch S1 (see figure 2-12) located on the keyboard interfaceprinted circuit board (80017 or 80153) provides viewing angle control. With S1 in the downposition, the display is best viewed from a position where the line of sight is perpendicular to thedisplay (eye level). By setting S1 to the up position, the display is easier to read when viewedfrom above at an angle of approximately 45 degrees from horizontal. The control interfaceassembly (80020 or 80029) must be removed from the 3000 GCP case to gain access to switchS1.

InitialSystemDisplay:

MODEL 3000MICRO GCP

HistoryMode

Display:

HISTORY T1 <08> WARNING TIME: 30

ProgramMode

Display:

PROGRAM NUMBER OF TRACKS: 2

ResetMode

Display:

SYSTEM RESET

FunctionMode

Display:

T1 SWITCH TO MSEZ LEVEL: 10

SetupMode

Display:

SETUP T1

StatusMode

Display:

STATUS T1 EZ: 100 EX: 87

DiagnosticMode

Display:

ERROR 9118 <02> T2 GAIN CHECK

Figure 2-11Typical Display Indications For Operating Modes


Figure 2-12Location of Display Viewing Angle Switch, S1

2.3 MODULE INDICATORS, CONTROLS, SWITCHES, TEST JACKS, ANDCONNECTORS

Refer to the module locator guides in figures 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, and 2-16 for the location of eachLED status indicator, control, switch, test jack, and connector described in tables 2-3 (statusindicators), 2-4 (control and switches), and 2-5 (test jacks and connectors).

2.4 FRONT PANEL TERMINALS, INDICATORS, AND CONTROLS

Models 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L GCP front panel terminals, indicators, and controls, areshown in figures 2-1 (3000), 2-2 (3000D2), and 2-3 (3000D2L) and are described in table 2-6.Similar information for Models 3000ND and 3000ND2 GCP’s is provided in figures 2-4 and 2-5and table 2-7. For Models 3008 and 3008D2, refer to figures 2-6 and 2-7 and table 2-8.

2.5 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Figure 2-17 at the end of this section is a simplified block diagram of the 3000 GCP system.

2-20D

ocument N

o.: SIG

-00-96-05 Version: C

2-21D

ocument N

o.: SIG


2-22D

ocument N

o.: SIG


2-23D

ocument N

o.: SIG



Table 2-3Module-Mounted LED Status Indicators

Module Nomenclature Indication80011 STATUS Lighted steady = island relay drive present

Extinguished = no island relay drive80012 STA Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on module or trackPRD Motion indicator. Normally lighted; extinguished when

inbound motion is detected (meaningless when a trainoccupies the island circuit)

80013 STA Lighted steady = module operationalFlashing = problem on module


ACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational andprogram is running; lighted steady or extinguished if processorfails

80015 STATUS Lighted steady = module operationalFlashing = problem on module

LO BATT On-board battery status indicator. Lighted steady when on-board lithium battery voltage is normal; flashes when battery islow

80016 STATUS Lighted steady = module operationalFlashing = problem on module

80020(3000, 3008,

3000D2,3008D2, &3000D2L

Only)

n/a Status LED. Mounted on keyboard interface printed circuitboard (80017) and extends through panel above controlinterface assembly. Lighted steady = assembly operationalFlashing = problem on keyboard interface printed circuit board

80028(3000D2,

3000D2L, &3000ND2

Only)

XFER Transfer indicator. Normally lighted; extinguishes whenmain-to-standby GCP transfer occurs

80029(3000ND2

Only)

n/a Status LED’s. Mounted on keyboard interface printed circuitboard (80153) and extend through panel above controlinterface assembly. Each LED indicates status for one of thetwo identical interface circuits on the printed circuit board.Lighted steady = assembly operationalFlashing = problem in associated interface circuit on printedcircuit boardExtinguished = circuit not in use


Table 2-3 ConcludedModule Nomenclature Indication80037

(3008D2 Only)XFER Transfer indicator. Normally lighted; extinguishes when

main-to-standby GCP transfer occurs80044 STA Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on moduleACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational and

program is running; lighted steady or extinguished if processorfails


ACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational andprogram is running; lighted steady or extinguished if processorfails

SERVICE Flashes when the SERVICE REQUEST push button on themodule is pressed and when the network is accessed.

Table 2-4Module-Mounted Control And Switches

Module Nomenclature Function80011 ADJ

(pot)Potentiometer for island circuit adjustment during systemcalibration (see section VI)

80015 CLEAR-OFF-PRINT

Controls data recorder module memory clear and printfunctions

80028(3000D2,

STBY-AUTO-MAIN

Selects standby/main operating system or automatic transfermode

3000D2L, &3000ND2

TEST When pressed, forces automatic transfer from main to standbyGCP

Only) RESET Following transfer, press to return to main GCP.80037

(3008D2,STBY-

AUTO-MAINSelects standby/main operating system or automatic transfermode

Only) TEST When pressed, forces automatic transfer from main to standbyGCP

RESET Following transfer, press to return to main GCP.80214 SERVICE

REQUESTWhen pressed, accesses the network via the Echelon.


Table 2-5Module-Mounted Test Jacks And Connectors

Module Nomenclature Function80011 +7 +7 VDC test jack

+4 +4 VDC test jackMOD Modulation test jack. Measures -5.8 VDC when modulation

has been detected.ENV Envelope test jack. Voltage from +1 to -5 VDC with -3 VDC

at minimum detection threshold and -5 VDC at saturation.COM Signal common test jack

80012 Z1 Analog approximation (not linearized) of EZ value on mainchannel as displayed on 80019 display. Approximately 10 VDCwhen no train is present; 0 VDC with a train in the island circuit

Z2 Analog equivalent of check channel (EZ)COM Signal common test jack

80015 J2 RS232 PC/printer connector80028

(3000D2,3000D2L, &

3000ND2Only)

COM Signal common test jack

80037(3008D2,

Only)

COM Signal common test jack

80044 J1 RS232 serial port which permits technical support personnel tomonitor 3000 GCP functions via a laptop or PC.

80214 J1 Dual RJ11 connectors. For use with Echelon® bus.

Table 2-6Front Panel Terminals, Indicators, And Controls

(Models 3000, 3000D2, And 3000D2L)GCP

ModelTerminal/-

Indicator/Control Nomenclature Function 3000, TB1-1 TRACK 1 XMT 1 GCP track 1 transmitter output to track

3000D2, TB1-2 TRACK 1 XMT 2 GCP track 1 transmitter output to track& TB1-3 TRACK 1 RCV 1 GCP track 1 receiver input from track

3000D2L TB1-4 TRACK 1 RCV 2 GCP track 1 receiver input from trackTB1-5 ENA

(UAX2)Used to cascade the relay drive output(XR circuit) from another GCP. Voltagelevel at this terminal must be greater than+5 VDC. Normally connected to TB1-6(B) when not in cascade operation.


Table 2-6 ContinuedGCP

ModelTerminal/-

Indicator/Control Nomenclature Function 3000,

3000D2,&

3000D2L

TB1-5 (cont’d) ENA(UAX2)

Beginning with “F” level software, theENAble terminal of the GCP can providetwo functions: (1) a conventional ENAfunction when programmed for zero timewhen cascading GCP outputs, or (2) canoperate as a second UAX input for usewith the track 2 section of the GCP. Anew programming step has been added tothe Program menu to select a pickupdelay time for the UAX2 function of theterminals. A 25-second ENA/UAX2default time is provided.

TB1-6 B Battery B input to GCP caseTB1-7 MS/GCP

CONTROLExternal input which can be used toconvert GCP to motion sensor byconnecting terminal to negative battery(N) via external relay. Relay contactsmust connect terminal to positive battery(B) when not in motion sensor mode.When not used, connect to TB1-6 (B).

TB1-8 N Battery N input to GCP caseTB1-9 + GCP RLY Positive (+) GCP relay drive output.

Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms.TB1-10 - GCP RLY Negative (-) GCP relay drive output.

Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms.TB1-11 + ISL RLY 1 Positive (+) island 1 relay drive output.

May be used to drive external island relayof 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desired

TB1-12 - ISL RLY 1 Negative (-) island 1 relay drive output.May be used to drive external island relayof 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desired

TB1-13 + DAX A RLY Positive (+) DAX A relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-14 - DAX A RLY Negative (-) DAX A relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-15 + DAX B RLY Positive (+) DAX B relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-16 - DAX B RLY Negative (-) DAX B relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms



ModelTerminal/-

Indicator/Control Nomenclature Function

3000D2LOnly

TB1-17 TRACK 1CHK 1

Check receiver input from track 1

TB1-18 TRACK 1CHK 2


3000,3000D2,

LED GCP GCP relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

&3000D2L

LED ISL 1 Island 1 relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED ISL 2 Island 2 relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

Switch POWER ON/OFF Controls main power to GCP circuitsTB2-1 TRACK 2

XMT 1GCP Track 2 transmitter output to track

TB2-2 TRACK 2XMT 2

GCP Track 2 transmitter output to track

TB2-3 TRACK 2RCV 1

GCP Track 2 receiver input from track

TB2-4 TRACK 2RCV 2

GCP Track 2 receiver input from track

3000Only

TB2-5 AT Signal output used in automatic transferapplications. Connects to AT terminal onautomatic transfer timer unit (80024) toindicate to the timer unit that the GCP hasdetected a train. No connection if notused

3000D2&

3000D2LOnly

TB2-5 TRANSIND

Automatic transfer indication output.Terminal is at +12 VDC when mainsystem is on-line. Terminal drops to 0VDC when unit switches to standbysystem. No connection if not used

3000,3000D2,

&3000D2L

TB2-6 SLAVING Connects to SLAVING terminal on other3000 GCP when units are frequencyslaved. Both GCP’s must be programmedfor proper slave status. No connection ifnot used

TB2-7 UAX +(UAX1)

Positive (+) input to GCP from UAX(upstream adjacent crossing). GCP mustbe programmed for use. No connection ifnot used



ModelTerminal/-


3000,3000D2,

&3000D2L

TB2-7 (cont’d) UAX +(UAX1)

Beginning with “F” level software, theUAX front panel terminals (TB2-7 andTB2-8) are referred to as UAX1 and areused exclusively for control of the track 1section of the 3000 GCP. Only the track 1island circuit, upon pickup, will cancelany UAX1 time remaining as the trainleaves the island circuit. The pickup delaytime is a programmable entry with 25seconds as the default.

TB2-8 UAX - Negative (-) input to GCP from UAX(upstream adjacent crossing). GCP mustbe programmed for use. No connection ifnot used

RS232Connector

J1RECORDER

Connector for data recorder interfaceassembly (80025) 25-line interface cable.Occupies positions TB2-9 and TB2-10

TB2-11 + ISL RLY 2 Positive (+) island 2 relay drive output.May be used to drive external island relayof 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desired

TB2-12 - ISL RLY 2 Negative (-) island 2 relay drive output.May be used to drive external island relay,where desired. Drives relays of 400 to1,000 ohms

TB2-13 + DAX C RLY Positive (+) DAX C relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-14 - DAX C RLY Negative (-) DAX C relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-15 + DAX D RLY Positive (+) DAX D relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-16 - DAX D RLY Negative (-) DAX B relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

3000D2LOnly

TB2-17 TRACK 2CHK 1


TB2-18 TRACK 2CHK 2



Table 2-6 ConcludedGCP

ModelTerminal/-


3000,3000D2,

LED DAX A DAX A relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

&3000D2L

LED DAX B DAX B relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX C DAX C relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX D DAX D relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

Fuse F1 5A S/B Main power fuse, 5 ampere, slow-blow, 3AG (upper bay in 3000D2 units; leftmodule set in 3000D2L units)

3000D2&

3000D2L

Fuse F2 5A S/B Main power fuse, 5 ampere, slow-blow, 3AG (lower bay in 3000D2 units; rightmodule set in 3000D2L units)

Only


(Models 3000ND And 3000ND2)Terminal/-Indicator/-

ControlNomenclature Function

TB1-1 XMT 1 GCP transmitter output to trackTB1-2 XMT 2 GCP transmitter output to trackTB1-3 RCV 1 GCP receiver input from trackTB1-4 RCV 2 GCP receiver input from trackTB1-5 ENA Used to cascade the relay drive output (XR circuit) from two or

more GCP’s. Voltage level at this terminal must be greater than+5 VDC. Normally connected to TB1-6 (B) when not incascade operation

Beginning with “F” level software, the ENAble terminal of theGCP can provide two functions: (1) a conventional ENAfunction when programmed for zero time when cascading GCPoutputs, or (2) can operate as a second UAX input for use withthe track 1 section of the GCP. A new programming step hasbeen added to the Program menu to select a pickup delay timefor the UAX2 function of the terminals. A 25-secondENA/UAX2 default time is provided.


Table 2-7 ContinuedTerminal/-Indicator/-



CONTROLExternal input which can be used to convert GCP to motionsensor by connecting terminal to negative battery (N) via anexternal relay. Relay contacts must connect terminal to positivebattery (B) when not in motion sensor mode. When not used,connect to TB1-6 (B)

TB1-8 N Battery N input to GCP caseTB1-9 + GCP RLY Positive (+) GCP relay drive output. Drives relays of 400 to

1,000 ohmsTB1-10 - GCP RLY Negative (-) GCP relay drive output. Drives relays of 400 to

1,000 ohmsTB1-11 + ISL RLY Positive (+) island relay drive output. May be used to drive

external island relay of 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desiredTB1-12 - ISL RLY Negative (-) island relay drive output. May be used to drive

external island relay of 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desiredTB2-1 CHK 1 Check receiver input from trackTB2-2 CHK 2 Check receiver input from trackTB2-3 ISL

RCV 1Island receiver input from track

TB2-4 ISL RCV 2

Island receiver input from track

TB2-5 TRANS IND(3000ND)

TRANS IND(3000ND2)

Signal output used in automatic transfer applications. Connectsto AT terminal on automatic transfer timer unit (80024) toindicate to the timer unit that the GCP has detected a train. Noconnection if not used

Automatic transfer indication output. Terminal is at +12 VDCwhen main system is on-line. Terminal drops to 0 VDC whenunit switches to standby system. No connection if not used

TB2-6 SLAVING Connects to SLAVING terminal on other 3000 GCP when unitsare frequency slaved. Both GCP’s must be programmed forproper slave status. No connection when not used


Table 2-7 ConcludedTerminal/-Indicator/-


TB2-7 UAX +(UAX1)

Positive (+) input to GCP from UAX. GCP must be program-med for use. No connection when not used

Beginning with “F” level software, the UAX front panelterminals (TB2-7 and TB2-8) are referred to as UAX1 and areused exclusively for control of the track 1 section of the 3000GCP. Only the track 1 island circuit, upon pickup, will cancelany UAX1 time remaining as the train leaves the island circuit.The pickup delay time is a programmable entry with 25 secondsas the default.

TB2-8 UAX -(UAX1)

Negative (-) input to GCP from UAX. GCP must be program-med for use. No connection when not used

RS232Connector

J1RECORDER

Connector for data recorder interface assembly (80025) 25-lineinterface cable (occupies positions TB2-9 and TB2-10)

LED GCP GCP relay drive indicator. Lights when relay drive is presentLED ISL Island relay drive indicator. Lights when relay drive is present

Switch POWERON/OFF

Controls main power to GCP circuits

Fuse F1 3A S/B Main power fuse, 3 ampere, slow-blow, 3 AG (for main (left)module set)

Fuse F2 3A S/B(3000ND2

Only)

Main power fuse, 3 ampere, slow-blow, 3 AG (for standby(right) side of card cage)


(Models 3008 And 3008D2)GCP

ModelTerminal/-

Indicator/Control Nomenclature Function 3008

&TB1-1 TRACK XMT 1 GCP track transmitter output to track

3008D2 TB1-2 TRACK XMT 2 GCP track transmitter output to trackTB1-3 TRACK RCV 1 GCP track receiver input from trackTB1-4 TRACK RCV 2 GCP track receiver input from trackTB1-5 ENA

(UAX2)Used to cascade the relay drive output(XR circuit) from another GCP. Voltagelevel at this terminal must be greater than+5 VDC. Normally connected to TB1-6(B) when not in cascade operation.



ModelTerminal/-

Indicator/Control Nomenclature Function 3008

& 3008D2TB1-5 (cont’d) ENA

(UAX2)Beginning with “F” level software, theENAble terminal of the GCP can providetwo functions: (1) a conventional ENAfunction when programmed for zero timewhen cascading GCP outputs, or (2) canoperate as a second UAX input for usewith the track 1 section of the GCP. Anew programming step has been added tothe Program menu to select a pickupdelay time for the UAX2 function of theterminals. A 25-second ENA/UAX2default time is provided.


CONTROLExternal input which can be used toconvert GCP to motion sensor byconnecting terminal to negative battery(N) via external relay. Relay contactsmust connect terminal to positive battery(B) when not in motion sensor mode.When not used, connect to TB1-6 (B).

TB1-8 N Battery N input to GCP caseTB1-9 + GCP RLY Positive (+) GCP relay drive output.

Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms.TB1-10 - GCP RLY Negative (-) GCP relay drive output.

Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms.TB1-11 + ISL RLY 1 Positive (+) island 1 relay drive output.

May be used to drive external island relayof 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desired

TB1-12 - ISL RLY 1 Negative (-) island 1 relay drive output.May be used to drive external island relayof 400 to 1,000 ohms, where desired

TB1-13 + DAX A RLY Positive (+) DAX A relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-14 - DAX A RLY Negative (-) DAX A relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-15 + DAX B RLY Positive (+) DAX B relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB1-16 - DAX B RLY Negative (-) DAX B relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms



ModelTerminal/-


3008&

3008D2

LED GCP GCP relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED ISL Island relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

Switch POWER ON/OFF Controls main power to GCP circuitsRS232

ConnectorJ1

RECORDERConnector for data recorder interfaceassembly (80025) 25-line interface cable.Occupies positions TB2-9 and TB2-10

TB2-11 + DAX C RLY Positive (+) DAX C relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-12 - DAX C RLY Negative (-) DAX C relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-13 + DAX D RLY Positive (+) DAX D relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-14 - DAX D RLY Negative (-) DAX D relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-15 + DAX E RLY Positive (+) DAX E relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB2-16 - DAX E RLY Negative (-) DAX E relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

3008Only

TB3-5 AT Signal output used in automatic transferapplications. Connects to AT terminal onautomatic transfer timer unit (80024) toindicate to the timer unit that the GCP hasdetected a train. No connection if notused

3008D2Only

TB3-5 TRANSIND

Automatic transfer indication output.Terminal is at +12 VDC when mainsystem is on-line. Terminal drops to 0VDC when unit switches to standbysystem. No connection if not used

3008&

3008D2

TB3-6 SLAVING Connects to SLAVING terminal on other3000 GCP when units are frequencyslaved. Both GCP’s must be programmedfor proper slave status. No connection ifnot used

TB3-7 UAX +(UAX1)

Positive (+) input to GCP from UAX(upstream adjacent crossing). GCP mustbe programmed for use. No connection ifnot used



ModelTerminal/-


3008&

3008D2

TB3-7 (cont’d) UAX +(UAX1)

Beginning with “F” level software, theUAX front panel terminals (TB3-7 andTB3-8) are referred to as UAX1 and areused exclusively for control of the track 1section of the 3000 GCP. Only the track 1island circuit, upon pickup, will cancelany UAX1 time remaining as the trainleaves the island circuit. The pickup delaytime is a programmable entry with 25seconds as the default.

TB3-8 UAX - Negative (-) input to GCP from UAX(upstream adjacent crossing). GCP mustbe programmed for use. No connection ifnot used

TB3-11 + DAX F RLY Positive (+) DAX F relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB3-12 - DAX F RLY Negative (-) DAX F relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB3-13 + DAX G RLY Positive (+) DAX G relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB3-14 - DAX G RLY Negative (-) DAX G relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB3-15 + DAX H RLY Positive (+) DAX H relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

TB3-16 - DAX H RLY Negative (-) DAX H relay drive output.Drives relays of 400 to 1,000 ohms

LED DAX A DAX A relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX B DAX B relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX C DAX C relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX D DAX D relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX E DAX E relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX F DAX F relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX G DAX G relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present

LED DAX H DAX H relay drive indicator. Lights whenrelay drive is present


Table 2-8 ConcludedGCP

ModelTerminal/-


3008 &3008D2

Fuse F1 5A S/B Main power fuse, 5 ampere, slow-blow, 3AG (for upper bay in 3008D2 units)

3008D2Only

Fuse F2 5A S/B Main power fuse, 5 ampere, slow-blow, 3AG (for lower bay in 3008D2 units)

PRIMARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION

2-37/2-38 Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: C

Figure 2-17 3000 GCP Simplified Block Diagram


SECTION III

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION

3.0 GENERAL

The equipment described in this section can be used with the 3000 GCP. Where applicable,installation and adjustment information is provided. The following equipment is covered:

Paragraph Equipment Covered Page

3.1 Bidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf 3-13.2 Automatic Transfer Timer Unit, 80024 3-63.3 Data Recorder Interface Assembly, 80025 3-123.4 Solid-state Vital AND-Gate, 90975 3-153.5 Narrow-band Shunt, 62775-f 3-193.6 Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775-XXXX 3-213.7 Narrow-band Shunt, 62780-f 3-233.8 Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62780-XXXX 3-243.9 Wideband Shunt, 8A076A 3-263.10 Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617 3-273.11 Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6 3-303.12 Track Circuit Isolation Devices 3-32

Battery Choke, 8A065A 3-33Battery Choke, 62648 3-33DC Code Isolation Unit, 6A342-1 3-35DC Code Isolation Unit, 6A342-3 3-3760 Hz AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A466-3 3-37100 Hz AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A471-100 3-37180 Hz AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A471-180 3-38

3.13 Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Coupler, 62785-f 3-393.14 Simulated Track Assembly, 80071 3-443.15 3000 GCP Slaving Unit, 80065 3-463.16 Six-Wire Simulated Track Burial Assembly, 80074 3-483.17 Extender Module, 80021 3-483.18 MS/GCP Termination Shunt Burial Kit, 62776 3-493.19 Surge Panels 3-493.20 Auxiliary Equipment Panels 3-513.21 DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049 3-64

3.1 BIDIRECTIONAL SIMULATION COUPLER, 62664-MF

Low ballast resistance effectively reduces approach distances to a greater degree in unidirectional3000 GCP installations than in bidirectional installations. Although the 3000 GCP is operatedunidirectionally while DAXing, a technique referred to as bidirectional simulation can be applied


to a unidirectional installation to obtain the operating benefits of a bidirectional application. Aunidirectional 3000 GCP can provide a DAX start for an adjacent street, as well as otherunidirectional functions, while operating as a simulated bidirectional GCP (GCP must beprogrammed for bidirectional operation).

WARNING

THE 3000 GCP IS THE ONLY GCP THAT ISCAPABLE OF OPERATING UNIDIREC-TIONALLY IN A SIMULATED BIDIREC-TIONAL MODE WHILE DAXING.

In a simulated bidirectional configuration, a narrow-band shunt is connected in series with anadjustable inductor. The combination is then connected in parallel across the track connections sothat the circuit is electrically equal to that of the actual track approach circuit. To the 3000 GCP,both approach circuits appear equal in length, even though one of the circuits consists of the shuntand inductor, which are located in the instrument housing/bungalow.

Bidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf, (figure 3-1) is a convenient, compact, shelf- orbackboard-mounted unit containing both a narrow-band shunt of the same frequency as the GCPand an adjustable inductor (simulated track).

NOTE

The bidirectional simulation coupler (62664)cannot be used as a termination shunt.

Figure 3-1Bidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf


The bidirectional simulation coupler is housed in a brushed aluminum case containing a singleplug-in-type printed circuit board and four toroid-wound inductors, each of which simulates aspecific track length. The inductors are wired in series with taps provided that enable strapping offront panel terminals for selecting approach distances to closely match the actual track approachranging from 400 to 6,000 feet as shown in table 3-1.

Table 3-1Approach Distance Selection Strapping ForBidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-Mf

Distance(Feet)

StrapTerminals

Distance(Feet)

StrapTerminals

400800

1,2001,6002,0002,4002,8003,200

B-C, C-D, D-EA-B, C-D, D-E

C-D, D-EA-B, B-C, D-E

B-C, D-EA-B, D-E

D-EA-B, B-C, C-D

3,6004,0004,4004,8005,2005,6006,000

B-C, C-DA-B, C-D

C-DA-B, B-C

B-CA-B

No Straps

When a unidirectional 3000 GCP is connected in a six-wire configuration (two receiver wires, twotransmit wires, and two check wires) as shown in figure 3-2, the bidirectional simulation couplermust be connected to the check (CHK) wires, not to the transmit (XMT) wires. If the coupleris connected to the transmit wires, an open transmitter track wire cannot be detected and can,therefore, adversely affect GCP operation. However, in standard four-wire simulated bidirectionalinstallations, it is permissible to connect the coupler to the two transmitter track leads as shown.

Mounting dimensions for the bidirectional simulation coupler are provided in figure 3-3.Specifications for the bidirectional simulation coupler are as follows:

Environmental -40°F to +160°F (-40°C to +71°C)

Dimensions 8.75 inches (22.2 centimeters) high8.50 inches (21.6 centimeters) wide9.25 inches (23.5 centimeters) deep

Weight 5 pounds (2.27 kilograms) (approximate)

Adjustment Range 400 to 6,000 feet (must be within ±10% of actual approachdistance)

Loading Effect Loading effects of the internal narrow-band shunt are equivalent to that of the 62775 narrow-band shunt.

3-4D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-5D

ocument N

o.: SIG



3.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER TIMER UNIT, 80024

The automatic transfer timer unit (figure 3-4) is connected to two Model 3000 GCP’s and, in theevent of a failure of the primary (main) unit, operation is automatically transferred to the standby(backup) unit within a pre-established time period. The transfer interval is field programmablefrom 1 to 31 minutes in 1-minute increments. When shipped from the factory, the unit is normallyprogrammed for a 3-minute transfer interval. The automatic transfer timer will continue to switchbetween the two GCP’s in an effort to select an operational unit.

The field programmable transfer interval is selected via DIP switch S1 located on the 80023module (figure 3-5). The five segments of S1 correspond to the binary values printed on the80023 circuit board adjacent to S1. To select a value, press the corresponding switch lever(s) tothe down (ON) position as indicated in figure 3-5. See table 3-2 for time interval switch settings.

Figure 3-4Automatic Transfer Timer Unit, 80024

The automatic transfer timer unit is also equipped with an LED indicator and a number ofswitches that are used primarily for calibration and test purposes. Each of the devices is describedin table 3-3.


Figure 3-5Transfer Interval Select Switch (S1) Location

Table 3-2Transfer Timer Interval Selection

Time Transfer Timer DIP Switch Positions(Minutes) 16 8 4 2 1

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

UpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDownDown

UpUpUpUpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDownDownDownDownDown

UpUpUpUpUpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDownDownDownDownDown

UpUpUp

DownDownDownDown

UpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDown

UpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDown

UpUpUpUp

DownDownDownDown

UpDownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

UpUp

DownDown

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

DownUp

Down

3-8D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-9D

ocument N

o.: SIG



Table 3-3Automatic Transfer Timer Unit Controls And Indicators

Device AndLocation Nomenclature Function Switch

(80023 Module) STBY-AUTO-MAIN Selects standby/main operating system orautomatic transfer mode

Switch(80023 Module) TEST When pressed, causes an automatic transfer from

main to standby GCPSwitch

(80024 Case) RESET Following transfer from main to standby GCP,press to return to main GCP. Also resets LED

LED(80024 Case) NO XFER WHEN LIT Transfer indicator. Normally lighted; extinguishes

when main to standby GCP transfer occurs.

Figure 3-6 illustrates a typical single track, bidirectional application using the automatic transfertimer unit with two 3000 GCP’s. Table 3-4 lists the front panel terminals and their GCPconnections. The automatic transfer timer unit is housed in an aluminum case designed for shelf orbackboard mounting. The mounting dimensions for the unit are provided in figure 3-7.

Table 3-4Automatic Transfer Timer Unit Terminal Connections

Terminal Nomenclature ConnectionTB1-1 + MS/GCP RLY Positive terminal of GCP relay or + GCP RLY terminal

(TB1-9) on main GCPTB1-2 - MS/GCP RLY Negative terminal of GCP relay or - GCP RLY terminal

(TB1-10) on main GCPTB1-3 +DAX A RLY If no DAX A, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT

(TB1-17). If DAX A is used, connect to + DAX A RLYterminal TB1-13) on main GCP.

TB1-4 - DAX A RLY If no DAX A, connect to 80024 BATTERY N INPUT(TB2-17). If DAX A is used, connect to - DAX A RLYterminal (TB1-14) on main GCP.

TB1-5 + DAX B RLY If no DAX B, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT(TB1-17). If DAX B is used, connect to + DAX B RLYterminal (TB1-15) on main GCP.

TB1-6 - DAX B RLY If no DAX B, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT(TB2-17). If DAX B is used, connect to - DAX B RLYterminal (TB1-16) on main GCP.

TB1-7 + DAX C RLY If no DAX C, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT(TB1-17). If DAX C is used, connect to - DAX C RLYterminal (TB2-13) on main GCP.

TB1-8 - DAX C RLY If no DAX C, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT(TB2-17). If DAX C is used, connect to - DAX C RLYterminal (TB2-14) on main GCP.


Table 3-4 ContinuedTerminal Nomenclature ConnectionTB1-9 + DAX D RLY If no DAX D, connect to 80024 BATTERY INPUT

(TB1-17). If DAX D is used, connect to + DAX D RLYterminal (TB2-15) on main GCP.

TB1-10 - DAX D RLY If no DAX D, connect to 80024 BATTERY N INPUT(TB2-17). If DAX A is used, connect to - DAX D RLYterminal (TB2-16) on main GCP.

TB1-11 + ISL 1 RLYMAIN

Not used

TB1-12 + ISL 1 RLYSTBY

Not used

TB1-13 +ISL 2 RLYMAIN

Not used

TB1-14 + ISL 2 RLYSTBY

Not used

TB1-15 - ISL COM Not usedTB1-16 None Not usedTB1-17 BATTERY B

INPUTPositive GCP battery supply as needed for 80024connections

TB1-18 BATTERY BINPUT

Connect to positive GCP battery terminal

TB2-1 TRACK 1 XMIT1 MAIN

TRACK 1, XMT 1 terminal (TB1-1) on main GCP

TB2-2 TRACK 1 TORAIL

Connect as XMT 1 wire to rail on track 1

TB2-3 TRACK 1 XMIT1 STBY

TRACK 1, XMT 1 terminal (TB1-1) on standby GCP

TB2-4 TRACK 2XMIT 1 MAIN

TRACK 2, XMT 1 terminal (TB2-1)on main GCP

TB2-5 TRACK 2 TORAIL

Connect as XMT 1 wire to rail on track 2

TB2-6 TRACK 2XMIT 1 STBY

TRACK 2, XMT 1 terminal (TB2-1) on standby GCP

TB2-7 MAIN B Spare relay contactTB2-8 OUTPUT H Spare relay contactTB2-9 STBY F Spare relay contact

TB2-10 AT AT (automatic transfer) terminal (TB2-5) on both mainand standby GCP’s

TB2-11 TRANSFERINDICATOR

OUT (NC)

Output for external transfer indication such as POE lighton enclosure

TB2-12 TRANSFERINDICATOR

OUT (NC)

Output for external transfer indication such as POE lighton enclosure


Table 3-4 ConcludedTerminal Nomenclature ConnectionTB2-13 POWER MAIN B Positive battery supply. Connect to battery terminal

(TB1-6) on main GCPTB2-14 POWER MAIN N Negative battery supply. Connect to battery terminal

(TB1-8) on main GCPTB2-15 POWER STBY B Positive battery supply. Connect to battery terminal

(TB1-6) on standby GCPTB2-16 POWER STBY N Negative battery supply. Connect to battery terminal

(TB1-8) on standby GCPTB1-17 BATTERY N

INPUTNegative GCP battery supply as needed for 80024connections

TB2-18 BATTERY NINPUT

Connect to negative GCP battery terminal (N12)

Specifications for the automatic transfer timer unit are as follows:

Environmental -40°F to +160°F (-40°C to +71°C)

Dimensions 9.31 inches (23.6 centimeters) high11.50 inches 29.2 centimeters) wide11.16 inches 28.3 centimeters) deep

Weight 4.75 pounds (2.15 kilograms) (approximate)

3.3 DATA RECORDER INTERFACE ASSEMBLY, 80025

The Data Recorder Interface Assembly, 80025 (figure 3-8), enables the data recorder module(80015) to monitor and record changes of input states on 16 channels external to the 3000 GCP.The data recorder interface assembly interfaces with the data recorder via a 25-line cable (sup-plied with the unit) which is connected between connector J1 (RECORDER) on the 3000 GCPfront panel and connector J1 (RECORDER) on the data recorder interface assembly. Pinassignments for connector J1 on the data recorder interface assembly are provided in table 3-5.

Recorded data which is stored in memory on the data recorder module (80015) can be accessedor monitored from a remote location via an external modem connected to MODEM connector J2on the data recorder interface assembly. Refer to Section IX, Data Recorder, for informationconcerning interconnecting cables and modem use.

All 16 inputs on the data recorder interface assembly are electrically isolated from each other andfrom ground by optical isolators, allowing direct connection to vital circuits. Input changes musttypically consist of voltage level changes similar to those produced by relay contact closures (i.e.,low-to-high and high-to-low). Each channel input from a monitored signal circuit consists of twowires attached to screw terminals on the data recorder interface assembly. See figure 3-9 for datarecorder interface assembly mounting dimensions.


Figure 3-8Data Recorder Interface Assembly, 80025

Table 3-5Data Recorder Interface Assembly Connector J1 Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Pin Signal1 Ground 14 Channel 162 Transmit Data (TxD) 15 Channel 153 Receive Data (RxD) 16 Channel 144 Request To Send (RTS) 17 Channel 135 Clear To Send (CTS) 18 Channel 126 Data Set Ready (DSR) 19 Channel 117 Ground 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 21 Channel 109 Channel 9 22 Channel 1

10 Channel 2 23 Channel 311 Channel 4 24 Channel 512 Channel 6 25 Channel 713 Channel 8

3-14D

ocument N

o.: SIG



Specifications for the data recorder interface assembly are as follows:

Channel Inputs

Number of Inputs 16Input Resistance 5k ohmsInput Voltage 8 to 36 VDCTerminal Screw Size No. 6

Dimensions 1.88 inches (4.8 centimeters) high (with terminals)9.25 inches (23.5 centimeters) wide8.25 inches (21.0 centimeters) deep

Weight 1 pound (0.45 kilograms)

3.4 SOLID-STATE VITAL AND-GATE, 90975

Solid-state Vital AND-Gate, 90975 (figure 3-10), is a logic device that combines two inputs toproduce a single output. The AND-gate is energized only when both inputs are energized. Theinputs and outputs are electrically isolated from battery (B and N) within the unit.

Figure 3-10Solid-state Vital AND-Gate, 90975


The solid-state vital AND-gate is designed for use in applications such as cascading outputs fromtwo separate devices into the single input of a third device. The vital AND-gate eliminates theneed for external relays which are normally used to accomplish this function. The unit is housed ina brushed aluminum case which can be installed in any convenient location within the waysideenclosure. A typical application using the vital AND-gate with the 3000 GCP is described in thefollowing paragraphs and is illustrated in figure 3-11.

In the example illustrated in figure 3-11, streets A, B, and C are 500 feet apart. Each crossing isprotected by two unidirectional 3000 GCP’s (or a single GCP case with two transceiver modules)with a set of insulated joints located on one side of the street that electrically isolate the two GCPsystems. The insulated joints cannot be bypassed with couplers of any type. Therefore, since theapproach distance between adjacent crossings is not sufficient to provide the operating timerequired, and the approach cannot be extended by passing the GCP frequency around theinsulated joints with bypass couplers, the controls can be extended by adding a DAX module(80016) to each GCP. Each 3000 GCP case can accommodate up to two DAX modules and eachmodule is equipped with two DAX output circuits, providing a total of four independent DAXoutputs.

To provide 30 seconds operating time at a maximum train speed of 30 miles-per-hour, theapproach distance required in the example would be 1,496 feet (30 seconds warning time plus 4seconds system response time multiplied by 44 feet-per-second equals 1,496 feet). Therefore, toprovide adequate crossing start distance for both eastbound and westbound trains, two DAXcircuits are required in GCP number 1 at street A, one DAX circuit each in GCP’s 1 and 2 atstreet B, and two DAX circuits in GCP 2 at street C.

Downstream adjacent crossing (DAX) control requires a line circuit (open line or cable) betweenthe GCP containing the DAX module and the GCP which receives the normally-energized DAXoutput (applied to the UAX terminals). In the example, the number 2 GCP’s at streets B and Ceach supply a DAX output to the single UAX input of GCP 2 at street A. This is accomplished byapplying the two DAX outputs to the inputs of a vital AND-gate. The single output from theAND-gate is then connected to the UAX terminals of GCP 2 at street A.

To illustrate DAX control for street A, consider a westbound train approaching street C at 30miles-per-hour. When the train is 30 seconds from street A, the DAX B circuit in GCP 2 at streetC predicts and removes relay drive from the front panel DAX B relay drive (RLY + and -)terminals. The line circuit from these terminals extends to the vital AND-gate input at street B.When energy is removed from the vital AND-gate input, the line circuit from street B (AND-gateoutput) to the UAX input on GCP 2 at street A is also deenergized. Removing energy from theUAX terminals deenergizes the front panel GCP RLY (relay drive) terminals of GCP 2 at streetA, causing the warning signals to operate. When the train crosses the insulated joints at street C,GCP 2 at street B “picks up” the train, causing DAX A in that unit to predict and deenergize theDAX A front panel terminals on that unit (second input to vital AND-gate). This ensures that theline circuit to the GCP UAX terminals on GCP number 2 at street A remains deenergized (thevital AND-gate output will be energized only when both inputs to the AND-gate are energized).

See figure 3-12 for assembly mounting dimensions for the solid-state vital AND-gate.Specifications for the solid-state vital AND-gate follow figure 3-12.

3-17D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-18D

ocument N

o.: SIG



Specifications for the solid-state vital AND-gate are as follows:

Power Input

Voltage 9.5 to 16.5 VDCCurrent 200 milliamperes

Output 12 VDC (nominal); will drive 200 to 1,000-ohm loads

Control Inputs 7 to 18 VDC (1,000-ohm input resistance)

Input/Output Protection Floating (optically isolated and transformer coupled;surge protected

Dimensions 6.25 inches (15.9 centimeters) high6.25 inches (15.9 centimeters) wide2.50 inches (6.4 centimeters) deep

Weight 1 pound (0.5 kilogram) (approximate)

3.5 NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62775-F

The 62775-f narrow-band termination shunt (figure 3-13) is designed for use in areas where otherAC frequencies or DC coded track circuits are present, but only the 3000 GCP frequency shouldbe terminated. The shunt requires no special tuning and is generally preferred for mostapplications.

WARNING

THE 62775-F SHUNT MUST NOT BE USEDANYWHERE WITHIN A MODEL 300 OR 400GCP APPROACH; NARROW-BAND SHUNT62780-F IS RECOMMENDED FOR THESEAPPLICATIONS.

The narrow-band shunt (62775-f) is housed in a hermetically-sealed, cylindrical case with a pair of10-foot leads extending from one end. The shunt should be connected as close as possible to therails. To afford maximum protection from physical damage, the shunt should be encased in aprotective enclosure or buried (either vertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth. It is notnecessary to bury the shunt below the frost line. The shunt is available in any fixed frequency (Hz)listed in the chart below (Safetran frequencies are shown in boldface type).

86100114151

156172210211

267285326348

392430452522

525560630645

686753790816

881970979


Wideband Shunt, 8A076A

Narrow-band Shunt, 62775-F/62780-F

Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775/62780-XXXX

Figure 3-13Safetran Narrow-band And Wideband Termination Shunts


Specifications for the 62775-F narrow-band shunt are as follows:

Dimensions 16 inches (40.6 centimeters) long5 inches (12.7 centimeters) in diameter


Frequencies See chart at the bottom of page 3-19.

Leads 10 feet (304.8 centimeters); number 6 AWG, stranded,black PVC

3.6 MULTIFREQUENCY NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62775-XXXX

Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775-XXXX, (figure 3-13) is slightly longer than its single-frequency counterpart (paragraph 3.5), but exhibits the same electrical characteristics as the basicsingle-frequency unit.

WARNING

THE 62775-XXXX MULTIFREQUENCY NAR-ROW-BAND SHUNT MUST NOT BE USEDANYWHERE WITHIN A MODEL 300 OR 400GCP APPROACH; NARROW-BAND SHUNT62780-XXXX IS RECOMMENDED FORTHESE APPLICATIONS.

The multifrequency narrow-band shunt is available in eight frequency ranges for terminating allstandard Safetran and Harmon equipment operating frequencies. The shunt is housed in ahermetically-sealed, cylindrical case with a pair of 10-foot leads extending from one end and sevenstandard AAR terminals extending from the other. The terminals are labeled A through G and arejumpered to select the desired shunting frequency (table 3-6).

Terminal jumper hardware is supplied with each shunt and a label located inside the removableend cap identifies the terminal jumpering for each frequency. The pliable end cap covering theterminal end of the shunt is secured in place by a sturdy stainless steel clamp for protection againstmoisture.

NOTE

The shunt is shipped with no factory jumpersinstalled and is, therefore, electrically open anddoes not load any frequency on the track. Installjumpers for the desired frequency before placingthe unit in service.


WARNING

CAREFULLY TIGHTEN ALL NUTS ON ALLFREQUENCY JUMPERS, THEN INSTALL ASECOND NUT TO SECURELY LOCK THEASSEMBLY.

The shunt should be connected as close as possible to the rails. To afford maximum protectionfrom physical damage, the shunt should be encased in a protective enclosure or buried (eithervertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth (see paragraph 3.18). It is not necessary to burythe shunt below the frost line.

Specifications for the 62775-XXXX multifrequency narrow-band shunt are as follows:



Frequencies See table 3-6


Table 3-6Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775

Frequency Selection JumpersShunt PartNumber

Frequency(Hz) Jumper Shunt Terminals

62775-1543 156 A-F, G-C, C-D, D-E, E-F211 A-G, G-C, C-D, D-E285 B-C, C-D, D-G,348 B-C, C-D430 B-C

62775-2132* 211 A-F, G-C, C-D, D-E, E-F267 B-G, G-C, C-D, D-E285 B-C, C-D, D-G313 B-C, C-D326 B-C

62775-2152 211 A-F, G-C, C-D, D-E, E-F285 B-C, C-D, D-E, E-G348 B-C, C-D, D-G430 B-C, C-D525 B-C

*Available for special applications only


Table 3-6 ConcludedShunt PartNumber


62775-3448* 348 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F, F-G389 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F392 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E430 A-B, B-C, C-D452 A-B, B-C

483.5 A-B62775-3497 348 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F, F-G

430 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F525 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E645 A-B, B-C, C-D790 A-B, B-C970 A-B

62775-5274* 522 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F, F-G525 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F560 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E645 A-B, B-C, C-D

669.9 A-B, B-C746.8 A-B

62775-7910* 790 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F, F-G816 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F

832.5 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E970 A-B, B-C, C-D979 A-B, B-C

1034 A-B62775-8621 86 A-F, G-D, D-E, E-F

114 B-G, G-D, D-E156 C-D, D-G211 C-D


3.7 NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62780-F

Like the 62775 narrow-band termination shunt (paragraph 3.5), the 62780 narrow-band shunt(figure 3-13) is designed for use in areas where other AC frequencies or DC coded track circuitsare present, but only the 3000 GCP frequency should be terminated. However, the 62780 shuntproduces less loading effect on adjacent frequencies (10 ohms reactance) than the 62775 shuntand, therefore, can be used in territories with overlapping Model 300 and Model 400 GCPapproaches. The 62780 narrow-band shunt is compatible with all Safetran motion sensors andGCP’s and is available in any one of 26 frequencies ranging from 86 Hz to 979 Hz as shown inthe chart at the top of the following page (Safetran frequencies are shown in boldface type).


86100114151156210

211267285326348392

430452522525560630

645686753790816881

970979

The 62780 narrow-band shunt is housed in a hermetically-sealed, cylindrical case with a pair of10-foot leads extending from one end. The shunt should be connected as close as possible to therails. To afford maximum protection from physical damage, the shunt should be encased in aprotective enclosure or buried (either vertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth (seeparagraph 3-18). It is not necessary to bury the shunt below the frost line.

Specifications for the 62780-F narrow-band shunt are as follows:

Dimensions 14.125 inches (35.9 centimeters) long4.125 inches (10.5 centimeters) in diameter


Frequencies See chart above


3.8 MULTIFREQUENCY NARROW-BAND SHUNT, 62780-XXXX

Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62780-XXXX (figure 3-13), produces less loading effect onadjacent frequencies (10 ohms reactance) than the 62775-XXXX shunt (paragraph 3.6) and,therefore, can be used in territories with overlapping Model 300 and Model 400 GCP approaches.The 62780 shunt is compatible with all Safetran GCP’s and motion sensors. The 62780 narrow-band shunt is available in four multifrequency versions for terminating all 11 standard Safetranoperating frequencies plus a number of Harmon frequencies as well (table 3-7).

The multifrequency narrow-band shunt (62780) is housed in a hermetically-sealed, cylindrical casewith a pair of 10-foot leads extending from one end and seven standard AAR terminals from theopposite end of the case. The terminals are labeled A through G and are jumpered to select thedesired shunt frequency. Terminal jumper hardware is supplied with each multifrequency shuntand a label located inside the removable end cap identifies the terminal jumpering for eachfrequency. The pliable end cap covering the terminal end of the shunt is secured in place by asturdy stainless steel clamp for protection against moisture.


NOTE

The multifrequency narrow-band shunt is shippedwith no factory jumpers installed and is, therefore,electrically open and does not load any frequencyon the track. Install jumpers for the desiredfrequency before placing the unit in service.

WARNING

CAREFULLY TIGHTEN ALL NUTS ON ALLFREQUENCY JUMPERS, THEN INSTALL ASECOND NUT TO SECURELY LOCK THEASSEMBLY.

Table 3-7Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62780

Frequency Selection JumpersShunt PartNumber


62780-1543 156 A-F, G-C, C-D, D-E, E-F211 A-G, G-C, C-D, D-E285 B-C, D-G, C-D348 B-C, C-D430 B-C

62780-2152* 211 A-F, G-C, C-D, D-E, E-F285 B-C, C-D, D-E, C-G348 B-C, C-D, D-G430 B-C, C-D525 B-C

62780-5297 525 A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E645 A-B, B-C, C-D790 A-B, B-C970 A-B

62780-8621 86 A-F, G-D, D-E, E-F114 B-G, G-D, D-E156 C-D, D-G211 C-D


The shunt should be connected as close as possible to the rails. To afford maximum protectionfrom physical damage, the shunt should be encased in a protective enclosure or buried (eithervertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth (see paragraph 3.18). It is not necessary to burythe shunt below the frost line.


Specifications for the 62780-XXXX multifrequency narrow-band shunt are as follows:



Frequencies See table 3-7


3.9 WIDEBAND SHUNT, 8A076A

Wideband Shunt, 8A076A (figure 3-13), provides an effective short circuit to AC but presents anopen circuit to DC. The shunt may be used as a termination shunt where no other frequencies(other than the GCP) are present. The shunt may also be used to bypass existing insulated jointsrequired for DC signaling purposes within the track circuit.

WARNING

THE 8A076A WIDEBAND SHUNT MUST NOTBE USED TO BYPASS INSULATED JOINTSIN DC CODED TRACK CIRCUITS ORWHERE AC OR CODED AC CIRCUITSEXIST.

The wideband shunt is housed in a hermetically-sealed, cylindrical case with a pair of 10-footleads extending from one end. The shunt should be connected as close as possible to the rails. Toafford maximum protection from physical damage, the shunt should be encased in a protectiveenclosure or buried (either vertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth (see paragraph 3.18).It is not necessary to bury the shunt below the frost line.

Specifications for the wideband shunt are as follows:

Dimensions 7.5 inches (19.1 centimeters) long3.35 inches (8.5 centimeters) in diameter




3.10 SIMULATED TRACK INDUCTOR, 8V617 (Used With Multifrequency Shunts)

In bidirectional motion sensor and grade crossing predictor installations, insulated joints located inone approach frequently prevent both termination shunts from being installed at approximatelyequal distances from the MS/GCP feed point as required. When Safetran’s multifrequencynarrow-band shunts (62775/62780) are used to terminate the approaches, Simulated TrackInductor, 8V617 (figure 3-14), may be used along with the shunt in the shorter approach tocompensate for the reduced distance (see example below).

The inductor consists of an insulated, toroid-wound coil with a pair of 4-inch number 18 AWGstranded wire leads with 1/4-inch ring terminals attached. The inductor is supplied in 21configurations to simulate track lengths ranging from 200 to 4,000 feet in 200-foot incrementsplus 4,400 feet. Each inductor is identified with the basic part number followed by a dash numberindicating the simulated distance in feet as listed in table 3-8.

Figure 3-14Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617

Table 3-8Simulated Track Inductor Part Number ListingBasic Part No. Dash Number = Distance (Feet)

8V617 -0200-0400-0600-0800-1000-1200-1400

-1600-1800-2000-2200-2400-2600-2800

-3000-3200-3400-3600-3800-4000-4400


Use the following procedure to install the inductor in the narrow-band shunt.

1. After determining the shunt frequency and compensating distance required, loosen the clampand remove the end cap from the shunt to gain access to the frequency-selection terminals.Refer to the small chart inside the end cap for terminal strapping information.

NOTE

If the chart is missing or illegible, refer to table 3-6(62775) or 3-7 (62780) in this manual.

WARNING

BEFORE INSTALLING, VERIFY THAT THE8V617 INDUCTOR IS THE CORRECT DIS-TANCE VALUE FOR THE APPLICATION.

2. Refer to table 3-9 and note the inductor mounting terminals for the applicable shunt andfrequency. Remove the nuts, washers, and shorting link from the shunt terminals indicated.Discard the shorting link and install the inductor in its place by connecting the inductor leads tothe two terminals. Install the washers and nuts and tighten securely.

3. Wrap the inductor in the foam insulation (included with the inductor) as shown in figure 3-15and carefully insert into the shunt housing between the terminals and case at the approximatelocation shown. Position the inductor with the leads extending horizontally toward the side(not upward) to prevent interference with the shunt end cap.

4. Return the end cap to its original position on the shunt and tighten the clamp securely.

Figure 3-15Typical Installation of 8V617 in 62775/62780 Shunt


Specifications for the 8V617 simulated track inductor are as follows:

Diameter 1.875 inches (4.76 centimeters)

Thickness 0.875 inches (2.22 centimeters)

Weight 5 ounces (141.75 grams)

Table 3-9Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617, Mounting Terminals

Narrow-bandShunt Part No.

Frequency(Hz)

Remove Shorting Link And ConnectInductor Leads Between Shunt Terminals

62775/62780-1543 156 A and F211 A and G285 B and C348 B and C430 B and C

62775-2132* 211 A and F267 B and G285 B and C313 B and C326 B and C

62775/62780-2152* 211 A and F285 B and C348 B and C430 B and C525 B and C

62775-3448* 348 A and B389 A and B392 A and B430 A and B452 A and B

483.5 A and B62775-3497 348 A and B

430 A and B525 A and B645 A and B790 A and B970 A and B

62775-5274* 522 A and B525 A and B560 A and B645 A and B

669.9 A and B746.8 A and B


Table 3-9 ConcludedNarrow-band

Shunt Part No.Frequency

(Hz)Remove Shorting Link And Connect

Inductor Leads Between Shunt Terminals62780-5297 525 A and B

645 A and B790 A and B970 A and B

62775-7910* 790 A and B816 A and B

832.5 A and B970 A and B979 A and B

1034 A and B62775/62780-8621 86 A and F

114 B and G156 C and D211 C and D


3.11 ADJUSTABLE INDUCTOR ASSEMBLY, 8A398-6

Insulated joints located in one approach frequently prevent both termination shunts from beinginstalled at approximately equal distances from the 3000 GCP feed point as required. WhenSafetran’s single-frequency narrow-band shunts (62775-f/62780-f are used to terminate theseapproaches, Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6 (figure 3-16), may be used along with theshunt in the shorter approach to compensate for the reduced distance (see example illustratedbelow.

The inductor assembly consists of a 3-inch diameter ABS plastic enclosure with mountingbrackets at the base. Seven AAR terminals extend from the top of the assembly and accommodateconnections to six inductors which are connected in series and housed within the sealed unit.

Refer to table 3-10 and locate the desired simulated track length (column 1). Then read across thetable to determine which inductors (indicated by terminal pairs in column 2) are required to simu-late that length. Next, connect the track wire and the shunt wire (see example above) to the twoterminals indicated in column 2. Finally, install a strap between the terminal pairs indicated in col-umn 3 to short any inductors located between the track and shunt wire connecting terminals (see


Table 3-10Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6, Terminal Connections

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 1 Column 2 Column 3

SimulatedTrackLength(Feet)

ConnectTrack And

Shunt WiresTo TheseTerminals

Connect ShortingStrap(s) BetweenThese Terminals

Simulated TrackLength(Feet)

ConnectTrack And

Shunt WiresTo TheseTerminals

Connect ShortingStrap(s) BetweenThese Terminals

50100150200250300350400450500550600650700750800850900950

1000105011001150120012501300135014001450150015501600

A-BB-CA-CC-DA-DB-DA-DD-EA-EB-EA-EC-EA-EB-EA-EE-FA-FB-FA-FC-FA-FB-FA-FD-FA-FB-FA-FC-FA-FB-FA-FF-G

B-C

B-C, C-DC-DC-D

B-C

B-C, C-D, D-EC-D, D-EC-D, D-E

D-EB-C, D-E

D-ED-E

B-C, C-DC-DC-D

B-C

1650

170017501800185019001950200020502100215022002250230023502400245025002550260026502700275028002850290029503000305031003150

A-G

B-GA-GC-GA-GB-GA-GD-GA-GB-GA-GC-GA-GB-GA-GE-GA-GB-GA-GC-GA-GB-GA-GD-GA-GB-GA-GC-GA-GB-GA-G

B-C, C-D, D-E, &E-F

C-D, D-E, E-FC-D, D-E, E-F

D-E, E-FB-C, D-E, E-F

D-E, E-FD-E, E-F

E-FB-C, C-D, E-F

C-D, E-FC-D, E-F

E-FB-C, E-F

E-FE-F

B-C, C-D, D-EC-D, D-EC-D, D-E

D-EB-C, D-E

D-ED-E

B-C, C-D, D-EC-DC-D

B-C


8A398 adjustable inductor schematic diagram located immediately above table 3-10) which arenot required for the desired length. For example, if the required simulated track length is 1,000feet, the track and shunt wires are connected to terminals C and F. A strap is then installedbetween terminals D and E to short the 400-foot inductor and remove it from the series circuit.Track lengths are selectable in 50-foot increments ranging from 50 to 3,150 feet. Specificationsfor the 8A398-6 adjustable inductor assembly are as follows:


Height 9 inches (22.86 centimeters) (to top of AAR terminals)

Weight 5 pounds, 12 ounces (2.59 kilograms)

Figure 3-16Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6

3.12 TRACK CIRCUIT ISOLATION DEVICES

Several types of track circuit isolation devices are available for both DC and AC coded trackapplications. Since there are a number of variations in DC coded track such as relay type andassociated operating current, decoding method, current and voltage transmitted and received,track circuit length, transmit and receive code polarity, DC code frequency, pulse width, etc., therecommendations presented in the following paragraphs are general in nature and no attempt hasbeen made to cover all applications. Also, as additional field experience is gained, improved orchanged application methods may result. If there are any questions concerning theserecommendations or applications, contact Safetran Technical Support for assistance.

The following discussions are grouped by coded track circuit type. Battery chokes and codeisolation devices described here are designed for mounting inside a weatherproof enclosure.


3.12.1 Steady Energy DC Track Circuits

All DC track circuits with batteries located within a 3000 GCP approach, or less than 2,000 feetbeyond the approach termination, should be equipped with a battery choke. However, if the trackconnections for the DC track circuit are 2,000 feet or more beyond the GCP approach terminationshunt, a battery choke is not required (see diagram below).

Either of the following battery chokes may be used: part number 8A065A or 62648 (seelimitations in the following paragraphs).

Operation of long DC track circuits with very low ballast conditions may be affected by the DCresistance (DCR) of the 8A065A battery choke (DCR of 8A065A is 0.40 ohm). Such trackcircuits should use the 62648 battery choke, which has a DCR of 0.10 ohm. However, inapplications where the choke is located within a Model 300 or Model 400 GCP approach, the8A065A battery choke must be used.

The 62648 and 8A065A battery chokes each consist of a large inductance coil with two top-mounted AAR terminals and a mounting base (see figure 3-17).

When a rectified track circuit is used and the GCP is operating at 114 Hz, an 8A076A widebandshunt (paragraph 3.9) should also be used along with the battery choke to eliminate 120 Hz ripple.The diagram below illustrates this application.


Specifications for the 62648 and 8A065A battery chokes are as follows:

Dimensions 4.5 inches (11.43 centimeters) wide5.0 inches (12.70 centimeters) deep8.5 inches (21.59 centimeters) high(to top of terminal studs)


Figure 3-1762648/8A065A Battery Choke With Mounting Dimensions

3.12.2 Safetran S-Code Electronic Coded System

Standard Safetran 3000 GCP frequencies of 86 Hz and above are compatible with S-Code.Isolation circuits are generally not required in the S-Code transmitter rail connections.Frequencies of 86, 114, 156, and 211 Hz require use of maximum current.

3.12.3 Electro Code Electronic Coded System

Model 3000 GCP frequencies of 86 Hz and above can normally be used with Electro Code. Allfrequencies of 211 Hz and lower require use of maximum current track drive. In certain instances,285 Hz may also require maximum current.

For frequencies of 211 Hz and lower, an Electro Code track filter (TF-freq) may be requiredwhen the Electro Code transmitter is located within the 3000 GCP approach. As with any codedtrack system, the lower the Electro Code transmit level, the less interference with GCP units.


3.12.4 Relay Coded DC Track

Most relay coded DC track installations require use of DC code isolation units such as the 6A342-1 (figure 3-18). A code isolation unit is a special battery choke that aids in preventing coded trackbattery and track relays from causing high interference with the 3000 GCP.

NOTE

The correct model of code isolation unit for the typeof DC coded track circuit used must be installed asinstructed in the 3000 GCP Application Guidelines.

WARNING

ALWAYS VERIFY PROPER CODE SYSTEMOPERATION FOLLOWING INSTALLATIONOF THE ISOLATION UNIT.

The 6A342-1 DC code isolation unit is used in most single polarity code systems while the6A342-3 unit is used in GRS Trakode (dual polarity) relay systems.

All wiring to terminals 1 and 2 on the isolation units should be number 6 AWG. This significantlyreduces current losses to the track relay during low track ballast conditions. Frequencies below211 Hz require maximum current. Specifications for the 6A342 battery chokes are as follows:

Dimensions 5.0 inches (12.70 centimeters) wide9.0 inches (22.86 centimeters) deep5.75 inches (14.60 centimeters) high


Various applications for the track isolation units are discussed in the paragraphs that follow.

3.12.4.1 Single Polarity Systems (Fixed Polarity)

The 6A342-1 code isolation unit can be used in most single (fixed) polarity code systems. A singlepolarity code system must have the same received and transmitted polarities to use this codeisolation unit. Most rate code systems (75, 120, 180 ppm) are of this type. The diagram belowillustrates a typical 6A342-1 code isolation unit installation in a single polarity code system.


Figure 3-18DC Code Isolation Unit, 6A342, With Mounting Dimensions


3.12.4.2 GRS Trakode (Dual Polarity) Systems

The diagram below illustrates the 6A342-3 code isolation unit installed in a GRS Trakode system.To install the unit as shown, a transfer delay (TD) relay must be used. Do not install any codeisolation circuit in GRS Trakode without use of the TD relay.

3.12.4.3 Dual Polarity (Polar) Coded Track Systems Other Than GRS Trakode

A dual polarity system is one in which the received code polarity is opposite that of thetransmitted code. The 6A342-3 code isolation unit can be used in a dual polarity system, however,two 6A342-3 units must be specifically placed at each end of the circuit for proper filtering. Theapplication will depend upon the track circuit configuration. Contact Safetran Technical Supportfor assistance in dual polarity code systems.

3.12.5 Cab Signal AC

Application of 3000 GCP systems in cab territory using 60 Hz AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A466-3(figure 3-19), or 100 Hz Isolation Unit, 8A471-100 (figure 3-20), is shown below. For other in-stallations, contact Safetran Technical Support for assistance.

Specifications for the 8A466-3 and 8A471-100 AC code isolation units are as follows:

8A466-3




8A471-100



3.12.6 Style C Track Circuits

The 60 Hz AC code isolation unit (8A466-3) (figure 3-19) is used with style C track circuits asshown below. For special applications, 180 Hz AC code isolation unit (8A471-180) (figure 3-20)is also available. The units should be used only with GCP frequencies of 790 Hz and higher.Contact Safetran Technical Support for specific information.

Figure 3-19AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A466-3


Figure 3-20AC Code Isolation Unit, 8A471-100 And -180, With Mounting Dimensions

Specifications for the 8A471 AC code isolation unit are as follows:



3.13 TUNABLE INSULATED JOINT BYPASS COUPLER, 62785-F

The application guidelines for Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Coupler, 62785-f, when used withthe 3000 GCP only, have been expanded as follows:

1. The coupler can be used to bypass insulated joints in coded DC track circuits where theinsulated joints are located in the outer one-third of a 3000 GCP approach.

2. The coupler can be located within the inner two-thirds of a 3000 GCP approach, but only asspecified in table 3-11.


WARNING

THE MINIMUM DISTANCES TO THE IN-SULATED JOINTS SPECIFIED IN TABLE 3-11 APPLY TO THE 3000 GCP ONLY; NOT TOANY OTHER SAFETRAN GCP’S (MODELS660, 600, 400, AND 300 ).

The 62785-f coupler is designed to replace the earlier fixed-frequency 62531-f and 62631-finsulated joint bypass couplers and must be used in all 3000 GCP applications; not the 62531-fand 62631-f couplers.

WARNING

INSULATED JOINT BYPASS COUPLERS,62531-F AND 62631-F, MUST NOT BE USEDWITH THE 3000 GCP; USE THE 62785-FCOUPLER INSTEAD.

The 62785-f coupler is field tuned to pass the 3000 GCP operating frequency (f) around insulatedjoints in DC or coded DC track circuits. Field tuning of the coupler enables precise frequencyadjustment for track and joint parameters. The coupler must be located within 10 feet of theinsulated joints which it is coupling, and the insulated joints must be located in the outer one-thirdof a 3000 GCP approach. The 62785-f coupler can also be used to couple insulated joints locatedwithin the inner two-thirds of a 3000 GCP approach, provided the minimum distance restrictionsspecified in table 3-11 are complied with. The minimum distance to the insulated joints isgenerally a function of the 3000 GCP operating frequency; i.e., the lower the operating frequency,the longer the minimum distance. Table 3-11 indicates the minimum operating distances (in feet)to the first and second set of insulated joints that are coupled with 62785-f couplers for 3000GCP operation. Two sets of insulated joints may be coupled in any single approach, provided theminimum operating distances specified in table 3-11 are complied with. The 62785-f coupler isavailable in standard Safetran frequencies of 114 Hz through 970 Hz.

WARNING

WHEN THE 3000 GCP IS PROGRAMMED ASA PREDICTOR, THE 62785-F COUPLERCANNOT BE USED TO BYPASS INSULATEDJOINTS WITHIN THE INNER TWO-THIRDSOF AN APPROACH, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIEDIN TABLE 3-11.

The coupler is housed in a hermetically-sealed, 6-inch diameter case that is 2 inches larger indiameter than the 62531-f and 62631-f couplers. A pair of 10-foot, number 6 AWG leads extendfrom one end and nine AAR terminals extend from the other (see figure 3-21). Five of theterminals (labeled A through E) are equipped with special gold AAR nuts that are used to tune thecoupler.


Table 3-11Minimum Distance to Insulated Joints When Coupled With

62785-F Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Couplers

Frequency (Hz)Minimum Distance to First

Set of Insulated Joints (Feet)*Minimum Distance to SecondSet of Insulated Joints (Feet)*

86 N/A N/A114 2000 3000151 1500 2200ô ô ô

211 1500 2200212 1000 1400ô ô ô

348 1000 1400349 700 1000ô ô ô

560 700 1000561 500 800ô ô ô

790 500 800791 400 700ô ô ô

979 400 700*Distance applies to insulated joints located on the same side of the crossing.

Figure 3-21Terminal Identification, 62785-f Tunable

Insulated Joint Bypass Coupler


When tuning the coupler, the gold nut on terminal E is tightened down first. Then, with ahardwire shunt placed across the tracks first on one side of the coupler and then on the other, oneor more of the remaining nuts is/are tightened in sequence to obtain the minimum change in EZvalue across the joint. Tightening the nut on terminal E produces maximum change in EZ valuewhile tightening the nut on terminal A produces minimum change. When adjustment is complete,a second (standard) AAR nut on each of the terminals is used to lock the gold adjusting nutsfirmly in position. An equalizer and a gas tube arrester are connected to the remaining AARterminals to provide complete surge protection. A pliable end cap is secured in place over theterminal end of the coupler by a sturdy stainless steel clamp, providing protection againstmoisture.

The coupler should be connected as close as possible to the rails and, to afford maximumprotection from physical damage, it should be encased in a protective enclosure or buried (eithervertically or horizontally) at an appropriate depth. It is not necessary to bury the coupler belowthe frost line.

Refer to the appropriate installation diagram in figure 3-22 for the following tuning procedure.

• FIELD TUNING INSTRUCTIONS

Figure 3-22Typical Installation Diagrams Using The 62785-f Coupler

For tuning steps 6 and 8 in the following procedure, tighten the gold nut on the coupler terminalslabeled D, C, B, and A, in sequence beginning with terminal D. If tightening a nut results in an EZvalue that is lower than the value recorded in step 4, loosen the nut and tighten the next nut insequence. If, after tightening a nut, the EZ value remains higher than the value recorded in step 4,leave the nut tightened and tighten the next nut in sequence. Continue to tighten nuts D through Aas necessary to obtain an EZ value that is approximately the same as that recorded in step 4.

1. Tighten the gold nut securely on terminal E of each coupler.

2. Calibrate the 3000 GCP so that the EZ value is 100.

3. Place a hardwire test shunt across the track at location A (see figure 3-22).

4. Make note of the EZ value appearing on the 3000 GCP display.


5. Move the test shunt to location B.

6. Tune the No.1 Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Coupler to the EZ value noted in step 4.

7. Move the test shunt to location C.

8. Tune the No.2 Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Coupler to the EZ value noted in step 4.

9. Remove the test shunt and tighten a standard AAR nut against each gold nut to ensure all nutsare securely locked in position.

WARNING

ENSURE THAT A STANDARD AAR NUT ISTIGHTENED SECURELY AGAINST EACHGOLD NUT ON TERMINALS A THROUGH E,INCLUDING THE TERMINALS THAT ARENOT TIGHTENED DOWN.

10. Completely recalibrate the 3000 GCP and perform all operational checks while observing thesmooth change in the EZ value across the couplers during a train move.

Specifications for the 62785-f tunable insulated joint bypass coupler are as follows:



Leads 10 feet (304.8 centimeters); #6 AWG, stranded, black PVC

Surge Suppresser Equalizer, 022700-21X, Safetran No. Z803-00052-0001Part Numbers Gas Tube Arrester, Safetran No. Z803-00053-0001

3.14 TAKING A TRACK OUT OF SERVICE USING SIMULATED TRACKASSEMBLY, 80071

Track 1 or track 2 can be temporarily removed from service by installing Simulated TrackAssembly, 80071, between the applicable track 1 or track 2 transmitter output terminals (XMT 1or XMT 2) on the front panel of the 3000 GCP case. The simulated track assembly (figure 3-23)consists of a plastic housing containing a special simulated track inductor. A pair of 10-foot,number 10 AWG, stranded leads with yellow insulation and AAR lugs extend from one end of thehousing. The bright yellow leads permit an out-of-service track condition to be easily identified.


3.14.1 Instructions For Taking a Track Out of Service

Perform the following steps to temporarily take track 1 or track 2 out of service.

WARNING

ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE PROPER 3000GCP TRACK (T1 OR T2) IS BEING TAKENOUT OF SERVICE.

WARNING

INSTALLATION OF THE SIMULATEDTRACK ASSEMBLY MAY AFFECT WARN-ING TIMES AT OTHER NEARBY OPER-ATING CROSSINGS. THIS CAN OCCURWHEN APPROACHES OF THE NEARBYCROSSINGS OVERLAP THE ISLAND CIR-CUIT OF THE CROSSING WHICH IS BEINGTAKEN OUT OF SERVICE, OR IF THENEARBY CROSSING(S) RECEIVE(S) A DAXSIGNAL FROM THE 3000 GCP TRACK CIR-CUIT WHICH IS BEING TAKEN OUT OFSERVICE.

1. Verify that no train moves are occurring on the track and that all normally-energized relaydrives are energized before continuing.

2. Install the two leads (figure 3-23) of the simulated track assembly (80071) on the associatedtransmitter output terminals for the track that is being taken out of service (TB1-1 and TB1-2or TB2-1 and TB2-2).

NOTE

When connecting the two simulated track assemblyleads, place one lug on the appropriate transmitteroutput terminal and tighten the AAR nut securely.While installing the second lead, hold the lug firmlyon the other terminal while tightening the nut toensure a solid electrical connection. If a solidelectrical connection is not achieved whenconnecting the second lead of the simulated trackassembly, apparent motion may be sensed or anerror condition may be produced, deenergizing oneor more relay drives. If this occurs, disconnect onelead of the simulated track assembly, wait for allrelay drives to recover, and then repeat step 2.


The applicable track circuit is now out of service; however, the island circuit remains operational.

Figure 3-23Simulated Track Inductor Assembly, 80071


3.14.2 Returning a Track to Service

To return track 1 or track 2 to service, disconnect the simulated track assembly (step 2). With notrains operating in the approaches, verify that the track EZ value has returned to its nominal level.In addition, ensure that all other railroad instructions and procedures for returning a track toservice are followed.

3.15 3000 GCP SLAVING UNIT, 80065

When two 3000 GCP’s are frequency slaved in a master/slave configuration, and the two GCP’sare powered from separate batteries, a 3000 GCP slaving unit must be used to isolate the twobatteries. Without the isolation provided by the slaving unit, a grounded battery would bereflected in both sets of GCP operating batteries. The slaving unit prevents this interaction fromoccurring. When the two 3000 GCP’s are operated from the same battery, the slaving unit is notrequired.

The slaving unit consists of a 3-inch diameter by 5-inch long ABS plastic enclosure with mountingbrackets at the base. Four AAR terminals extend from the top of the assembly and accommodateconnections to separate windings of an isolation transformer housed within the hermetically sealedenclosure. The terminals are connected between the battery N (TB1-8) and SLAVING (TB2-6)terminals on the master 3000 GCP and the same pair of terminals on the slave unit as shown infigure 3-24.

Specifications for the 80065 slaving unit are as follows:


Height 7.625 inches (19.37 centimeters) (to top of AAR terminals)


3-47D

ocument N

o.: SIG



3.16 SIX-WIRE SIMULATED TRACK BURIAL ASSEMBLY, 80074

The six-wire simulated track burial assembly (80074) is used in six track wire applications onlyand ensures proper operation of the 3000 GCP self check circuits if a train stops at or very nearthe track wire feed points. The unit is connected between the transmit and check channel receivertrack wires and the associated rail as shown in figure 3-25 and buried beside the tracks. Thelength of the single number 6 AWG lead from the simulated track burial assembly to the trackfeed point should not exceed 50 feet. A typical 3000 GCP six-wire unidirectional installationoperating in the unidirectional mode and using the track burial assembly is shown in figure 1-15.

Figure 3-25Six-wire Simulated Track Burial Assembly, 80074

3.17 EXTENDER MODULE, 80021

The extender module (80021) is 8 inches (20.3 centimeters) high by 8.9 inches (22.6 centimeters)wide and is equipped with a dual 43-pin connector on one edge which plugs into a correspondingedge connector on the 3000 GCP motherboard. The extender module can be used with all 3000GCP plug-in modules and is primarily a troubleshooting device which permits access to a moduleinstalled in the 3000 GCP case for test purposes. The extender module plugs into the caseconnector on the motherboard and the module under test is then plugged into the extendermodule. Test terminals are provided for each connector pin. The module cannot be used with anyother equipment


3.18 MS/GCP TERMINATION SHUNT BURIAL KIT, A62776

The MS/GCP termination shunt burial kit (A62776) is designed to protect narrow-bandtermination shunts that are normally buried in the space between adjacent railroad ties. The kitconsists of a 26-inch length of 6-inch diameter black PVC tubing and a 7x24-inch, 1/4-inch thicksteel plate. One end of the tubing is fitted with a pliable rubber cap that is secured in place by anadjustable stainless steel clamp. Two 5/8-inch diameter holes located near the capped end of thetube accommodate the shunt leads.

The enclosure is normally buried in a vertical position between the ties. The termination shunt islowered into the enclosure and the two leads routed through the holes in the enclosure wall andconnected to the rails using standard procedures. The cap is then secured over the top of theenclosure using the stainless steel clamp. The steel plate is centered over the buriedenclosure/shunt and securely fastened to each tie using the two 1/4x3-inch lag bolts provided.

Specifications for the shunt kit assemblies are as follows:

Dimensions

Enclosure (PVC) 24 inches (60.96 centimeters) long (without end cap)6 inches (15.24 centimeters) in diameter (inside)

Cover Plate (Steel) 24 inches (60.96 centimeters) long7 inches (17.78 centimeters) wide0.25 inch (0.64 centimeters) thick

Weight

Enclosure 5 pounds (2.27 kilograms)

Cover Plate 12 pounds (5.44 kilograms)

3.19 SURGE PANELS, 80026

The 80026 surge panel is available in a variety of configurations to meet specific customerrequirements. Each panel is equipped with the appropriate combination of equalizers and arrestersto provide the necessary protection for battery and/or track circuits. The -01, -02, and -22 unitsare designed for wall mounting while the remaining panels are designed for standard 24-inch rackmounting. For additional surge protection requirements and/or custom designed surge panels,contact Safetran Technical Support. Refer to table 3-12 for specific surge panel applications.


Table 3-1280026-XX Surge Panel Applications

Surge Panel Part Number

Type/Number OfCircuits Protected

MountingRequirements Notes

80026-01 Battery, 1; Track, 1 Wall mount only80026-02 Track, 1 Wall mount only Use with -01 panel for second

track80026-22 Track, 1 Wall mount only Use for six-wire applications80026-31 Battery, 1; Track, 1 Rack mount80026-32 Battery, 1; Track, 1 Rack mount Use with -31 panel for second

track and second battery80026-33 Battery, 1 Rack mount Used with -31 panel for second

track80026-34 Track, 1 Rack mount Used with -31 panel for second

track80026-35 Track, 2 Rack mount80026-36 Track, 1 Rack mount Used with -31 panel for second

track. Used with six-wireapplications for transmit, receive,and check receive lead protection

80026-37 Battery, 1 Rack mount80026-38 Track, 2 Rack mount Used with -37 panel. Used in

applications with six wires on onetrack and four on the other

80026-39 Battery, 4; Batteryinput/output lineprotection for twoDAX or two UAXcircuits

Rack mount Normally used with second batterywhen line circuit protection isrequired

80026-41 110 VAC (Includesfour 15-ampereresettable circuitbreakers and one15-ampere GFCIduplex output)

Rack mount Used primarily when 20-amperesolid-state crossing controller(91070A) is used in conjunctionwith 3000 GCP

80026-41A 110 VAC (Includesthree 15-ampereand one 25-ampereresettable circuitbreakers and one15-ampere GFCIduplex outlet)

Rack mount Used primarily when 40-amperesolid-state crossing controller(91075A) is used in conjunctionwith 3000 GCP

80026-50 Input/outputcircuits, 4

Rack mount Generally used for UAX input orDAX output


Surge panel nomenclature and mounting dimensions are provided on the figures identified in thefollowing chart.

Surge Panel Figure Number Surge Panel Figure Number Surge Panel Figure Number80026-0180026-0280026-2280026-3180026-32

3-263-263-263-273-27

80026-3380026-3480026-3580026-3680026-37

3-283-283-293-293-30

80026-3880026-3980026-41

80026-41A80026-50

3-303-313-313-313-32

3.20 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT PANELS

A number of auxiliary equipment panels are available for use with the 3000 GCP. The panels aredesigned for standard 24-inch rack mounting and will accommodate a variety of auxiliaryequipment as described in the following paragraphs.

3.20.1 Rectifier Panel Assembly, 80033

Rectifier Panel Assembly, 80033, is equipped with equalizers and arresters to provide surgeprotection on the B(+) and N(-) connections to the battery and the GCP. Mounting holes are alsoprovided for Exide Rail Battery Charger, Model ERBC 12/20M. See figure 3-33 for mountingdimensions.

3.20.2 Sentry Data Recorder Panel Assembly, 91041

Sentry Data Recorder Panel Assembly, 91041, provides a convenient rack mounting location for asingle sentry data recorder (91010). See figure 3-34 for mounting dimensions.

3.20.3 Cable Termination Panel Assembly, 91042

Cable Termination Panel Assembly, 91042, is a universal mounting panel which can be orderedwith from 1 to 19 pairs of strapped AAR terminals. See figure 3-35 for mounting dimensions.

3.20.4 Data Recorder Interface And Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91043

Data Recorder Interface And Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91043, provides mountingholes to accommodate a single vital AND-gate driver (90975), two 80025 16-channel datarecorder interface assemblies (80025), or two 24-channel data recorder interface assemblies(80035). See figure 3-36 for mounting dimensions.

3.20.5 Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91044

Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91044, provides mounting holes to accommodate fromone to three vital AND-gate driver assemblies (90975). See figure 3-37 for mounting dimensions.

3-52D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-53D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-54D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-55D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-56D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-57D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-58D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-59D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-60D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-61D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-62D

ocument N

o.: SIG


3-63D

ocument N

o.: SIG



3.21 DC SHUNTING ENHANCER PANEL, 80049

Intermittent poor shunting can result just about anywhere due to numerous causes, but generallyoccurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/or transit operation. Lack of any shunting generallyoccurs in dark territory where no DC or AC track circuits exist and few trains run. Track shuntingin dark territory can be easily improved using methods similar to those employed in style-C trackcircuits (but without the need for so many insulated joints). This involves the use of one insulatedjoint at the far end of each approach and the application of a DC voltage to the track at thecrossing to improve shunting and thus allow the 3000 Enhanced Detection software to functionproperly.

The Safetran DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, provides a very cost effective solution forimproving shunting in dark territory by applying a nominal 6 volts DC to the track at the crossingto break down the film on the rails. This DC voltage is isolated from battery and is generated froma 110 volt AC step-down transformer when AC is present, or from a battery powered DC-to-DCconverter when AC is off (panel switches automatically to DC-to-DC converter output if ACfails). The presence of the 6 volts is checked for by the 3000 GCP UAX input. Only two insulatedjoints are required to confine the 6 volts on the track; one at the far end of each GCP approach.

The DC Shunting Enhancer Panel can also be easily incorporated in applications involvingoverlapping approaches from two or more crossings without additional insulated joints. Narrow-band termination shunts are required in all applications of the 80049 panel. The 80049 panel canbe rack, wall, or shelf mounted.

Figure 3-38DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT FAMILIARIZATION


Figure 3-39DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049,

Typical Application With Overlapping Track Circuits


SECTION IV

KEYBOARD/DISPLAY AND MENU DESCRIPTIONS

4.0 GENERAL

This section defines the functions, displays, and menus associated with each key on thekeyboard/display assembly. The descriptions contained in this section are provided for generalinformation only. For specific programming/operating procedures, refer to the applicable sectionsas required:

Section V, System Application ProgrammingSection VI, System CalibrationSection VII, Diagnostics

The keys on the keyboard are divided into two groups by function: Major mode keys and supportkeys. The major mode keys are the PROGRAM, FUNCTION, HISTORY, ERROR, SYSTEMSTATUS, SETUP, and SYSTEM RESET keys. The remaining keys perform support functions inconjunction with all or certain of the major mode keys.

In the descriptions that follow, a key and its primary function(s) is/are described first. If a menu isassociated with the function, the items contained in that menu and the associated displays are thendescribed in the order in which they appear when scrolling down the menu using the down arrowkey (ò) on the keyboard. For the larger menus, a flowchart is included which provides an overallview of the menu and the relationships of the individual items with that menu.

4.1 SYSTEM STATUS KEY

Press the SYSTEM STATUS key to select the Status Mode menu.The Status Mode displays indicate the current levels or values ofselected system operating parameters such as receiver signal levels(EZ), track ballast conditions (EX), transmitter voltage and currentlevels to the track, and the outputs of the ±5, ±8, and ±15-voltpower supplies. This is a monitor mode only.

When the 3000 GCP is operating in any mode other than the StatusMode (e.g., Program, History, etc.), and no keyboard entries aremade within 90 seconds of the last keyboard entry, the systemautomatically reverts to the Status Mode and the initial Status Modedisplay (see paragraph 4.1.1).

The Status Mode displays are arranged in a menu format that is continuous and starts over at thebeginning when the end of the menu is reached. The Status Mode menu is depicted in flowchartformat in figure 4-1.


If a system is programmed for two tracks (applies to 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L cases only),certain Status Mode menu items provide a separate display for each track. A T1 or T2 appearingin the display indicates the track to which the information applies. When T1 is displayed, pressingthe TRACK 2 key causes similar information for track 2 to be displayed. Pressing the TRACK 1key returns to the track 1 display.

Figure 4-1Status Mode Menu Structure


4.1.1 Current Status of EZ And EX

This is the initial Status Mode display which appears when power is applied to the system,following 90 seconds of keyboard inactivity, or whenever the SYSTEM STATUS key is pressed(T1 indicates that status information applies to track 1).

STATUS T1EZ: 100 EX: 87

The initial Status Mode display indicates current EZ and EX levels for the track indicated.

EZ = Track receiver signal level where: 100 = No train0 = Train in island

EX = Track ballast conditions where: 100 = Ideal85 = Nominal50 = Poor

NOTE

When the Low EX Adjustment (see paragraph4.16.11) is set to a value other than 0 (zero), anasterisk appears following EX: in the initial StatusMode display as shown in the example below.

STATUS T1EZ: 100 EX: * 87

An enhanced track-shunting detection (ED) operating mode (paragraph 4.16.7) is available in3000 GCP’s equipped with an 80044 or 80214 processor module. When this mode is enabled andpoor shunting conditions are detected, *ED* appears in the upper right corner of the display (seeexample below) and remains on the display for the duration of the train move (until the trainleaves the track circuit).

STATUS T1 *ED*EZ: 100 EX: 87

4.1.2 EX at Highest EZ

STATUS T1 MEMORYHZ: 145 EX: 45

Indicates highest EZ value recorded (Hz) for the track indicated and the EX value when that EZvalue occurred.


4.1.3 EZ at Lowest EXSTATUS T1 MEMORYEZ: 95 LX: 62

Indicates EZ value when the lowest EX (LX) value was recorded for the track indicated.

4.1.4 Transmit Current

STATUS T1 XMITCURRENT: 0.251 A

Indicates GCP transmit current (amperes) to the track indicated.

4.1.5 Transmit Voltage

STATUS T1 XMITVOLTAGE: 1.32 V

Indicates GCP transmit voltage (volts) to the track indicated. The voltage varies for different GCPfrequencies and track lengths.

4.1.6 ±5 Volt Power Supply Status

STATUS 5 VOLT+5.02 -5.01

Indicates +5 and -5 volt power supply output levels. Should be 4.75 to 5.25 VDC.


STATUS T1 8 VOLT+7.99 -8.01

Indicates +8 and -8 volt power supply outputs for track indicated. Should be 7.2 to 8.8 VDC.



Indicates +15 and -15 volt power supply output levels. Should be 14.1 to 15.9 VDC.


4.1.9 Time/Date Display With Data Recorder Module Installed

If the data recorder module (80015) is installed, the following status display will appear.

STATUS 11:23:46AWED 15 JAN 1997

The current time and date, according to the data recorder, can be verified by checking this display.Time is in hours-minutes-seconds (hh:mm:ss) format followed by A (AM) or P (PM) in 12-hourformat or by a space in 24-hour format.

4.2 PROGRAM KEY

Press the PROGRAM key to select the Program Mode menu. TheProgram Mode is the primary programming mode for system applicationparameters (warning time, approach distance, etc.). To simplifyoperator interface with the system during programming operations, theProgram Mode is menu-driven.

The Program Mode displays are arranged in a menu format that iscontinuous and starts over at the beginning when the end of the menu isreached. The Program Mode menu is depicted in flowchart format infigure 4-2.

If a system is programmed for two tracks (3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L cases only), someProgram Mode menu items can be programmed differently for each track. A T1 or T2 appearingin the display indicates the track to which the information applies. When T1 is displayed, pressingthe TRACK 2 key causes similar information for track 2 to be displayed. Pressing the TRACK 1key returns to the track 1 display.

NOTE

Information programmed via the Program Modeshould first be entered on the 3000 GCPApplication History Card (see sample in figure 4-5). The application history card (located at the backof this manual) should remain with the equipment atall times and should reflect the current programmedstatus of the system. The order in which theinformation is listed on the card coincides with theorder in which the information is requested in theProgram Mode menu.


NOTE

The following Program Mode menu items can beviewed at any time by selecting the Program Modeand scrolling through the menu. However, if thepassword feature is enabled, the four-digitpassword code must be entered into the system viathe keyboard before any program changes can bemade.

Figure 4-2Program Mode Menu Structure


4.2.1 Number of Tracks

PROGRAM NUMBEROF TRACKS 2

This is the initial Program Mode display which appears when the PROGRAM key is pressed. Theitem requested is the first system application parameter in the menu. The information requested isthe number of operational transceiver modules (80012) per system contained in the 3000 GCPcase. The value to enter is either 1 or 2, whichever applies. For single-track cases (3000ND,3000ND2, 3008, and 3008D2), set this parameter to 1.

4.2.2 Frequency

PROGRAMFREQUENCY: 790

The transmitter frequency for the transceiver module(s) (80012) is requested. If two 80012modules are installed, the same frequency is used for both. The range of values is from 45 to 999Hz in 1-Hz increments.

4.2.3 Unidirectional/Bidirectional

PROGRAM T1UNIDIRECTIONAL

The system application for each track is requested. Select BIDIRECTIONAL or UNIDIREC-TIONAL.

NOTE

3000 GCP’s which are operated in a simulatedbidirectional application must be programmed forBIDIRECTIONAL.

4.2.4 Xmit Level

PROGRAM T1 XMITLEVEL: MEDIUM

Select the transmit level for each track (transceiver) in use. Valid level selections are MAXIMUMand MEDIUM. MEDIUM is used for most applications; however, in high track noiseenvironments or very short approaches, MAXIMUM is recommended.


4.2.5 Predictor/Motion Sensor

PROGRAM T1PREDICTOR

Select the operating mode for each track. Choose PREDICTOR or MOTION SENSOR. Eachtrack can be programmed independently for PREDICTOR or MOTION SENSOR. WhenMOTION SENSOR is selected, all DAX’s associated with that track remain predictors, unless theDAX’s are programmed as preempts.

4.2.6 Warning Time

PROGRAM T1WARNING TIME: 35

Enter the warning time for each track. This warning time is often referred to as “prime warningtime”. The adjustment range is 25 to 99 seconds.

NOTE

The warning time display appears only whenPREDICTOR is selected as the operating mode forthe track indicated.

4.2.7 Approach (Distance)

PROGRAM T1APPROACH: 3000

For bidirectional applications, enter the actual distance (in feet) measured from the feed wires onthe side of the street that is closest to the termination shunt in the longest physical approach.Disregard an approach in which a “dummy track load” (inductance) is used to simulate a longerapproach. For unidirectional applications, enter the actual distance (in feet) from the receivertrack wires to the termination shunt.

NOTE

When the calibration setup procedure is complete,the approach distance display shown above alter-nates with the display shown below.

PROGRAM T1COMPUTED: 3240


The value indicated here is the electrical approach distance computed by the system during setupfor approach. This value is based on track length, ballast conditions, characteristics of thetermination shunt(s), and any simulated track installed in series with the shunt.

4.2.8 UAX Pickup Delay

Model 3000 GCP’s equipped with “F” level software can be programmed to accommodate twoseparate UAX inputs. The UAX (UAX1) terminals accept inputs from track 1 DAX’s while theENA (UAX2) terminal provides an input for track 2 DAX’s. However, when the ENA isprogrammed for zero time, the ENA terminal (positive control input) continues to function as ithas in 3000 GCP’s that are not equipped with “F” level software (i.e., as an enable input forcascading relay drives from two separate units). When the ENA terminal input is not used, theENA terminal must be strapped to battery B to enable operation of MS/GCP relay drive.

PROGRAM UAX1PICKUP DELAY: OFF

PROGRAM ENA/UAX2PICKUP DELAY: ENA

When both UAX inputs are used (controlled from remote DAX units), select the desired UAXpickup delay time (generally 25 seconds). Valid selections are from 1 to 500 seconds. When theUAX1 (UAX) input is not used, select 0 (zero) seconds. This produces an OFF indication on the3000 GCP display and strapping of the UAX1 terminals to battery is not required.

PROGRAM UAX1PICKUP DELAY: 25

WARNING

WHEN THE UAX FEATURE FOR UAX1 ISOFF (ZERO TIME ENTERED), THE FRONTPANEL UAX (UAX1) TERMINALS HAVE NOCONTROL OVER MS/GCP RELAY DRIVE.WHEN UAX AND/OR ENA/UAX2 IS PRO-GRAMMED BETWEEN 1 AND 500 AND ANOMINAL 12 VOLTS IS REMOVED FROMEITHER UAX TERMINAL, MS/GCP RELAYDRIVE IS IMMEDIATELY DEENERGIZED.WHEN 12 VOLTS IS REAPPLIED TO BOTHTHE UAX1 AND/OR ENA/UAX2 TERMI-NALS, MS/GCP RELAY DRIVE ENERGIZESAFTER THE APPLICABLE UAX PICKUPDELAY TIME HAS ELAPSED (PROVIDINGNO OTHER CONDITION KEEPS THE MS/-GCP RELAY DRIVE DEENERGIZED).


4.2.9 Island (Distance)

PROGRAM T1ISLAND: 120

When an a DAX or prime prediction offset is used, enter the island length between GCP transmitand receive track wires for each track (T1 and T2). The value entered is in feet with a valid rangefrom 0 to 999. If not used, enter zero (0) distance.

4.2.10 Number of DAX’s

NOTE

Program Mode menu items relating to DAXinstallations and discussed in paragraphs 4.2.10through 4.2.13 are not applicable to Models3000ND and 3000ND2 GCP’s. For these models,program the number of DAX’s for 0.

PROGRAM NUMBEROF DAXS: 0

Select the number of DAX circuits used in the system. For GCP models 3000, 3000D2, and3000D2L, numbers from 1 to 4 and 0 (zero) are valid entries. For GCP models 3008 and3008D2, numbers from 1 to 8 and 0 (zero) are valid entries. Two DAX circuits are available oneach DAX module.

NOTE

If 0 (zero) is entered, the next menu item to appearis slaving. When a number from 1 to 4 (8) isentered, three additional menu items for each DAXselected follow immediately. The three displaysappear sequentially first for DAX A, then DAX B,DAX C, DAX D, etc. The DAX affected (A, B, C, D,etc.) is indicated in the top row of the display (seeparagraphs 4.2.11 through 4.2.13).

NOTE

For GCP models 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2Lequipped with an 80044 or 80214 processormodule, numbers representing four additional DAXcircuits (5 through 8) can be entered for the numberof DAX’s. However, these entries are reservedexclusively for 8-DAX GCP Models 3008 and


3008D2. Since the Models 3000, 3000D2, and3000D2L GCP’s can accommodate a maximum oftwo DAX modules (four DAX circuits), the numbersfor DAX circuits identified as E(5), F(6), G(7), andH(8) will also be displayed if an invalid entry (5, 6,7, or 8) is made, along with subsequent displays fortrack assignment, DAX distance, and DAX warningtime. However, since the additional modules are notpresent, these invalid programming entries willhave no effect on system operation.

4.2.11 DAX Track (Track Assignment)

The track assignment (1 or 2) must be entered for each DAX circuit indicated (A, B, C, D, E, F,G or H). Track assignment is associated with the transceiver module(s) (80012) installed in theGCP case (see table 2-1 for module locations). For the 8-DAX models (3008 and 3008D2), thetrack assignment for all DAX’s used must be 1. For models 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L, thetransceiver module which is installed in the leftmost transceiver module slot controls track 1 whilethe transceiver installed on the right controls track 2. However, any of the DAX circuits can beassigned to either track (transceiver module) or in any combination. If necessary, review the trackwiring diagrams to determine proper DAX assignments.

PROGRAM DAX ATRACK: 1

WARNING

ASSIGNING A DAX CIRCUIT TO THEWRONG TRANSCEIVER MODULE MAY RE-SULT IN NO WARNING TIME.

4.2.12 DAX Distance

Enter the distance (in feet) between crossings, or between the remote location and the crossing itis controlling. In the diagrams shown at the top of the following page, the distance is measuredfrom the insulated joints at crossing A, the feed wire connections at crossing A, or remotelocation A to the nearest edge of the street at crossing B. The valid range is from 1 to 9,999 feet.

PROGRAM DAX ADISTANCE 1240

WARNING

ENTERING AN INCORRECT DAX DIS-TANCE MAY RESULT IN SHORT OR NOWARNING TIME.


To use the DAX for a traffic signal preemption application, enter 0 (zero) and a PREEMPTindication appears on the display. All necessary logic for the preempt function is included whenthe DAX is programmed for preempt. In addition to the preempt warning time control of thepreempt relay drive, preempt relay drive is also deenergized any time the associated island orUAX (when used) is deenergized.

NOTE

Entering any value from 1 to 9999 disables thepreempt function so that the island and UAX do notaffect the DAX relay drive.

DAXing is applied in unidirectional applications (looking one direction from a set of insulatedjoints) while preempting can be applied in either bidirectional or unidirectional applications.

4.2.13 DAX Warning Time

Enter the warning time (in seconds) for the indicated DAX. The valid range is from 25 to 99. TheDAX warning time is generally selected to be the same or up to 5 seconds longer than the primewarning time. When the indicated DAX is used for the preempt function, the preempt warningtime is generally selected to be 10 to 15 seconds longer than the prime warning time.

PROGRAM DAX AWARNING TIME: 35


4.2.14 Slaving Master/Slave

The master/slave function is used when two or more 3000 GCP cases are to use the sameoperating frequency. The 3000 GCP designated as the master supplies a synchronizing frequencyto the other 3000 GCP’s (slaves) at the location. When only one 3000 GCP is used at a crossing,it must be programmed as a master. If two or more GCP’s are used at a location but each at adifferent frequency, then each unit must be programmed as a master.

PROGRAM SLAVINGMASTER

NOTE

The master/slave function can be used to slave 3000GCP’s to other 3000 GCP’s only; not to Models660 and 600 MS/GCP’s, etc.

NOTE

A jumper must be installed between the front panelSLAVING terminal (TB2-6) on the master 3000GCP and the SLAVING terminal (TB2-6) on eachslave 3000 GCP operating at the same frequency.

Select the GCP frequency slaving status for the 3000 GCP case; either master or slave. The entrymade in this programming item in each unit determines whether the SLAVING terminal is anoutput (master unit) or an input (slave unit).

4.2.15 Password Disabled/Enabled

A user-selectable, four-digit password provides protection from unauthorized changes to theapplication programming. The password feature can be enabled (installed) at the time ofinstallation or any time thereafter if the need arises via this menu item. This menu item is also usedto change or disable the password at any time, providing the correct password is entered first.

PROGRAM PASSWORDDISABLED

When the password feature is enabled, the correct four-digit password must be entered via thekeyboard/display unit before any changes to application parameters (in the Program and FunctionMode menus) can be made. However, the application program parameters can be viewed at anytime without entering the password. For specific procedures relating to the password feature,refer to the applicable paragraphs in section V.


4.2.16 Recorder Not Installed/Installed

The data recorder module (80015) is an optional item in the 3000 GCP. This menu item is used todisable (Not Installed) or enable (Installed) the recorder function. When the recorder function isdisabled (Not Installed), this is the last item from the Program Mode menu to be displayed.

PROGRAM RECORDERNOT INSTALLED

When the data recorder module is installed in the 3000 GCP case, the entry for this menu itemmust be changed to Installed to enable the data recorder.

NOTE

With the data recorder function enabled (Installed),additional menu items appear in the Programmenu. The first four items relate to an external PCor printer which can be connected to the datarecorder module via a 25-pin RS232C connector onthe front edge of the module. Consult the PCsoftware or printer manufacturer’s documentationto determine the values for the four entries.

4.2.17 RS232C Baud Rate

Enter the PC/printer baud rate. Valid baud rates are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600. For 3000GCP’s equipped with an 80044 or 80214 processor module, the default value is 9600.

PROGRAM RS-232-CBAUD RATE: 9600

4.2.18 RS232C Data Bits

Enter the number of data bits (data length) for the PC/printer being used. The value to enter is 7or 8. For 3000 GCP’s equipped with an 80044 or 80214 processor module, the default value is 8.

PROGRAM RS-232-CDATA BITS: 8

4.2.19 RS232C Stop Bits

Enter the number of stop bits for the PC/printer. The value to enter is 1 or 2. For 3000 GCP’sequipped with an 80044 or 80214 processor module, the default value is 1.

PROGRAM RS-232-CSTOP BITS: 1


4.2.20 RS232C Parity

Enter the type of parity used by the PC/printer. Valid entries are None, Odd, Even, Mark, andSpace.

PROGRAM RS-232-CPARITY: NONE

4.2.21 Date

Enter the current day and date in the format shown in the example below.

PROGRAM DATEMON 26 FEB 1996

4.2.22 Time

Enter the current time in hours-minutes-seconds (hh:mm:ss) format as shown in the examplebelow. When using the 24-hour (military) format, follow the time entry with (24 HR). When usingthe standard 12-hour format, follow the time entry with AM or PM, whichever is appropriate.

PROGRAM TIME11:25:43 (24 HR)

4.2.23 Daylight Savings Time

PROGRAM DAYLIGHTSAVINGS: ON

If the 3000 GCP will be operating on daylight savings time, select ON. The data recorder willchange the time setting automatically at the beginning (2:00 a.m. on the first Sunday in April) andend (2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October) of the daylight savings time period. Select OFF ifthe system will be operating on standard time only.

4.3 NEW DATA KEY

The NEW DATA key is a support key that must be pressed just priorto entering a new value when changing system operating parameters inthe Program, Setup, or Function Modes. The NEW DATA keyperforms a similar function in the Event Mode and in the approach andlinearization setup procedures.


4.4 CLEAR KEY

The CLEAR key is a support key that is used to clear (delete)incorrect data entries. When changing system operating parametersin either the Program or Function Mode, if an incorrect data entry ismade but the ENTER key has not yet been pressed, the CLEAR keycan be pressed to remove the new data and return to the previousvalue. The CLEAR key is also used when disabling the passwordfunction.

4.5 SETUP KEY

Press and hold the SETUP key for a minimum of 3 seconds to selectthe Setup Mode. The Setup Mode consists of three automaticsystem calibration procedures: Setup For Calibration, Setup ForApproach Length, and Setup For Linearization. The steps forperforming each of these procedures are provided in Section VI,System Calibration.

Whenever the Setup Mode is selected, the following displayappears:

SETUP T1FOR CALIBRATION

This display identifies the Setup For Calibration procedure, which is the first procedure in theSetup Mode menu. With the Setup Mode selected, any of the three system calibration procedurescan be selected from the Setup Mode menu by pressing the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys.These procedures are described in the following paragraphs.

4.5.1 Setup For Calibration Procedure

The Setup For Calibration procedure must be performed at initial installation, when the system isreturned to default parameters, and whenever any of the items listed in the Setup For Calibrationcolumn of table 4-1 occurs. This includes module replacement, programming changes, andchanges to existing track equipment.


Table 4-1Recalibration And Reprogramming Requirements

Module Replacement Requiring Recalibration Module/Change Setup For Calibration Setup For Approach

Length Setup For Linearization

80012 Required For AssociatedTrack Only

Not Required Not Required 80014/80044/80214*(With New Software

Level Only)Required For Both Tracks Required For Both Tracks Required For Both Tracks

80020/80029* Required For Both Tracks Required For Both Tracks Required For Both Tracks80023/80028 Required For Both Tracks Not Required Not Required

Programming Changes Requiring Recalibration Increased Number ofTracks From 1 to 2

Required For Track 2 Only

Required ForTrack 2 Only

Required ForTrack 2 Only

GCP Frequency Required For Both Tracks Required For Both Tracks Required For Both TracksUnidirectional toBidirectional orBidirectional toUnidirectional

Required For ChangedTrack Only



Transmit LevelChanged From

Medium to Maximumor Maximum to

Medium

Required For Changed Track Only Not Required Not Required

Approach Length Required For ChangedTrack Only



Track Equipment Changes Requiring Recalibration Termination Shunts

Changed or Moved toa New Location

Required Required Required

Termination Shunts ofOther FrequenciesAdded or Removed

From 3000 GCP Approaches


Wideband InsulatedJoint Couplers

(8A076 or 8A077)Replaced in 3000 GCP

Approach(es)

Required Not Required Not Required

Tuned Insulated JointCouplers (62785-f)

Replaced in 3000 GCPApproach(es)


3000 GCP TrackWires Replaced

Required Not Required Not Required *Set to Default and Reprogramming is also required. Refer to Paragraph 5.2, System Programming.


4.5.2 Setup For Approach Length Procedure

The Setup For Approach Length procedure must be performed when calibrating any 3000 GCPinstallation and whenever any of the items listed in the Setup For Approach Length column oftable 4-1 occurs. This includes module replacement, programming changes, and changes toexisting track equipment. The approach length procedure calculates an adjusted approach lengthbased on actual approach length (distance to the termination shunt from the crossing track wires)plus the electrical characteristics of the termination shunt, as well as any simulated track placed inseries with the shunt.

WARNING

THE SETUP FOR APPROACH LENGTHPROCEDURE IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANTFOR ACCURACY OF WARNING TIMES,ESPECIALLY DAX’S AND PRIME PREDIC-TION OFFSETS.

In general, hardwire and wideband termination shunts do not produce significant differencebetween actual and calculated approach lengths while narrow-band shunt termination can produceconsiderable difference. Calculated approach length is nearly the same as the actual approachdistance with wideband shunt termination and longer than actual approach distance with narrow-band shunt termination. The display shown below identifies the Setup For Approach Lengthprocedure.

SETUP T1 FORAPPROACH LENGTH

4.5.3 Setup For Linearization Procedure

The Setup For Linearization procedure must be performed at the time of calibration and wheneverany of the items listed in the Setup For Linearization column of table 4-1 occurs. This includesmodule replacement, programming changes, and changes to existing track equipment. Theprocedure compensates for lumped loads in the 3000 GCP approach that can affect the linearity ofEZ over the length of the approach and is, therefore, essential for warning time accuracy. Thetypes of loads that affect linearity are:

(1) Narrow-band shunts of other frequencies located in the 3000 GCP approaches. This mayoccur when MS/GCP approaches overlap in unidirectional or bidirectional installations.

(2) Other track equipment in the 3000 GCP approaches such as audio overlay, coded track,etc.


WARNING

THE SETUP FOR LINEARIZATION PROCE-DURE IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT FORACCURACY OF WARNING TIMES, ESPE-CIALLY DAX’S AND PRIME PREDICTIONOFFSETS, AS WELL AS RECORDED TRAINSPEEDS.

At installations where overlapping GCP approaches involving narrow-band termination shunts areencountered, loading (lumped loads) can occur which will affect linearity of the EZ value over thelength of the approach. The Setup For Linearization procedure enables the value of EZ to belinearized to compensate for this loading within the approach. This procedure is accomplished atsystem calibration.

4.6 HISTORY KEY

Press the HISTORY key to select the History Mode. The HistoryMode provides a record of four important parameters relating to theprevious 20 train moves (events) on a single track (10 train movesper track when two tracks are monitored). The parameters includewarning time, detected speed (speed of train when unit predicts),average speed (average speed of train throughout the move), andisland speed (speed when entering the island circuit).

The initial history display (see sample below) identifies the track onwhich the move(s) were recorded, the number of events recorded (inangled brackets < >), and the warning time (in seconds) for the lastevent recorded.

HISTORY T1 <10>WARNING TIME: 35

The events occurring on track 2 can be viewed by pressing the TRACK 2 key.

The up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys are used to select the train move number (as indicated onthe display) for which the parameters will be displayed. Each time one of the keys is pressed, thetrain move number in the angled brackets increments or decrements (depending upon the key thatis pressed). Once the desired train move number is displayed, use the NEXT key to scroll throughthe menu of the four parameters. The menu is continuous and starts over when the end is reached.


4.6.1 Warning Time (History)

This initial History Mode display shows the warning time in seconds for the indicated train move(number in brackets < >) on the track indicated.


4.6.2 Detected Speed (History)

This display shows the speed of the train when the unit predicted for the indicated train move onthe applicable track (value shown in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>DET. SPEED: 46

4.6.3 Average Speed (History)

This display shows the average speed of the train throughout the approach for the train moveindicated on the applicable track (value in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>AVG. SPEED: 47

4.6.4 Island Speed (History)

This display shows the island speed (speed when entering the island circuit) for the train moveindicated on the applicable track (value in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>ISL. SPEED: 49

4.7 UP ARROW KEY (ññ)

The up arrow key (ñ) is used in the System Status, Program, andFunction Modes to scroll up a menu (reverse order) and in the Errorand History Modes to scroll through a list of recorded entries indescending order. In the Linearization Setup procedure, the uparrow key (ñ) is used to increment the linearization value.


4.8 DOWN ARROW KEY (òò)

The down arrow key (ò) is used in the System Status, Program, andFunction Modes to scroll down a menu (normal order) and in theError and History Modes to scroll through a list of recorded entriesin ascending order. In the Linearization Setup procedure, the downarrow key (ò) is used to decrement the linearization value.

4.9 ENTER KEY

When operating in the Program and Function (extended program-ming) Modes, press the ENTER key following a data entry to enterthat data in the program. In the Setup and System Reset Modes, theENTER key is used to select a function such as Calibration Setup orto clear errors, respectively.

4.10 SYSTEM RESET KEY

The SYSTEM RESET key selects the Reset or Clear Mode, whichconsists of three functions: Clear Errors (diagnostic messages), ClearHistory, and Reset System. These functions are identified by menuentries in the Reset Mode menu. When the RESET key is pressed andheld for a minimum of 3 seconds, the following display appears:

PRESS ENTER TOCLEAR ERRORS

This display indicates the Clear Mode is selected and identifies theclear errors (diagnostic messages) function, which is the first functionin the Reset Mode menu. The clear errors (diagnostic messages) function permits the operator toclear all system diagnostic messages from system memory which were recorded during system


programming, calibration, or normal operation. These messages are described further in SectionVII, Diagnostics. The Clear Errors function also resets the HZ and LX memories.

During normal operation, the 3000 GCP records warning time and train speeds in history. Theclear history function permits the operator to clear all recorded train move information fromsystem memory. The display shown below identifies the clear history function.

PRESS ENTER TOCLEAR HISTORY

The reset system function clears both the error and history portions of memory simultaneously butwill cause the crossing to operate for approximately 30 seconds. The system reset does not affectthe levels established by the Setup Mode or system programming. The display shown belowidentifies the system reset function.

PRESS ENTER TORESET SYSTEM

NOTE

If the EZ value is less than 3 and power to the 3000GCP is interrupted (when changing out a module,for example), or a system error occurs, relay drivewill not recover until the EZ value becomes greaterthan 3. However, if a train in the approach is thecause of the low EZ value, this condition can bemanually overridden by maintenance personnelperforming a system reset.

4.11 TRACK 1 KEY (1)

The TRACK 1 key is used while in the Program, Function, SystemStatus, Setup, and History Modes to select a display for track 1. TheT1 indicates a track 1 display.


The dual-function TRACK 1 key is also used to enter the digit 1 fornumerical data entries.


4.12 EVENT KEY (3)

The EVENT key is used when the data recorder module (80015) isinstalled to select an event number other than 1 (default value) as thestarting point for a hard copy printout. In the sample Events displaybelow, the number shown in brackets (<27>) indicates the totalnumber of events recorded. The number in the lower right cornerindicates the event number where the printout will begin.

EVENTS <27>START PRINT: 1

The dual-function EVENT key is also used to enter the digit 3 fornumerical data entries.

4.13 ERROR KEY (5)

Press the ERROR (diagnostic) key to select the Diagnostic Mode.The Diagnostic Mode provides a visual indication of the 10 mostrecent diagnostic messages recorded by the system. These messagesare identified by four-digit codes which are cross-referenced in table7-2.

The ERROR (diagnostic) key is a dual-function key and is used toenter the digit 5 for numerical data entries.

4.14 TRACK 2 KEY (2)

The TRACK 2 key is used while in the Program, Function, SystemStatus, Setup, and History Modes to select a display for track 2. TheT2 indicates a track 2 display.


The TRACK 2 key is a dual-function key and is used to enter thedigit 2 for numerical data entries.


4.15 NEXT KEY (4)

When viewing recorded events in the History Mode, use the NEXTkey to scroll through the menu of four parameters (warning time,detected speed, average speed, and island speed) associated witheach event. The menu is continuous and starts over when the end isreached.

The NEXT key is a dual-function key and is used to enter the digit 4for numerical data entries.

4.16 FUNCTION KEY (6)

Press the FUNCTION key to select the Function (extendedprogramming) Mode. The Function Mode is an extension of theProgram Mode and permits fine tuning of certain system parametersto compensate for unusual track conditions or system requirements.To simplify operator interface with the system during programmingoperations, the Function Mode is menu driven.

The Function Mode displays are arranged in a menu format that iscontinuous and starts over at the beginning when the end of the menuis reached. The Function Mode menu is depicted in flowchart formatin figure 4-3.

NOTE

Information programmed via the Function Modeshould first be entered on the 3000 GCPApplication History Card (figure 4-5). The cardshould remain with the equipment at all times andshould reflect the current programmed status of thesystem. The order in which the information is listedon the card corresponds with the order in which theinformation is requested in the Function Modemenu.

When a system is programmed for two tracks (applies to models 3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2Lonly), certain Function Mode menu items can be programmed differently for each track. A T1 orT2 appearing in the display indicates the track to which the information applies. When T1 isdisplayed, pressing the TRACK 2 key causes similar information to be displayed for track 2.Pressing the TRACK 1 key returns to the track 1 display.


Figure 4-3Function Mode Menu Structure


The FUNCTION key is a dual-function key which is also used to enter the digit 6 for numericaldata entries.

NOTE

The following Function Mode menu items can beviewed at any time by selecting the Function Modeand scrolling through the menu. However, if thepassword feature is enabled, the password must beentered before any program changes can be made.

4.16.1 Switch to MS EZ Level

This is the first menu item in the Function Mode menu. The information requested is the level ofEZ at which the 3000 GCP switches from predictor status to motion sensor status. If the system isprogrammed as a motion sensor, this parameter can be ignored. Valid range is from 0 (zero) to100. A 0 (zero) entry produces an Off indication on the display.


This menu item is useful at locations where a station stop is located within the approach distanceand near the crossing. By entering a value which corresponds to what the EZ value would be atthe station stop location in the approach, the first indication of motion as the train leaves thestation will cause the 3000 GCP to activate the crossing substantially sooner than would normallybe the case when operating as a predictor.

NOTE

If the 3000 GCP DAX’s (paragraph 4.2.12) orprime prediction (4.16.3) are programmed for anoffset distance other than 0 (zero), these relay driveoutputs will not switch from predictor to motionsensor.

4.16.2 Transfer Delay MS to GCP

The information requested is the time interval during which the 3000 GCP will remain in themotion sensor mode before reverting to the predictor mode. Valid entries range from 1 to 500seconds plus 0 (zero), which will produce an Off indication on the display.

TRANSFER DELAYMS TO GCP T1:OFF

This menu item is useful in bidirectional applications where one train closely follows another anddesensitized speed calculation for the second train can occur. As the first train clears the crossingand relay drive energizes, the delay time entered begins to count down and the unit is held in the


motion sensor mode for the programmed interval (up to 500 seconds following restoration ofrelay drive). Therefore, if the second train approaches the crossing within the transfer delay time,as much warning time as is feasible will be provided since the unit is still in the motion sensormode.

4.16.3 Prime Prediction Offset

Enter the distance (offset) from the normal zero prediction point to a remote zero predictionpoint. Valid entries range from 1 to 9999 feet plus 0 (zero), which will produce an Off indicationon the display.

PRIME PREDICTIONOFFSET T1: OFF

WARNING

ENTERING AN INCORRECT PRIME PRE-DICTION OFFSET DISTANCE MAY RESULTIN SHORT OR NO WARNING TIME.

This menu item enables a remote 3000 GCP (not located at a crossing) to provide the equivalentof a single DAX output without the need for a DAX module. By offsetting the prime predictor(similar to DAX offset), the prime is converted to a DAX. The offset distance is measured fromthe insulated joints at point A to the feed wires at the edge of the street as shown below.

WARNING

FOR GCP’S EQUIPPED WITH THE 80044 OR80214 PROCESSOR, WHEN PRIMEPREDICTION OFFSET IS PROGRAMMEDFOR ANY VALUE OTHER THAN 0 (ZERO),THE ISLAND CIRCUIT WILL NOTCONTROL THE GCP RELAY DRIVEOUTPUT OF THE GCP (TERMINALS TB1-9AND TB1-10).


4.16.4 Pickup Delay Prime

Enter the time interval (seconds) beginning from when prediction recovers and relay drive returns.Valid entries range from 8 to 500 seconds.

PICKUP DELAYPRIME: 15

NOTE

The default value is 15 seconds and, generally, isnot changed; however, a longer pickup delay (up to500 seconds) can be used if required (e.g., transitstation stops, poor shunting, etc.).

For all software levels, when a train stops in a 3000 GCP approach, actual prime pickup delaytime is determined by the time that has been programmed. However, for GCP’s equipped with80014 processors and “F” level software, or units equipped with 80044 or 80214 processors,when the 3000 GCP is programmed as a DAX by entering a distance value for the primeprediction offset, the prime pickup delay time for through-move trains is automatically calculatedby the system based upon the speed of the train and offset distance. This pickup delay time iscalculated so that prime relay drive energizes just as a train arrives at the street which is controlledby the prime prediction offset. This prevents any incorrect programming of the pickup delay fromcausing gate pumping at the street.

However, when short, rapidly accelerating trains leaving a station are present, such as thoseencountered in transit operations, possible overrings may occur at the crossing. The overrings arethe result of errors in prime pickup delay calculations caused by the rapidly accelerating trains.The condition can be remedied by programming a fixed pickup delay prime time instead of usingthe calculated time. This is accomplished as follows: Program the pickup delay prime interval fora nominal time between 8 and 20 seconds. To select the entry as a fixed time, press the NEWDATA key, then enter 999, and then press the ENTER key. The display will change to indicateFIXED followed by the time that was entered (12 seconds in the example shown below). Thepickup delay time will now remain constant, regardless of the speed of the trains.

PICKUP DELAYPRIME: FIXED: 12

To return to the automatically calculated prime pickup delay time, press the NEW DATA key,enter 999, and press the ENTER key. The word FIXED is no longer displayed, indicating theautomatically calculated pickup delay is operational.



4.16.5 Pickup Delay DAX

Enter the time interval beginning with the point at which a DAX predicts until the gates pick up,in the event the train stops in the DAX approach. Valid entries range from 1 to 500 seconds and 0(zero), which produces an Off indication on the display. This format is displayed for each DAX inthe system (A, B, C, etc.).

PICKUP DELAYDAX A: 15

NOTE

The default value is 15 seconds and, generally, isnot changed; however, a longer pickup delay (up to500 seconds) can be used if required (e.g., transitstation stops, poor shunting, etc.).

For all software levels, when a train stops in a 3000 GCP approach, actual DAX pickup delaytime is determined by the time that has been programmed for the applicable DAX circuit.However, for GCP’s equipped with “F” level software, when the 3000 GCP is programmed byentering a distance value for the DAX circuit, the DAX pickup delay time for through-move trainsis automatically calculated by the system based upon the speed of the train and offset distance.This pickup delay time is calculated so that prime relay drive energizes just as a train arrives at thestreet being controlled by the applicable DAX circuit. This prevents any incorrect programming ofthe pickup delay from causing gate pumping at the street. However, when short, rapidlyaccelerating trains leaving a station are present, such as those encountered in transit operations,possible overrings may occur at the crossing. The overrings are the result of errors in DAXpickup delay calculations caused by the rapidly accelerating trains. The condition can be remediedby programming a fixed DAX pickup delay time instead of using the calculated time. This isaccomplished as follows: Program the DAX pickup delay interval for the applicable DAX circuitfor a nominal time between 8 and 20 seconds. To select the entry as a fixed time, press the NEWDATA key, then enter 999, and then press the ENTER key. The display will change to indicateFIXED followed by the time that was entered (12 seconds in the example shown below). Thepickup delay time will now remain constant, regardless of the speed of the trains.

PICKUP DELAYDAX A: FIXED: 12

To return to the calculated DAX pickup delay, press the NEW DATA key, enter 999, and pressthe ENTER key. The word FIXED is no longer displayed, indicating the automatically calculatedDAX pickup delay is operational.



4.16.6 Compensation Value

The compensation value is a correction factor used to fine tune the system for unusual ballastloads on the track. This value is selected automatically to maintain a stable EZ value overchanging ballast conditions. (The EZ value can be monitored using the Status Mode (see SectionVII, Diagnostics)). The valid range of entries is 1000 to 2000; however, 1000 is generally used.

COMPENSATIONVALUE T1: XXXX

WARNING

THIS VALUE IS SELECTED AUTOMATI-CALLY BY THE SYSTEM ANY TIME THEFREQUENCY IS CHANGED. THE VALUECAN BE CHANGED MANUALLY VIA THISMENU ITEM BUT SHOULD NOT BECHANGED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY IN-STRUCTED BY SAFETRAN TO DO SO. IFTHE VALUE IS CHANGED, SETUP FORCALIBRATION MUST BE PERFORMED.

An additional compensation value is available that is less than 1000. This value is identified on thedisplay as MINIMUM and is entered in a slightly different manner than the other compensationvalues. The compensation value may be changed from 1000 to MINIMUM using the followingprocedure.

NOTE

The compensation value is programmed separatelyfor each track (T1 or T2). Ensure that theappropriate track is selected before proceeding.

1. With COMPENSATION displayed, press the NEW DATA key.

2. To set the system to MINIMUM value, enter 9999 on the keyboard and then press the ENTERkey. The compensation value displayed will change from 1000 to MINIMUM.

3. The 3000 GCP must now be recalibrated using the automated Setup For Calibration procedureas follows: Press and hold the SETUP key until SETUP T1 (or T2) FOR CALIBRATION isdisplayed (approximately 3 seconds). Verify that the appropriate track (T1 or T2) is selected,then press the ENTER key. The automatic calibration procedure is completed in approximately70 seconds.


If, for any reason, it is desired to return the compensation value to 1000, repeat steps 1 through 3above. Entering 9999 switches the display between 1000 and MINIMUM each time 9999 isentered.

4.16.7 Enhanced Detection, T1/T2 (Units Equipped With 80044/80214 Processors Only)

This programming step applies only to a 3000 GCP that is equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module and selects the enhanced detection (ED) operating mode. Each time the NEWDATA key is pressed, the display toggles between Off and On. The default is Off. For a two-trackinstallation, this operating parameter must be set for each track (T1 and T2).

ENHANCEDDETECTION T1: OFF

The enhanced detection mode is for use in areas where poor track shunting conditions areexperienced. The enhanced software containing the poor shunting logic is designed to detect thenonlinear fluctuations of the track signal resulting from poor shunting and automatically switchfrom GCP operation to the poor shunting mode (highly sensitive motion sensor). All preemptsand DAX’s are also switched to the poor shunting mode to ensure adequate warning time andprevent over-rings and tail rings at the crossing. For any train moves where the 3000 GCP doesnot detect poor shunting conditions, the system continues to operate as a conventional constantwarning time device.

WARNING


NOTE

Intermittent poor shunting can result just aboutanywhere due to numerous causes but generallyoccurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/ortransit operation. Lack of any shunting generallyoccurs in dark territory where no DC or AC trackcircuits exist and few trains run. Track shunting indark territory can be easily improved using methodssimilar to those employed in style-C track circuits(but without the need for so many insulated joints).This involves the use of one insulated joint at the


far end of each approach and the application of aDC voltage to the track at the crossing to improveshunting and thus allow the 3000 EnhancedDetection software to function properly.


When this mode is enabled and poor shunting conditions are detected, the system switches to theED operating mode and *ED* appears in the upper right corner of the display (see examplebelow). The *ED* indication remains on the display for the duration of the train move (until thetrain leaves the track circuit).


NOTE

EZ and EX values shown in the preceding samplestatus message are example values only; actualvalues may differ.

4.16.8 Back To Back T1 And T2 (Units Equipped With 80044/80214 Processors Only)

This programming step applies only to a 3000 GCP that is equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module and appears only when the ED operating mode has been selected (paragraph4.16.7 above). This step selects the back-to-back operating mode and the display toggles betweenNo and Yes each time the NEW DATA key is pressed. Yes is selected when two unidirectionalunits are in the same 3000 GCP case and the associated approaches are located on opposite sidesof the same pair of insulated joints. The default is No.

BACK TO BACKT1 AND T2: NO


4.16.9 Station Stop Timer (Units Equipped With 80044/80214 Processors Only)

This programming step applies only to a 3000 GCP that is equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module and appears only when the ED operating mode has been selected (seeparagraph 4.16.7). When a passenger station stop is located in an outbound 3000 GCP approach,and the enhanced detection feature is On, the station stop timer is generally programmed for alonger time interval than the train would normally remain stopped. For example, if a passengertrain normally remains stopped for 60 seconds, program the timer for approximately 90 seconds.The time interval is entered on the numeric keypad and the maximum delay is 120 seconds. Thedefault value is 10 seconds. For a two-track installation, this operating parameter must also be setfor each track (T1 and T2).

STATION STOPTIMER T1: 10

WARNING

WHEN THE STATION STOP TIMER ISPROGRAMMED TO A TIME OTHER THAN10 SECONDS (MINIMUM VALUE), THEREMUST NOT BE ANY TRAIN MOVESAPPROACHING THE CROSSING BETWEENTHE TIME A TRAIN LEAVES THE ISLANDAT THE CROSSING AND THEPROGRAMMED TIME OF THE STATIONSTOP TIMER ELAPSES (TIMER CAN BEPROGRAMMED TO RUN FOR UP TO AMAXIMUM OF 120 SECONDS (2 MINUTES)).

NOTE

The Station Stop Timer should normally be left atthe default setting of 10 seconds. The timer isinitiated automatically after a train leaves theisland circuit and operates in conjunction with theenhanced detection logic. If the train makes astation stop after passing the crossing, the timer canbe programmed for up to 120 seconds to preventtail rings due to poor shunting after the train hasstopped and then departs from the station. Thistimer is active only if Enhanced Detection isprogrammed “ON”.


4.16.10 Number of Track Wires

This programming step selects either a four or six track wire configuration used at an installation.Each track (T1 and T2) must be programmed for either four track wire or six track wireoperation. Enter either a 4 or a 6 when programming. When either track is connected in a six-wireconfiguration, the additional two check receiver wires per track are routed through a small holeprovided in the left side of the Model 3000, 3000D2, 3008, and 3008D2 GCP cases. On Model3000D2L, 3000ND, and 3000ND2 GCP’s, front panel terminals are provided for connection ofthe check receiver wires.

NUMBER OF TRACKWIRES T1: 4

The number of track wires selected for track 2 can be viewed by pressing the TRACK 2 key.

4.16.11 Low EX Adjustment (Units Equipped With 80044/80214 Processors Only)

The EX value is a numerical indication of track ballast conditions relative to the leakage resistancebetween the rails. As ballast resistance decreases, the leakage increases. Leakage resistance can beaffected by the presence of water, mud, salt, or other contaminates that are deposited in the trackballast. High concentrations of these contaminates in a localized area (e.g., at a crossing), resultsin a lump-loading (high leakage between rails) condition.

When ballast is clean, and of the right makeup (no iron content, dry, clean, etc.), an EX value of100 is possible and is considered “perfect”. Normally, the EX value falls in the range from 70 upto 100. When contamination or lump loading occurs, the EX value can approach the GCP EXoperating threshold of 39. (The EX operating threshold was lowered from 45 to 39 in the 80044and 80214 processors.) At these low EX levels, the operation of the GCP can be affected.

The Low EX Adjustment programming step applies only to a 3000 GCP that is equipped with an80044 or 80214 processor module. This step allows the low EX operating threshold to belowered below the preset value (39) and thus allow the GCP to operate under extremely poorballast conditions. The adjustment value is entered on the numeric keypad and the maximumadjustment is 5 (lowers the threshold from 39 to 34). The default value is 0. For a two-trackinstallation, this operating parameter should be set for each track (T1 and T2) as needed.

T1 LOW EXADJUSTMENT: 0

WARNING

DO NOT ARBITRARILY REDUCE THE EXOPERATING THRESHOLD. IMPROPERADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE SHORT OR NOWARNING TIME. THE EX OPERATINGTHRESHOLD HAS ALREADY BEEN


REDUCED TO 39 IN THE 80044 AND 80214PROCESSORS AND SHOULD BE SUFFI-CIENTLY LOW FOR MOST APPLICATIONS.

BEFORE REDUCING THE THRESHOLD,THOROUGHLY TEST THE BALLAST ATTHE LOCATION TO DETERMINEWHETHER OR NOT CONDITIONS PERMITTHE THRESHOLD REDUCTION (REFER TOSECTION VII, PARAGRAPH 7.6.2.2).

When the Low EX Adjustment parameter is set to a value other than 0 (zero), an asterisk (*)appears next to the EX value in the initial Status Mode display (paragraph 4.1.1) as shown below.

STATUS T1EZ: 100 EX: * 87

4.16.12 Set to Default

When initially installed and power is applied, the system must be initialized by installing a set ofdefault parameters (see table 4-2) via this function prior to system programming. The defaultparameters are automatically installed in the system when the Set To Default function in theFunction Mode menu is enabled.

SET TO DEFAULT

Once a system is operational, it is normally not necessary to return to the default values.However, if any of the hardware changes listed below are made, it is necessary to return tothe default parameters and then reprogram and recalibrate the system.

a. Control interface assembly (80020 or 80029) is replaced (includes attached printed circuitboard (80017 or 80153) (see figure 4-4).

b. Processor module (80014, 80044, or 80214) is replaced with another containing adifferent software level.

c. Program PROM’s on processor module (80014 or 80044) are replaced with PROM’scontaining a different software level.

d. Program in flash memory on 80214 processor module is changed to a different softwarelevel.

e. The entire 3000 GCP case, including all associated modules, is moved to another location.


Table 4-2System Default Parameters

Parameter Default Value ReferenceParagraph

Number of Tracks 2 4.2.1Frequency 790 Hz 4.2.2Unidirectional/Bidirectional Unidirectional 4.2.3Xmit Level Medium 4.2.4Predictor/Motion Sensor Predictor 4.2.5Warning Time 35 Seconds 4.2.6Approach 3000 Feet 4.2.7UAX Pickup Delay 25 Seconds 4.2.8ENA/UAX2 Pickup Delay 25 Seconds 4.2.8Island Distance 0 Feet 4.2.9Number of DAX’s 0 4.2.10DAX X Track1 A, C, E And G Track 1

B, D, F And H Track 24.2.11

DAX X Distance1 0 (Preempt) 4.2.12DAX X Warning Time1 35 Seconds 4.2.13Slaving Master 4.2.14Password Disabled 4.2.15Data Recorder Not Installed 4.2.16RS232C Baud Rate 300 (9600)2 4.2.17RS232C Data Bits 7 (8)2 4.2.18RS232C Stop Bits 2 (1)2 4.2.19RS232C Parity None 4.2.20Date n/a 4.2.21Time n/a 4.2.22Daylight Savings Time On 4.2.23Switch to MS EZ Level 10 4.16.1Transfer Delay MS to GCP 0 (Off) 4.16.2Prime Prediction Offset 0 (Off) 4.16.3Pickup Delay Prime 15 Seconds 4.16.4Pickup Delay DAX X1 15 Seconds 4.16.5Compensation Value Set by System Frequency 4.16.6Enhanced Detection2 Off2 4.16.7Back to Back T1 And T22 No2 4.16.8Station Stop Timer2 10 Seconds2 4.16.9Number of Track Wires 4 4.16.10Low EX Adjustment2 02 4.16.11

1 The “X” in parameters identified with a (1) is replaced by A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H on thedisplay and identifies the DAX affected. The default values associated with the parameters applyto all eight DAX’s.

2Applies only to units equipped with 80044 or 80214 processor module(s)


Figure 4-4Location of Keyboard/Display Interface Assembly (80020 or 80029)

With Keyboard/Display Control Unit (80019) Removed

4.17 NUMBER KEYS (O AND 1 THROUGH 9)

These keys are used for entering numerical data. Keys 1 through 6are dual-function keys and are also described elsewhere under theassigned function.


Figure 4-53000 GCP Application History Card

(Front)


Figure 4-53000 GCP Application History Card

(Back)

Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: C5-1

SECTION V

SYSTEM APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

5.0 GENERAL

This section provides step-by-step application programming instructions for the 3000 GCPSystem. Included at the end of this section (paragraph 5.3) are condensed programmingprocedures which are provided as a reference for system users who are familiar with the generalprogramming procedure but require occasional prompting during programming. The procedurescontained herein apply to initial programming as well as reprogramming of the 3000 GCP. Followthe steps in the order listed and perform all steps necessary for the specific application. Seesection IV for descriptions of the programming menu items.

WARNING

THE 3000 GCP MUST BE PROGRAMMEDCORRECTLY FOR THE LOCATION ANDAPPLICATION. FAILURE TO DO SO MAYRESULT IN SHORT OR NO WARNINGTIME!

When power is initially applied to the system, displays similar to the following appear in sequence:

MODEL 3000MICRO GCP

plus one of the following:

SOFTWARE VERSION8V980-01F

SOFTWARE VERSION9V065-01A

SOFTWARE VERSION9V121-01A

(Units equipped with 80014 (Units equipped with 80044 (Units equipped with 80214 processor module) processor module) processor module)

NOTE

The software version indicates the revision level.

COPYRIGHT 1997SAFETRAN SYSTEMS

SYSTEM TEST• • • • • • • •


When the system status message indicated below is displayed, the system is ready forprogramming (EZ and EX values shown are example values only; actual values may vary).


NOTE

If the 3000 GCP is equipped with an 80044 or80214 processor module, and the enhanced track-shunting detection (ED) operating mode(paragraph 4.16.7) is enabled, *ED* appears in theupper right corner of the system status display (seeexample below) when poor shunting conditions aredetected. The *ED* indication remains on thedisplay for the duration of the train move (until thetrain leaves the track circuit).


The 3000 GCP provides two application programming modes: Program and Function. TheProgram Mode is the primary programming mode for system application parameters. An extendedprogramming mode (Function Mode) is provided for programming additional parameters. Each ofthese modes is menu driven to simplify operator interface when programming the system accord-ing to specific application requirements.

NOTE

Application information to be programmed into theProgram and Function menus should first beentered on the 3000 GCP Application History Card(see figure 4-5), which can then be used as areference during programming. The order in whichthe information is listed on the card corresponds tothe order in which the information is requested inthe Program and Function menus.

The Program and Function menus are selected by pressing the corresponding key on the 3000GCP keyboard/display assembly. When a menu is selected, each item in that menu can be viewedby using the down arrow key (ò) to scroll through the menu. The menu is continuous in that itstarts over at the beginning when the end of the menu is reached. During programming, enter theinformation requested and then press the down arrow key (ò) to proceed to the next menu item.The up arrow key (ñ) can be used to scroll through the menu in reverse order.


If, while programming, a keyboard entry is not made within 90 seconds of the last keyboard entry,the system automatically reverts to the Status Mode (paragraph 4.1) and the initial Status Modedisplay appears. If this occurs, reselect the programming mode by pressing the appropriate key(PROGRAM or FUNCTION), scroll to the menu item where programming was interrupted, andproceed as before.

NOTE

If the message “Enter Password” appears on thedisplay while reprogramming an operationalsystem, enter the proper four-digit password andpress the ENTER key to continue.

Each menu contains a number of system application parameters which require specific inputs foreach track controlled by the system. This specific input requirement is identified by T1 (for track1) or T2 (for track 2) appearing in the application parameter display. Systems programmed for asingle track will accept data inputs for track 1 only (T1 displayed). For two-track systems, enterthe track 1 data when T1 appears on the display, press the TRACK 2 key to select the T2 display(T1 in the display changes to T2), and enter the track 2 data. Press the TRACK 1 key to return tothe track 1 display (T1 replaces T2 in the display).

NOTE

Pressing the TRACK 2 key when the system isprogrammed for one track causes the followingmessage to appear on the display for 2 seconds.

ONLY ONE TRACKIS SELECTED

If incorrect digits are entered while making numerical data entries during programming, but theENTER key has not yet been pressed, press the CLEAR key to return to the original valuedisplayed. The correct digits may then be entered.

5.1 MAKING PROGRAM CHANGES

Program changes can be made on in-service 3000 GCP’s at any time, providing no train ispresent in the approach. To make a program change, select the proper programming menu(Program or Function), scroll to the menu item to be changed, enter the new parameter value, andrecord the new value in the proper location on the 3000 GCP Application History Card.Instructions for changing each menu item in the Program and Function menus are provided inparagraph 5.2. Table 5-1 lists each menu item in the Program and Function menus and thecorresponding programming step(s) in paragraph 5.2 required to change each item.


Table 5-1Paragraph 5.2 Programming Step Index

Parameter ReferenceStep No.

Parameter ReferenceStep No.

Set to DefaultNumber of TracksTransceiver FrequencyUnidirectional/BidirectionalTransceiver Transmit LevelPredictor/Motion SensorWarning TimeApproach DistanceUAX1 Pickup DelayENA/UAX2Island DistanceNumber of DAX’sDAX Track AssignmentDAX Approach DistanceDAX Warning TimeSlaving StatusPassword (Enable)Password (Change)Password (Disable)

123456789

1011121314151617a17g17r

Data Recorder Option RS-232-C Baud Rate RS-232-C Data Bits RS-232-C Stop Bits RS-232-C Parity Date Time Daylight SavingsSwitch to MS EZ LevelTransfer Delay MS to GCPPrime Prediction OffsetPickup Delay PrimePickup Delay DAXCompensation ValueEnhanced Detection T1/T2Back-to-Back T1 And T2Station Stop Timer T1/T2Number of Track WiresLow EX Adjustment

18192021222324252627282930313233343536

Table 5-2Programming Changes Requiring System Recalibration

Program Change Setup ForCalibration

Setup ForApproach Length*

Setup ForLinearization*

Increased Number ofTracks From 1 to 2




GCP Frequency Required For BothTracks

Required For BothTracks

Required For BothTracks

Unidirectional toBidirectional orBidirectional toUnidirectional




Transmit Level ChangedFrom

Medium to Maximum orMaximum to

Medium

Required ForChanged Track Only Not Required

Not Required

Approach Length Required For ChangedTrack Only



Ballast CompensationValue


Not Required Not Required

*Setup For Approach Length and Setup For Linearization are combined into a single calibration procedure. Seesection VI, paragraph 6.4.


WARNING

IF ANY OF THE PROGRAM CHANGESLISTED IN TABLE 5-2 ARE MADE, SYSTEMRECALIBRATION IS REQUIRED (SEE SEC-TION VI).

5.2 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

If any of conditions (a) through (d) listed below apply, relay drive is inhibited and the followingmessage is flashed on the display every 2 seconds.

SET TO DEFAULTREQUIRED

a. Initial installation




e. Control interface assembly (80020 or 80029) is replaced (includes attached printed circuitboard (80017 or 80153) (see figure 4-4).

The system must be programmed to Set To Default parameters to initialize the database beforeproceeding with application programming. When the Set To Default parameters have been reset,the system must be completely reprogrammed. To initialize the database, proceed with program-ming step number 1. However, if none of the conditions listed above apply, skip step number 1and proceed to step number 2 to begin application programming.

• SET TO DEFAULT

Step 1 Press the FUNCTION key. The following message is displayed:


Step 1a Press the up arrow key (ñ) once. The following message is displayed:

SET TO DEFAULT


Step 1b Press the NEW DATA key. The following message is displayed:

SET TO DEFAULTPRESS ENTER

Step 1c Press the ENTER key. The system must now be completely programmed startingwith step 2. The following message may appear intermittently, indicating thesystem requires calibration (refer to section VI):

SETUP T1 AND T2REQUIRED

The following message is displayed when installation of default parameters iscomplete.

SET TO DEFAULTCOMPLETE

NOTE

The word Complete momentarily appears in theabove display after 2 seconds.

• APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

NOTE

The value/parameter messages displayed in the fol-lowing steps indicate the system default settings. Ifthe current data displayed is correct, do not pressthe NEW DATA key but simply press the downarrow key (ò) to advance to the next step.

Step 2 Press the PROGRAM key. The following message is displayed:

PROGRAM NUMBEROF TRACKS 2

Step 2a Press the NEW DATA key.

Step 2b Enter the number of tracks (1 or 2) which are monitored by the system.

Step 2c Press the ENTER key.


Step 3 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following message is displayed:



Step 3b Enter the frequency of the transceiver module(s) (45 to 999 Hz).



PROGRAM T1UNIDIRECTIONAL

Step 4a Press the NEW DATA key. The system application for the track indicated togglesbetween unidirectional and bidirectional each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.

Step 4b Press the ENTER key when the desired application is displayed.

Step 4c If two tracks were selected in step 2b, press the TRACK 2 key and repeat steps 4aand 4b for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.



Step 5a Press the NEW DATA key. The transceiver transmit level for the track indicatedtoggles between Medium and Maximum each time the NEW DATA key ispressed.

Step 5b Press the ENTER key when the desired transmit level is displayed.



PROGRAM T1PREDICTOR

Step 6a Press the NEW DATA key. The mode of operation for the track indicated togglesbetween Predictor and Motion Sensor each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.


Step 6b Press the ENTER key when the desired mode of operation is displayed.





Step 7b Enter the warning time for the track indicated.


Step 7d If two tracks were selected in step 2b, press the TRACK 2 key and repeat steps7a, 7b, and 7c for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.



NOTE

The approach distance display shown abovealternates with the following display:


The value indicated is the approach distance thatwill be computed by the system during calibration(section VI).


Step 8b Enter the approach distance for the track indicated (0000 to 9999) (value is infeet).







Step 9b Enter the pickup delay time (0 (off) to 500 seconds) for UAX 1.

WARNING

WHEN THE UAX FEATURE IS OFF (0 ISENTERED), THE FRONT PANEL UAX TER-MINALS HAVE NO CONTROL OVERMS/GCP RELAY DRIVE.



PROGRAM ENA/UAX2PICKUP DELAY: 25


Step 10b Enter the pickup delay time (0 (ENA) to 500 seconds) for UAX 2.

NOTE

When the UAX2 feature is ENA (0 is entered), thefront panel ENA terminals continue to operate asconventional ENA terminals for cascading GCPoutputs.






Step 11b Enter the island distance for the track indicated (0 to 999 feet).






Step 12b Enter the number of DAX’s in the system (0 to 4 possible with 80014 processor, 0to 8 possible with 80044 and 80214 processors).

NOTE

For 3000 GCP’s equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module, numbers representing fouradditional DAX circuits (5 through 8) can beentered for the number of DAX’s. However, theseentries are reserved exclusively for 8-DAX GCPModels 3008 and 3008D2. Since GCP Models3000, 3000D2, and 3000D2L can onlyaccommodate a maximum of two DAX modules(four DAX circuits), the parameters for DAXcircuits identified as E(5), F(6), G(7), and H(8) willbe displayed on these units (if the number of DAX’sentered is greater than 4), but will be ignored by thesystem.


NOTE

If 0 (zero) was entered in step 12b, skip steps 13through 15c and proceed to step 16. If a numberfrom 1 to 8 was entered, proceed to step 13.





Step 13b Enter the track assignment for the DAX indicated (1 for T1 or 2 for T2).



PROGRAM DAX ADISTANCE: 0


Step 14b Enter the offset distance for the DAX indicated (0 (preempt) to 9999 feet).





Step 15b Enter the warning time for the DAX indicated (25 to 99 seconds).

Step 15c Press the ENTER key.NOTE

If two or more DAX’s were selected in step 12b,repeat steps 13 through 15c for each additionalDAX.




Step 16b Select the slaving status for the 3000 GCP case (Master or Slave). The displaytoggles between Master and Slave each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.



Step 17 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. One of the following messages will bedisplayed, depending upon the current status of the password feature:


or PROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

NOTE

To leave the password feature in its current status,proceed to step 18. To enable the password feature,proceed as directed in steps 17a through 17e. Tochange the current password code, proceed asdirected in steps 17g through 17p. To disable thepassword feature, proceed as directed in steps 17rthrough 17u.

• ENABLE PASSWORD

Step 17a Press the NEW DATA key. The following message is displayed:

ENTER NEWPASSWORD: n

Step 17b Enter the new four-digit password.

Step 17c Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:

CONFIRM NEWPASSWORD: n

Step 17d Re-enter the new password.

Step 17e Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed, indicating thepassword feature is enabled and the password is installed:

PROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

Step 17f Proceed to step 18.

• CHANGE PASSWORD

Step 17g Press the NEW DATA key. The following message is displayed:

ENTER OLDPASSWORD: n


Step 17h Enter existing four-digit password.

Step 17j Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:


Step 17k Enter new four-digit password.

Step 17m Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:

CONFIRM NEWPASSWORD: n

Step 17n Re-enter the new password.

Step 17p Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed, indicating the newpassword is installed:

PROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

Step 17q Proceed to step 18.

• DISABLE PASSWORD

Step 17r Press the NEW DATA key. The following message is displayed:

ENTER OLDPASSWORD: n

Step 17s Enter the current four-digit password.

Step 17t Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:


Step 17u Press the CLEAR key. The following message is displayed, indicating thepassword feature is disabled:

PROGRAM PASSWORDDISABLED n


• DATA RECORDER PROGRAMMING

Step 18 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. One of the following messages is displayed,depending upon the current data recorder status:


or PROGRAM RECORDERINSTALLED

If the data recorder option is to be used, program the system for recorder Installed(steps 18a and 18b) and then perform programming steps 19 through 25b asrequired.

If the data recorder option is not to be used, program the system for recorder NotInstalled (steps 18a and 18b) and then proceed to step 26 for extended applicationprogramming.

Step 18a Press the NEW DATA key. The recorder option status toggles between NotInstalled and Installed each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.

Step 18b Press the ENTER key when the desired recorder option status is displayed.

NOTE

Perform steps 19 through 22c to set the RS232Cinterface port parameters to enable the 3000 GCPto communicate with an external PC or printer,which can be connected to the data recordermodule (80015) via a 25-pin RS232C connectorlocated on the front edge of the module. Refer to theapplicable PC software or printer manufacturer’smanual to determine the appropriate values toenter. Steps 19 through 22c may be performed at afuture date prior to downloading recorded data to aPC or printer.




Step 19b Use the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys to display the PC/printer baud rate (300,1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600). The default value for units equipped with an 80044 or80214 processor module is 9600.






Step 20b Use the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys to display the number of data bits for thePC/printer (7 or 8). The default value for units equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module is 8.





Step 21b Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the number of stop bits forthe PC/printer (1 or 2). The default value for units equipped with an 80044 or80214 processor module is 1.





Step 22b Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the type of parity used by thePC/printer (none, odd, even, mark, or space).


Step 23 Press the down arrow key (ò) until the date display message (similar to thatshown below) appears.

PROGRAM DATEMON 07 APR 1997


Step 23a Press the NEW DATA key. The cursor appears at the first digit of the day-of-the-month entry.

Step 23b Enter the day of the month. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 12, 27, etc.).When the second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first letter of the monthentry.

Step 23c Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the desired month entry.

Step 23d Press the NEW DATA key. The cursor appears at the first digit of the year entry.

Step 23e Enter all four digits for the year entry (1997, 1998, etc.). As the last digit isentered, the applicable day of the week is automatically displayed and the cursormoves to the first letter of the day-of-the-week entry. Review all time entries andchange any if necessary.

Step 23f Press the ENTER key.

Step 24 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. A time display message similar to that shownbelow appears. Time is displayed in hours:minutes:seconds (hh:mm:ss) format.


Step 24a Press the NEW DATA key. The cursor appears at the first digit of the hours entry.

Step 24b Enter the hours. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 02. etc.). When thesecond digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the minutes entry.

NOTE

If 24-hour (military) time format is used, be sure toenter the hours in the same format (01, 12, 18, 21,etc.).

Step 24c Enter the minutes. The entry must consist of two digits (01,12, 21, etc.). When thesecond digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the seconds entry.

NOTE

To ensure precise time setting, it may be helpful toset the minutes entry approximately two minutesahead of the actual time to allow sufficient time tocomplete steps 24d and 24e below. Then, when theentered minutes time arrives, step 24f can beperformed.


Step 24d Enter the seconds. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 12, 21, etc.). Whenthe second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first character of the timeformat (AM, PM, 24-Hour) entry.

Step 24e Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the desired time format entry.When using 24-hour (military) format, follow the time entry with 24 Hr. Whenusing standard 12-hour format, follow the time entry with AM or PM, whichever isappropriate.

Step 24f Press the ENTER key at the exact second when real time coincides with the timeentered on the display. Verify that the seconds portion of the display is nowincrementing.

Step 25 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following daylight savings time messageis displayed.


Step 25a Press the NEW DATA key. Each time the NEW DATA key is pressed, the entrytoggles between Off and On. If daylight savings time is to be used, select On andthe recorder will change the time setting automatically at the beginning (2:00 a.m.on the first Sunday in April) and end (2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October) ofthe daylight savings time period. If daylight savings time is not to be used, selectOff.

Step 25b Press the ENTER key.

• EXTENDED APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

Step 26 Press the FUNCTION key. The following message is displayed:



Step 26b Enter the level of EZ at which the indicated track circuit switches from predictorto motion sensor mode (0 (off) to 100).


Step 26d If the system is programmed for two tracks, press the TRACK 2 key and repeatsteps 26a through 26c above for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.



TRANSFER DELAYMS TO GCP T1: OFF


Step 27b Enter the amount of time that the indicated track circuit will remain in the motionsensor mode before reverting to the grade crossing predictor mode (0 (off) to 500seconds).


Step 27d If the system is programmed for two tracks, press the TRACK 2 key and repeatsteps 27a through 27c for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.




Step 28b Enter the prime prediction offset distance for the indicated track (0 (off) to 9999feet).


Step 28d If the system is programmed for two tracks, press the TRACK 2 key and repeatsteps 28a, 28b, and 28c for track 2. Press the TRACK 2 key.




Step 29b Enter the length of time from the point at which motion ceases in the approachuntil the gates pick up (8 to 500 seconds).






Step 30b Enter the length of time from the point at which motion ceases in the indicatedDAX approach until the gates pick up when a train stops in the DAX approach (0(off) to 500 seconds).


Step 30d Repeat steps 30 through 30c for each additional DAX circuit in the system (B, C,and D).




Step 31b Enter the compensation value for the track indicated (1000 to 2000).

WARNING

THE DEFAULT VALUE IS AUTOMATICAL-LY CALCULATED BY THE 3000 GCP SYS-TEM. DO NOT CHANGE THIS VALUEWITHOUT PROPER INSTRUCTIONS.



Step 32 If the system is equipped with an 80014 processor module, skip steps 32 through34c and proceed to step 35. If the system is equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module, press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following message isdisplayed:

T1 ENHANCEDDETECTION: OFF


WARNING

EVEN THOUGH ENHANCED DETECTION ISDESIRED AND PROGRAMMED “ON”, IFTRAIN TRAFFIC IS MINIMAL, ESPECIALLYIN DARK TERRITORY, RUST BUILD-UP ONTHE RAILS MAY NOT ALLOW ANY TRACKSHUNTING TO OCCUR. THE 3000 GCPMUST DETECT TRAIN SHUNTING (REA-SONABLE EZ FLUCTUATIONS) IN ORDERTO DETECT POOR SHUNTING.

NOTE

Intermittent poor shunting can result just aboutanywhere due to numerous causes but generallyoccurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/ortransit operation. Lack of any shunting generallyoccurs in dark territory where no DC or AC trackcircuits exist and few trains run. Track shunting indark territory can be easily improved using methodssimilar to those employed in style-C track circuits(but without the need for so many insulated joints).This involves the use of one insulated joint at thefar end of each approach and the application of aDC voltage to the track at the crossing to improveshunting and thus allow the 3000 EnhancedDetection software to function properly.


Step 32a Press the NEW DATA key. The ED operating mode for track 1 toggles betweenOn and Off each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.


Step 32b Press the ENTER key when the desired mode status is displayed.

Step 32c If track 2 is also selected in step 2b, press the TRACK 2 key and repeat steps 32aand 32b above for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.

NOTE

Steps 33 and 34 apply only if the enhanceddetection (ED) mode is programmed to On (step32). If the ED mode is programmed Off, thedisplays in steps 33 and 34 will not appear;therefore, proceed to step 35.



Step 33a Press the NEW DATA key. The back-to-back display toggles between No and Yeseach time the NEW DATA key is pressed. Select Yes when two unidirectionalunits are in the same 3000 GCP case and the associated approaches are located onopposite sides of the same pair of insulated joints.

Step 33b Press the ENTER key when the applicable condition is displayed.


STATION STOPTIMER T1: 10

WARNING

WHEN THE STATION STOP TIMER ISPROGRAMMED TO A TIME OTHER THAN10 SECONDS (MINIMUM VALUE), THEREMUST NOT BE ANY TRAIN MOVESAPPROACHING THE CROSSING BETWEENTHE TIME A TRAIN LEAVES THE ISLANDAT THE CROSSING AND THEPROGRAMMED TIME OF THE STATIONSTOP TIMER ELAPSES (TIMER CAN BEPROGRAMMED TO RUN FOR UP TO AMAXIMUM OF 120 SECONDS (2 MINUTES)).


NOTE

The Station Stop Timer should normally be left atthe default setting of 10 seconds. The timer isinitiated automatically after a train leaves theisland circuit and operates in conjunction with theenhanced detection logic. If the train makes astation stop after passing the crossing, the timer canbe programmed for up to 120 seconds to preventtail rings due to poor shunting after the train hasstopped and then departs from the station. Thistimer is active only if Enhanced Detection isprogrammed “ON”.

Step 34a Press the NEW DATA key. This entry is used when a passenger station platform islocated within the 3000 GCP approach and the value entered on the numerickeypad establishes the time interval (in seconds) during which the internal loss-of-shunt timer is inhibited. Valid entries are 10 to 120.

Step 34b Press the ENTER key when the desired time interval is displayed.

Step 34c If track 2 is also selected in step 2b, press the TRACK 2 key and repeat steps 34aand 34b above for track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.




Step 35b Enter the number of track wires for the indicated track (4 or 6).



Step 36 If the system is equipped with an 80014 processor module, skip steps 36 through36d and proceed to step 37. If the system is equipped with an 80044 or 80214processor module, Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following message isdisplayed:



WARNING

DO NOT ARBITRARILY REDUCE THE EXOPERATING THRESHOLD. IMPROPERADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE SHORT OR NOWARNING TIME. THE EX OPERATINGTHRESHOLD HAS ALREADY BEENREDUCED TO 39 IN THE 80044 AND 80214PROCESSORS AND SHOULD BE SUFFI-CIENTLY LOW FOR MOST APPLICATIONS.

BEFORE REDUCING THE THRESHOLD,THOROUGHLY TEST THE BALLAST ATTHE LOCATION TO DETERMINEWHETHER OR NOT CONDITIONS PERMITTHE THRESHOLD REDUCTION (SEESECTION VII, PARAGRAPH 7.6.2.2).

NOTE

If Low EX Adjustment is required for track 1,proceed to step 36a; otherwise, proceed to step 36d.


Step 36b Enter the low EX threshold adjustment value for the indicated track (0 to 5).


Step 36d If the system is programmed for two tracks, press the TRACK 2 key and repeatsteps 36a, 36b, and 36c for track 2 if necessary. Press the TRACK 1 key.


SET TO DEFAULT

NOTE

The routine performed by step 37 was performed instep 1, or it was not required.

This completes system application programming. Before the system can be placed in operation,system calibration must be performed. Proceed to Section VI, System Calibration.


5.3 CONDENSED PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

The condensed programming procedures that follow are provided as a reference for system userswho are familiar with the general programming procedure but require occasional promptingduring system programming. The step numbers listed in the condensed procedures correspondwith the step numbers in paragraph 5.2.

NOTE

Refer to the 3000 GCP Application History Card(figure 4-5) (which should have been completedprior to programming) for the values to be enteredduring programming.

WARNING

THE 3000 GCP MUST BE PROGRAMMEDCORRECTLY FOR THE LOCATION ANDAPPLICATION. FAILURE TO DO SO MAYRESULT IN SHORT OR NO WARNINGTIME!

If any of conditions (a) through (d) listed below apply, relay drive may be inhibited and thefollowing message will be flashed on the display every 2 seconds:


The system must be programmed to Set To Default parameters to initialize the database beforeproceeding with application programming. To initialize the database, proceed with programmingstep number 1. However, if none of the conditions listed below apply, skip step 1 and proceed tostep 2 to begin application programming.

a. Initial installation




e. Keyboard/display interface assembly (80020 or 80029) is replaced (includes attached key-board display interface module (80017 or 80153) (see figure 4-4).


NOTE

In the procedures that follow, if the display shownbelow appears when the NEW DATA key ispressed, enter the proper four-digit password andthen press the ENTER key to continue.

ENTERPASSWORD n

The condensed programming procedures are provided in the charts on the following pages.

• SET TO DEFAULT

StepNo.

KeyPressed

Resulting Display Data EntryKey Sequence

Comments 1 FUNCTION T1 SWITCH TO MS

EZ LEVEL: 10Go to step 1a

1a Up Arrow(one time)

SET TO DEFAULT Go to step 1b

1b NEW DATA SET TO DEFAULTPRESS ENTER

Go to step 1c

1c ENTER SETUP T1 AND T2REQUIRED

then

SET TO DEFAULT COMPLETE

Setup message displayedintermittently. Indicates systemcalibration (section VI) is required.

Displayed when installation ofdefault parameters is complete. Theword Complete momentarily appearsin the display after 2 seconds.

The system must now be completelyreprogrammed.

• APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 2 PROGRAM PROGRAM NUMBER OF

TRACKS: 2a. NEW DATAb. (1 or 2)c. ENTER

Default value is 2.

3 Down Arrow(one time)


a. NEW DATAb. (45 to 999)c. ENTER

Default value is 790 Hz.


APPLICATION PROGRAMMING Continued

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 4 Down Arrow

(one time)PROGRAM T1UNIDIRECTIONAL

a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

System application for indicatedtrack toggles between Unidirectionaland Bidirectional each time theNEW DATA key is pressed. Defaultis Unidirectional.

If programmed for two tracks, pressthe TRACK 2 key and repeat stepfor track 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.



a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

Transceiver transmit level for thetrack indicated toggles betweenMedium and Maximum each timethe NEW DATA key is pressed.Default is Medium.



PROGRAM T1PREDICTOR

a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

Mode of operation for indicatedtrack toggles between Predictor andMotion Sensor each time the NEWDATA key is pressed. Default isPredictor.





Default is 35 seconds. If program-med for two tracks, press theTRACK 2 key and repeat step fortrack 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.



alternates with



Default is 3000. If programmed fortwo tracks, press the TRACK 2 keyand repeat step for track 2. PressTRACK 1 key.



a. NEW DATAb. (0 (off) to 500)c. ENTER

The default is 25 seconds.

WARNING

WHEN THE UAX FEATURE (Step No. 9) IS OFF (0 ISENTERED), THE FRONT PANEL UAX TERMINALSHAVE NO CONTROL OVER MS/GCP RELAY DRIVE.


APPLICATION PROGRAMMING Concluded

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PROGRAM ENA/UAX2PICKUP DELAY: 25

a. NEW DATAb. (0 (ENA) to 500)c. ENTER

When the UAX2 feature is off (0 isentered) the front panel ENAterminals continue to operate asconventional ENA terminals forcascading GCP outputs. Default is25 seconds.




Default is 0 feet. If programmed fortwo tracks, press the TRACK 2 keyand repeat step for track 2. Press theTRACK 1 key.




If 0 (zero) is entered, proceed to step16. If a number from 1 to 8 isentered, proceed to step 13. Defaultis 0.



a. NEW DATAb. (1 or 2)c. ENTER

Default is track 1 for A, C, E, & G;track 2 for B, D, F, & H.


PROGRAM DAX ADISTANCE: 0

a. NEW DATAb. 0 (preempt) to

9999)

Default is 0 (preempt).




Default is 35 seconds. If two or moreDAX’s were selected (step 12),repeat steps 13, 14, and 15 for eachDAX.

16 Down Arrow(One Time)


a. NEW DATAb. (Use NEW

DATA key toselect Master orSlave)

c. ENTER

Default is Master.

NOTE

If the password is to be enabled or disabled, proceedwith steps 17 through 17u as required; otherwise,press the down arrow key (ò) and proceed to step 18.

17 Down Arrow(One Time)


orPROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

Determined by currentpassword status

Default is Disabled. To leave thepassword feature in the currentstatus, proceed to step 18.

To enable the password feature,perform steps 17a through 17e.

To change the current password,perform steps 17g through 17p.

To disable the password feature,perform steps 17r through 17u.


• ENABLE PASSWORD

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 17a NEW DATA ENTER NEW

PASSWORD: nEnter four-digitpassword, thenproceed to step 17c.

17c ENTER CONFIRM NEWPASSWORD: n

Re-enter four-digitpassword, thenproceed to step 17e.

17e ENTER PROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

Password feature enabled and pass-word is installed. Proceed to step 18.

• CHANGE PASSWORD

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 17g NEW DATA ENTER OLD

PASSWORD: nEnter old four-digit password,then go to step 17j.

To change the current password,perform steps 17g through 17p.

17j ENTER ENTER NEWPASSWORD: n

Enter new four-digit password,then go to step17m.

17m ENTER CONFIRM NEWPASSWORD: n

Re-enter the newfour-digitpassword, then goto step 17p.

17p ENTER PROGRAM PASSWORDENABLED

The new password is installed.Proceed to step 18.

• DISABLE PASSWORD

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 17r NEW DATA ENTER OLD

PASSWORD: nEnter current four-digit password,then go to step 17t.

To disable the password feature,perform steps 17r, 17s, and 17t.

17t ENTER ENTER NEWPASSWORD: n

Enter no number,but go to step 17u.

17u CLEAR PROGRAM PASSWORDDISABLED

The password feature is now disabled.Proceed to step 18.


NOTE

Steps 18 through 25b apply to the data recordermodule (80015). Perform these steps as required.

• DATA RECORDER PROGRAMMING

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PROGRAM RECORDERNOT INSTALLED

orPROGRAM RECORDERINSTALLED

Determined by the currentdata recorder status

(See comments)a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

If the data recorder module (80015) isnot installed, proceed to step 26 forextended programming.

If the data recorder is installed but therecorder feature has not yet beenenabled, proceed as directed in steps18 through 25b.

Data recorder status toggles betweenInstalled and Not Installed each timethe NEW DATA key is pressed.Default is Not Installed.

NOTE

Steps 19 through 22c apply to an external PC orprinter connected to the 3000 GCP. Refer to the PCsoftware or printer manufacturer’s instructionmanual to determine the values to enter in eachstep. If a PC or printer is not connected but the datarecorder module (80015) is installed, proceed asdirected in steps 23, 24, and 25.

• PROGRAMMING FOR AN EXTERNAL PC OR PRINTER

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PROGRAM RS-232-CBAUD RATE: 300


Default value for system equippedwith 80014 processor module is 300.Default value for system equippedwith 80044 or 80214 processormodule is 9600.






PROGRAMMING FOR AN EXTERNAL PC OR PRINTER Concluded

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PROGRAM RS-232-CSTOP BITS: 2





a. NEW DATAb. (Use arrow keys

to select None,Odd, Even,Mark, or Space.)

c. ENTER

Default value is None.

• DATE AND TIME PROGRAMMING

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PROGRAM DATEMON 07 APR 1997

(Example)

a. NEW DATAb. (Enter date.)c. ENTER

Enter day of the month first (must betwo digits). Use arrow keys to selectmonth. Enter all four digits of theyear.



(Example)

a. NEW DATAb. (Enter current

time of day.)c. ENTER

For 24-hour (military) format, followthe time entry with (24 Hr). Forstandard 12-hour format, follow thetime entry with AM or PM,whichever applies.



a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

Entry toggles between On and Offeach time the NEW DATA key ispressed. Default is On.

• EXTENDED APPLICATION PROGRAMMING

StepNo.

KeyPressed


Comments 26 FUNCTION T1 SWITCH TO MS

EZ LEVEL: 10a. NEW DATAb. (0 (off) to 100)c. ENTER

Default is EZ=10. If programmed fortwo tracks, press the TRACK 2 keyand repeat step for track 2. Press theTRACK 1 key.


TRANSFER DELAYMS TO GCP T1: OFF


Default is 0 (off). If programmed fortwo tracks, press the TRACK 2 keyand repeat step for track 2. Press theTRACK 1 key.




Default is 0 (off). If programmed fortwo tracks, press the TRACK 2 keyand repeat step for track 2. Press theTRACK 1 key.


EXTENDED APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (Continued)

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)PICKUP DELAYPRIME: 15


Default is 15 seconds.




This step is applicable only when thesystem is programmed for one ormore DAX’s. Default is 15 seconds.

Repeat step 30 for each DAX in thesystem (B, C, and D)




Default value is automaticallycalculated by the 3000 GCP system. Ifprogrammed for two tracks, press theTRACK 2 key and repeat step fortrack 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.

WARNING

DO NOT CHANGE THE COMPENSATION VALUE (Step No. 31)WITHOUT PROPER INSTRUCTIONS.


T1 ENHANCEDDETECTION: OFF

a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

Default is Off. Display togglesbetween On and Off each time theNEW DATA key is pressed.

If programmed for two tracks, pressthe TRACK 2 key and repeat step fortrack 2. Press the TRACK 1 key.

WARNING

EVEN THOUGH ENHANCED DETECTION (Step No. 32) IS DESIREDAND PROGRAMMED “ON”, IF TRAIN TRAFFIC IS MINIMAL,ESPECIALLY IN DARK TERRITORY, RUST BUILD-UP ON THERAILS MAY NOT ALLOW ANY TRACK SHUNTING TO OCCUR. THE3000 GCP MUST DETECT TRAIN SHUNTING (REASONABLE EZFLUCTUATION) IN ORDER TO DETECT POOR SHUNTING.



a. NEW DATAb. ENTER

Default is No. Display togglesbetween No and Yes each time theNEW DATA key is pressed.


EXTENDED APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (Concluded)

StepNo.

KeyPressed



(one time)STATION STOPTIMER T1: 10


Default is 10 seconds. If programmedfor two tracks, press the TRACK 2key and repeat step for track 2. Pressthe TRACK 1 key.

WARNING

WHEN THE STATION STOP TIMER (Step No. 34) IS PROGRAMMEDTO A TIME OTHER THAN 10 SECONDS (MINIMUM VALUE),THERE MUST NOT BE ANY TRAIN MOVES APPROACHING THECROSSING BETWEEN THE TIME A TRAIN LEAVES THE ISLANDAT THE CROSSING AND THE PROGRAMMED TIME OF THESTATION STOP TIMER ELAPSES (TIMER CAN BE PROGRAMMEDTO RUN FOR UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 120 SECONDS (2 MINUTES)).




Default is 4. If programmed for twotracks, press the TRACK 2 key andrepeat step for track 2. Press theTRACK 1 key.




Default is 0. Optional, use only ifneeded. If programmed for twotracks, press the TRACK 2 key andrepeat step for track 2 as needed.Press the TRACK 1 key.

WARNING

DO NOT ARBITRARILY REDUCE THE EX OPERATING THRESH-OLD (Step No. 36). IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE SHORTOR NO WARNING TIME. THE EX OPERATING THRESHOLD HASALREADY BEEN REDUCED TO 39 IN THE 80044 AND 80214PROCESSORS AND SHOULD BE SUFFICIENTLY LOW FOR MOSTAPPLICATIONS.

BEFORE REDUCING THE THRESHOLD, THOROUGHLY TEST THEBALLAST AT THE LOCATION TO DETERMINE WHETHER ORNOT CONDITIONS PERMIT THE THRESHOLD REDUCTION (SEESECTION VII, PARAGRAPH 7.6.2.2).


SET TO DEFAULT See step 1.


SECTION VI

SYSTEM CALIBRATION

6.0 GENERAL

Calibration of the 3000 GCP is an extremely simple and reliable, microprocessor-controlledoperation consisting primarily of three automated setup procedures which include setup forcalibration, setup for approach length, and setup of linearization. User interface is kept to aminimum, requiring only occasional inputs via the keyboard/display assembly. No meters orexternal test equipment are required for field calibration.

As a safeguard against improper system operation, the 3000 GCP software inhibits system relaydrive output if the setup for calibration procedure is required but has not yet been performed. Asan indication that a setup procedure must be performed, a reminder message is flashed on thekeyboard/display assembly when the unit is in either Program or Status Mode.

The reminder message for the calibration setup procedure is in the form of one of the followingdisplays (depending upon the number of tracks programmed for the system and the parameterchanged):

SETUP T1 AND T2REQUIRED

SETUP T1REQUIRED

SETUP T2REQUIRED

Before proceeding with system calibration, ensure that insulated joint bypass couplers andtermination shunts are installed where required.

6.1 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

For initial system installations, program the system according to the procedure provided inSection V, System Application Programming. Begin programming with step 1 (Set To Default)and completely program all parameters listed in the Program and Function menus for both track 1and track 2 (if applicable) according to the railroad application instructions.

If the system was previously programmed, ensure that system programming corresponds to therailroad application instructions for track 1 and track 2 (if applicable) by reviewing all Programand Function menu items. Refer to the 3000 GCP Application History Card or railroad installationdrawing for the correct programming entries.

6.2 SET TO DEFAULT, REPROGRAMMING, AND RECALIBRATIONREQUIREMENTS

Set to default, reprogramming, and recalibration must all be performed if any of the conditionslisted at the top of the following page exist.


a. A processor module (80014, 80044, or 80214) is replaced with another containing adifferent software level.

b. Program PROM’s on processor module (80014 or 80044) are replaced with PROM’scontaining a different software level.

c. Program in flash memory on 80214 processor module is changed to a different softwarelevel.

d. Control interface assembly (80020 or 80029) is replaced (includes attached printed circuitboard (80017 or 80153) (see figure 4-4).

If any of the above conditions have occurred, relay drive will be inhibited and the followingmessage will be flashed on the display every 2 seconds.


NOTE

For complete set to default, programming, andreprogramming instructions, refer to section V,Paragraph 5.2, System Programming.

6.3 RECALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS FOR IN-SERVICE 3000 GCP’S

Tables 6-1, 6-2, and 6-3 list recalibration and reprogramming requirements for an in-service 3000GCP resulting from replacement of any of the modules listed, programming changes, or changesto existing track equipment, respectively.

6.3.1 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Module Replacement

Table 6-1 on the following page indicates recalibration, reprogramming, and adjustmentrequirements when any of the modules listed are replaced. For example, when an island module(80011) is replaced, island adjustment is required only for the track associated with the islandmodule and no other setup or adjustment procedures are required. However, any time a processormodule (80014 or 80044) is replaced with another processor module which contains a differentsoftware level, the system must be set to the default parameters before performing both setup forcalibration and setup for approach length and linearization. Current software levels are identifiedby part number labels on 80014 PROM’s Z7 and Z8 (see figure 8-1), on 80044 PROM’s U20 andU21 (see figure 8-2), or indicated on the GCP display following power off/on cycling or reset ofthe GCP when using the 80214 processor.

6.3.2 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Programming Changes

Table 6-2 indicates the recalibration and setup for approach length and linearization requirementsresulting from any of the indicated programming changes. For example, if the number of tracks in


the installation is increased from one to two, setup for calibration, setup for approach length, andlinearization procedures must be performed for track 2 only.

Table 6-1Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Module Replacement

Module/AssemblyReplacement

Requiring Recalibration

Setup ForCalibration Required

Setup ForApproach Length AndLinearization Required

IslandAdjustmentRequired

Set To Default AndReprogramming

Required

80011 Island No No

Yes(For track

associated with80011 only)

No

80012 TransceiverYes

(For track associatedwith 80012 only)

No No No

80013 Relay Drive No No No No80014,80044,80214

Processor No No No No

80014,80044,80214

Processor (With newsoftware level)*

Yes(Both tracks)

Yes**(Both tracks) No Yes

(Both tracks)

80015 Data Recorder No No No No80016 DAX No No No No80020,80029

Control InterfaceAssembly*

Yes(Both tracks)

Yes**(Both tracks) No Yes

(Both tracks)80023,80028,80037

Switch Over Yes(Both tracks) No Yes

(Both tracks) No

*When a new software level is added (new PROM’s) or the control interface assembly is replaced, first set the system tothe default parameters and then perform complete reprogramming and recalibration.

**Can be accomplished by re-entering the EZ and linearization data from the History Card.

Table 6-2 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Programming Changes

Programming ChangesRequiring Recalibration



Increased Number of TracksFrom 1 to 2

Yes(For track 2 only)


GCP Frequency Changed Yes(Both tracks)

Yes(Both tracks)

Application Changed From: Unidirectional to Bidirectional

or Bidirectional to Unidirectional

Yes(Only for the track that

was changed)


was changed)

Transmit Level Changed From: Medium to Maximum or Maximum to Medium


was changed)No

Approach Length ChangedYes

(Only for the track thatwas changed)


was changed)

Ballast Compensation ValueChanged


was changed)No


6.3.3 Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Track Equipment Changes

Table 6-3 indicates the recalibration, setup for approach length and linearization procedures, aswell as island adjustments required when any of the changes listed are made to existing trackequipment. For example, any time existing termination shunts in an installation are replaced ormoved to a different location, the approach length entered in the Program menu must be changedto reflect the new approach length and both the setup for calibration and the setup for approachlength and linearization procedures must be performed.

Table 6-3Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Track Equipment Changes

Track Equipment ChangesRequiring Recalibration

Setup For Calibration Required


IslandAdjustmentRequired

Termination Shunts Changed or Movedto New Location* Yes Yes No

Termination Shunts of OtherFrequencies Added, Removed From, orMoved Within 3000 GCP Approach(es)

Yes Yes No

Wideband Insulated Joint Couplers(8A076 or 8A077) Replaced in 3000GCP Approach(es)

Yes No No

Tuned Insulated Joint Couplers (62785-f) Replaced in 3000 GCP Approach(es) Yes Yes No

3000 GCP Track Wire(s) Replaced Yes No Yes*Approach length in the Program menu must be changed to reflect the new approach length.

6.4 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

NOTE

Before proceeding with calibration, ensure thattrack bonding is good and that all terminationshunts, all insulated joint couplers (see section III,paragraph 3.13 for tunable insulated joint couplertuning), and all track isolation devices (batterychokes, code isolation units, etc.) are installed.

Perform the following steps to calibrate the 3000 GCP.

NOTE

If the 3000 GCP is calibrated under poor ballastconditions, it may require recalibrated when theballast conditions improve.

• AUTOMATIC SWITCH OVER SYSTEMS ONLY (MAIN UNIT)

Step 1 If the GCP is a Model 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2, or 3000ND2 (dual systemwith switch over), or if two Model 3000 GCP’s are operated in conjunction with


an automatic transfer timer unit (80024), set the STBY/AUTO/MAIN transferswitch located on the associated transfer timer module to the MAIN position (seeapplicable diagram in figure 6-1 for switch location).

Figure 6-1Transfer Switch Location on 80023/80028/80037 Modules

• SETUP FOR CALIBRATION - TRACK 1 AND TRACK 2

Step 2 Press the TRACK 1 key.

Step 2a Press and hold the SETUP key. The following message is displayed when setuphas been selected:

SETUP T1 FORCALIBRATION

Release the SETUP key.

Step 2b Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed while setup is inprogress.

SETUP T1IN PROGRESS 2

NOTE

If cab signal (60 or 100 Hz) is used, it must beturned off during this calibration step.

Setup requires approximately 70 seconds to complete. The number at the right endof the lower display line increases to 7 as setup progresses. Once automatic setuphas begin, pressing any key on the keyboard aborts the setup procedure. When


setup is complete, the message shown below is displayed for approximately 2seconds.

SETUP T1COMPLETE

A status display similar to that shown below then appears. The EZ and EX valuesdisplayed are calibrated values. The EZ value should be between 98 and 102 whileEX should be between 50 and 100. If the EX value is 40 or lower (possibly even anegative value), phasing of the GCP track wires may be incorrect. Verify the trackwiring and repeat steps 2 through 2b before continuing.


• SETUP FOR CALIBRATION - TRACK 2 (MODELS 3000, 3000D2, & 3000D2L ONLY)

Step 3 If the GCP is programmed for two tracks, press the TRACK 2 key and repeatsteps 2a and 2b (T1 on the displays is replaced by T2).

• SETUP FOR APPROACH LENGTH AND LINEARIZATION (COMBINEDCALIBRATION PROCEDURE)

The setup for approach length and setup for linearization procedures are combined into a singleprocedure to simplify track shunting requirements. The setup for approach length andlinearization calibration procedure must be performed at each installation to ensurewarning time accuracy.

The combined procedure calculates a modified approach length based on actual approach length(distance to the termination shunt from the crossing track wires) plus the electrical characteristicsof the termination shunt and any simulated track placed in series with the shunt. The procedure isessential to achieving warning time accuracy, especially for DAX’s and prime prediction offsets.

The linearization procedure compensates for lumped loads in the 3000 GCP approach that canaffect the linearity of EZ over the length of the approach and thus is also essential to achievingwarning time accuracy.

The types of loads that can affect linearity include:

a. Narrow-band shunts of other frequencies in the 3000 GCP approaches. This may occurwhen MS/GCP approaches overlap in unidirectional or bidirectional installations.

b. Other track equipment in the 3000 GCP approaches such as audio frequency overlays,coded track, etc.

c. Missing or incorrect type battery chokes


Step 4 If the GCP is equipped with either an 80044 or 80214 processor, verify thatthe Enhanced Detection mode in the Function menu is programmed “OFF”before attempting the approach length and setup for linearizationprocedures.

Step 4a Press the TRACK 1 (or TRACK 2) key.

NOTE

Where applicable, record the requested informationat each step and on the Application History Card.

Step 4b Place a hardwire shunt across the termination shunt. (For bidirectional installa-tions, use the termination shunt farthest from the crossing.) Record the EZ value.

EZ value for track 1: _______ (hardwire)EZ value for track 2: _______ (hardwire)

NOTE

Depending upon the frequency and approachlength, EZ values down to the high 60’s may occur.Simulated track inductors in series with thetermination shunt will also affect EZ values.

Step 4c Press and hold the SETUP key for approximately 3 seconds, then press the downarrow key (ò) until the following message is displayed:

SETUP T1 FORAPPROACH LENGTH

Press the ENTER key twice. The display alternates between the following twomessages:



Record the actual length of the approach and the computed length (in feet). Thecomputed value shown (3140) is an example only; computed values will vary.

Track 1 approach length: _______ ft. Computed approach length: _______ ft.Track 2 approach length: _______ ft. Computed approach length: _______ ft.


NOTE

The programmed approach distance recordedabove is the distance from the termination shuntwhich is located farthest from the crossing to thenearest 3000 GCP track wires. It is essential thatthis distance is measured and recorded accurately(within 1%).

Remove the hardwire shunt from the track and press the STATUS key.

Step 4d Divide the EZ value recorded in step 4b for track 1 (or track 2) by 2. The result isthe calculated 50% value. Record the calculated value.

Calculated EZ value for track 1: _______ (1/2 EZ value recorded for track 1)Calculated EZ value for track 2: _______ (1/2 EZ value recorded for track 2)

Step 4e Accurately locate the midpoint (50%) in the approach (±1%) and place a hardwireshunt at that point. Record the EZ value.

Track 1 EZ value at 50% point _______Track 2 EZ value at 50% point _______


Compare the measured EZ value of step 4e with the corresponding calculated EZvalue obtained in step 4d. If the two values are within ±1 of each other, no furtheraction is required for this installation. Remove the hardwire shunt and proceed tostep 4f. If the two EZ values are not within ±1 of each other, perform thefollowing steps:

(1) With the hardwire shunt located at the midpoint (50%) of the approach, pressand hold the SETUP key for approximately 3 seconds, then press the downarrow key (ò) until the following message is displayed.

SETUP T1 FORLINEARIZATION

(2) Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:

LINEARIZATION T1VALUE: + 0 EZ: XX

(3) Press the NEW DATA key, then press the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys toincrease or decrease the linearization value until the EZ value displayed equalsthe EZ value recorded in step 4d.

NOTE

Pressing the up arrow key (ñ) increases the valueof EZ while pressing the down arrow key (ò)decreases the value.

(4) Record the number of linearization steps and the polarity:

Track 1 step value and polarity: ______________________Track 2 step value and polarity: ______________________

NOTE

If the number of linearization steps exceeds 25, anabnormal lumped load may exist and the conditionshould be investigated. This may be the result of anincorrect frequency termination shunt or shuntlocation in the 3000 GCP approach. It may also bethe result of high resistance bonds, improperlyinstalled battery chokes, or defective joint couplers.

(5) Press the ENTER key to enter the linearization steps and return to the Statusdisplay.


Step 4f If the 3000 GCP is a unidirectional or simulated bidirectional installation, skipsteps 4g through 4j and proceed to step 4k (if applicable) or to step 5. If the 3000GCP is a bidirectional installation, place a hardwire shunt across the terminationshunt of the other approach and record the EZ value.

Track 1 EZ value: _______ (hardwire shunt)Track 2 EZ value: _______ (hardwire shunt)

Step 4g Divide the EZ value recorded in step 4f by 2 and record the results. This is thecalculated 50% value.

Calculated EZ value for track 1: _______ (1/2 EZ value recorded for track 1)Calculated EZ value for track 2: _______ (1/2 EZ value recorded for track 2)

Step 4h Accurately measure the approach distance from the 3000 GCP track wires at thecrossing to the termination shunt. Locate the midpoint (50%) in the approach (±1%) and place a hardwire shunt at that location. Record the EZ value.

Track 1 EZ value at 50% point _______Track 2 EZ value at 50% point _______

If the EZ value recorded above is the same or lower than the calculated EZ valuerecorded in step 4g, proceed to step 4j (if applicable) or to step 5. If the EZ valuerecorded above is higher (by more than 1) than the value recorded in step 4g,perform steps (1) through (5) on the following page.

(1) With the hardwire shunt located at the midpoint (50%) in the approach, pressand hold the SETUP key for approximately 3 seconds, then press the downarrow key (ò) until the following message is displayed:

SETUP T1 FORLINEARIZATION

(2) Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed:

LINEARIZATION T1VALUE: + 0 EZ: XX

(3) Press the NEW DATA key, then press the down arrow key (ò) to decreasethe linearization value until the EZ value displayed equals the EZ valuerecorded in step 4g.

(4) Record the number of linearization steps and the polarity:

Track 1 step value and polarity: _____________________Track 2 step value and polarity: _____________________


NOTE

If the number of linearization steps exceeds 25, anabnormal lumped load may exist and the conditionshould be investigated. This may be the result of anincorrect frequency termination shunt or shuntlocation in the 3000 GCP approach. It may also bethe result of high resistance bonds, improperlyinstalled battery chokes, or defective joint couplers.

(5) Press the ENTER key to enter the linearization steps and return to the Statusdisplay.

Step 4j Remove the hardwire shunt from the tracks.

Step 4k For two-track systems, press the TRACK 2 key and repeat steps 4b through 4j fortrack 2.

Step 4l If the Enhanced Detection mode in the Function menu was originallyprogrammed “ON” and then programmed to “OFF” in Step 4 to perform theapproach length and setup for linearization procedures, then program theEnhanced Detection mode back to “ON” at this time.

• ISLAND ADJUSTMENT - TRACK 1 AND TRACK 2 (0.12 OHM SHUNTINGSENSITIVITY)

If the 3000 GCP includes one or two island modules (80011), perform the following island circuitadjustment procedure for track 1 first (leftmost 80011 module in the case) then for track 2, ifapplicable.

NOTE

If the new microprocessor-based IntelligentProcessor Island (IPI) module (80211) is used inplace of the 80011, refer to the Intelligent ProcessorIsland (IPI) Instruction & Installation Manual (SIG-00-97-04) for the island calibration procedure.

Step 5 Determine the island frequency of the track circuit to be adjusted.

Step 5a Temporarily install a hardwire shunt at the distance beyond the island receiver railconnections specified for the corresponding island frequency in the chart at the topof the following page.


Island Frequency (kHz) Shunt Distance (Feet) Island Frequency (kHz) Shunt Distance (Feet)4.04.95.97.18.3

10.0

10.59.07.56.56.05.0

11.513.215.217.520.2

4.54.03.53.03.0

Step 5b Adjust the island module (80011) gain potentiometer (ADJ) CW until the islandmodule STATUS LED indicator lights, then slowly adjust the potentiometer CCWuntil the indicator just extinguishes.

NOTE

At some installations, the STATUS LED indicatormay not light even when the island gainpotentiometer is adjusted to the fully CCW position.However, this condition is satisfactory provided theindicator lights when the hardwire shunt (step 5a) isremoved from the rails.

Step 6 Remove the hardwire shunt (step 5a) from the rails.

NOTE

At installations where poor island shunting isencountered, an adjustment procedure using 0.25ohm shunting sensitivity can be used. When usingthe 0.25 ohm procedure, the shunt distancesindicated in the chart in step 5a must be doubledfor each island frequency. For example, the shuntinstallation distance beyond the island receiver railconnections for a 4.0 kHz island circuit would be 21feet. It should be noted that a reduction inmaximum island operating distance could resultfrom low ballast.

• AUTOMATIC SWITCH OVER SYSTEMS (STANDBY UNIT) (MODELS 3000D2,3000D2L, 3008D2, AND 3000ND2)

Step 7 If the GCP is a Model 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2, or 3000ND2 (dual systemwith switch over), or if two Model 3000 GCP’s are operated in conjunction withan automatic transfer timer unit (80024), set the STBY/AUTO/MAIN transferswitch on the associated transfer timer module (80028, 80037, or 80023) to theSTBY (standby) position (see figure 6-1 for switch locations) and repeat steps 2through 6 for the standby unit.


NOTE

If necessary, move the keyboard/display assembly tothe standby module set (lower bay in 3000D2 and3008D2 units, and center of case in 3000D2L).

• DAX SETTING ON TRANSFER TIMER MODULE (80028/80037) (3000D2, 3000D2L,3008D2, AND 3000ND2 UNITS ONLY)

Step 8 Set the 3000 GCP case POWER switch to the OFF position and remove thetransfer timer module (80028/80037) from the case.

Step 8a (3000D2, 3000D2L, and 3000ND2 units): On the 80028 transfer timer module,set DIP switch S1 in accordance with the DAX’s programmed for the system (seefigure 6-2 for S1 location). For example, when DAX’s A and B are used, slide thecontrols for switch S1 sections A and B (labeled on board) to the DAX usedposition (left side of switch as viewed in figure 6-2). All remaining S1 controlsmust be set to the DAX NOT USED position (labeled to right of switch).

NOTE

For Model 3000ND2 GCP’s, all S1 sections mustbe set to the DAX NOT USED position.

(3008D2 units only): On the 80037 transfer timer module, set DIP switches SW1(DAX’s E, F, G, H) and SW2 (DAX’s A, B, C, D) in accordance with the DAX’sprogrammed for the system (see figure 6-2 for SW1 and SW2 locations). Forexample, when DAX’s A and B are used, slide the controls for switch SW2sections A and B (labeled on board) to the DAX used position (left side ofswitches as viewed in figure 6-2). All remaining SW2 controls and all SW1controls must be set to the DAX NOT USED position (labeled to right ofswitches).

Figure 6-2Location of DAX Selection DIP Switches S1 (80028) And SW1/SW2 (80037)


Step 8b Return the transfer timer module to its original position in the GCP case and setthe GCP case POWER switch to the ON position.

• AUTOMATIC SWITCH OVER TEST - MODELS 3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2, AND3000ND2 GCP’S AND MODELS 3000 AND 3000ND WHICH OPERATE INCONJUNCTION WITH EXTERNAL AUTOMATIC TRANSFER TIMER UNIT, 80024

Step 9 On the automatic transfer timer module (80028, 80037, or 80023), set theSTBY/AUTO/MAIN transfer switch (see figure 6-3 for location) to the AUTO(center) position.

Step 9a For units using the automatic transfer timer module (80028 or 80037), momentar-ily press the RESET switch to the up position until the XFER LED on the80028/80037 module is lighted (see figure 6-3 for switch and LED location).

If using the automatic transfer timer unit (80024), momentarily press the RESETpush button until the NO XFER WHEN LIT LED indicator on the 80024 unit islighted (see figure 6-3 for push button and LED location).

Figure 6-3Reset Switch And Transfer Indicator Locations

Step 9b On the automatic transfer timer module, press and hold the TEST switch (seefigure 6-3 for location) in the TEST position. Transfer to the standby module setshould occur within 4 seconds, verifying that the timer is operational.

NOTE

During normal operation, transfer occurs within 3minutes (factory default setting), or the timeinterval selected by DIP switch S1 (80023), S4(80028), or SW3 (80037) if a failure is detected inone module set (see figure 6-4 for switch locations).


Figure 6-4Location of DIP Switches S1, SW3, And S4

Step 9c On the automatic transfer timer module (80028/80037), set the RESET switch tothe RESET (up) position or, where applicable, on the automatic transfer timer unit(80024), momentarily press the RESET push button (see figure 6-3 for switch andpush button locations). Verify that the main GCP module set is operating and theXFER LED indicator on the 80028/80037 module or the NO XFER WHEN LITLED indicator on the 80024 unit (whichever is applicable) is lighted. The unit isnow ready to perform the transfer function in the event a module failure isdetected.

NOTE

If necessary, return the keyboard/display assemblyto its original position in the main module set.

6.5 OPERATIONAL CHECKS

Following system calibration and prior to placing the system in service, perform the operationalchecks and memory clear functions (optional) described in the following procedure.

• UAX CHECKOUT

Step 1 When the 3000 GCP is programmed for UAX (value other than 0 entered in theProgram menu for UAX pickup delay time), momentarily remove the wireconnected to TB2-7 (+UAX) (TB3-7 on 8-DAX units) and verify that the crossingprotection immediately activates.

WARNING

WHEN THE UAX FEATURE IS OFF (NOTIME ENTERED), THE UAX TERMINALSON THE GCP FRONT PANEL HAVE NOCONTROL OVER MS/GCP RELAY DRIVE.


Step 1a Return the wire removed in step 1 to the +UAX terminal and verify that thecrossing protection continues to operate for the length of time programmed for theUAX pickup delay.

Step 1b Check the line circuit that controls the UAX terminals by deenergizing the linecircuit at the far end and verifying that the UAX deenergizes when the line circuitis deenergized.

Step 1c When the 3000 GCP is programmed for UAX2 (value other than 0 entered in theProgram menu for UAX2 pickup delay), momentarily remove the wire connectedto TB1-5 (ENA) and verify that the crossing protection immediately activates.

Step 1d Return the wire removed in step 1c to the ENA terminal and verify that thecrossing protection continues to operate for the length of time programmed for theUAX2 pickup delay.

Step 1e Check the line circuit that controls the ENA terminal by deenergizing the linecircuit at the far end and verifying that the UAX2 deenergizes when the line circuitis deenergized.

• OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE CHECKS

System operational performance must be verified by observing system operation and the change inEZ during inbound train moves on each approach. Proceed with the operational checks below:

Step 2 Press the STATUS key. The following display appears (actual EZ and EX valuesmay vary):


Step 2a Select track 1 or track 2 display as applicable.

Step 2b The EZ value for a good shunting track must begin to decrease from the no-trainvalue (ideally 100) as an incoming train passes the termination shunt and shoulddecrease smoothly to zero (0) as the train arrives at the crossing. For bidirectionalinstallations, the value should increase as the train leaves the crossing and continueincreasing smoothly until the last car passes the termination shunt.

WARNING

IF A RAPID CHANGE OCCURS IN THE VALUEOF EZ AT ANY TIME WHILE THE TRAIN ISMOVING WITHIN THE TERMINATION SHUNTS,TRACK DISCONTINUITY CAUSED BY A HIGHRESISTANCE BOND OR A DEFECTIVECOUPLER IS INDICATED. LOCATE ANDCORRECT THE PROBLEM IMMEDIATELY.


NOTE

In some bidirectional applications, approaches areof different lengths and a simulated track is placedin one approach circuit to make the approachesappear electrically equal. In this application, thereis a normal and acceptable decrease in EZ as atrain just enters the GCP approach when passing aset of insulated joints.

Step 2c In applications where poor shunting is expected, be sure that the EnhancedDetection mode (enhanced detection software available with 80044 and 80214processor modules), has been programmed “ON” (Function menu) and thatadequate warning times are verified.

WARNING

ENSURE THAT INBOUND TRAIN SHUNT-ING IS ADEQUATE FOR 3000 GCPENHANCED DETECTION OPERATION BYVERIFYING THAT EZ IS CONSISTANTLYVARYING (CHANGING) ON INBOUNDTRAINS THROUGHOUT THE GCP AP-PROACH CIRCUIT. ALSO VERIFY THATEZ IS CONSISTANTLY LESS THAN 25WHEN THE HEAD END OF EACH TRAINARRIVES AT A POINT APPROXIMATELY 50FEET PRIOR TO THE GCP TRACK WIRESAT THE CROSSING. IF THERE IS ANYQUESTION REGARDING THE SHUNTINGCHARACTERISTICS AT AN INSTALLA-TION, CONTACT SAFETRAN ENGI-NEERING AT CUCAMONGA, CALIFORNIA.

If the 6-volt DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, (see Section III) is used toimprove wheel-to-rail shunting, verify that there is a minimum of 5.0 volts DC onthe track with no train present. Remove AC power from the panel and verify that aminimum of 4.5 volts DC is still present on the track. Restore AC power to thepanel.

Step 2d Verify proper warning times on speed limit train moves, including all DAXand preempt circuits. This completes vital calibration of the 3000 GCP.


• CLEARING RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FROM MEMORY

During programming, calibration, or normal system operation, any diagnostic messages generatedby the system are stored in memory. The messages are identified by four-digit codes that arecross-referenced in table 7-2 in this manual. To view the recorded messages, first press theERROR (diagnostic) key and then use the arrow keys to scroll through the messages.

Following system installation or maintenance, it is frequently desirable to clear the portion ofmemory where these messages are stored prior to leaving the crossing site. This ensures a freshstart with no old data contained in memory. Clearing this portion of memory also resets the HZ(highest EZ value recorded) and LX (lowest EX value recorded) values in memory to the presentvalues of EZ and EX. To clear the recorded messages from memory and reset the HZ and LXvalues, proceed as follows:

Step 3 Press the SYSTEM RESET key. The following message is displayed:

SYSTEM RESET

Step 3a Press and hold the SYSTEM RESET key for approximately 3 seconds. Thefollowing message is displayed:


Release the SYSTEM RESET key.

Step 3b Press the ENTER key. When memory is clear, the following message is displayed:

ERROR < 0>

• CLEARING TRAIN MOVE HISTORY FROM MEMORY

During normal operation, the system records certain parameters relating to train moves within thetrack section monitored by the 3000 GCP (warning time, detected speed, average speed, andisland speed). The recorded train move data is stored in memory and can be viewed by pressingthe HISTORY key on the keyboard.

To clear all recorded train move data from memory, proceed as follows:


SYSTEM RESET


Step 4a Press and hold the SYSTEM RESET key for approximately 3 seconds. Thefollowing message is displayed.



Step 4b Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following message is displayed:

PRESS ENTER TOCLEAR HISTORY

Step 4c Press the ENTER key. The following message is displayed, indicating all events inmemory have been cleared:

HISTORY < 0>

6.6 DATA RECORDER MODULE SETUP

For systems equipped with the optional data recorder module (80015), use the followingprocedure to set the date and time.

NOTE

Ensure that the data recorder option was installedin step 18 of the programming procedure (sectionV) before continuing with this procedure.

Step 1 Verify that the STATUS and LO BATT LED’s on the data recorder module arelighted steady (see figure 6-5 for LED locations).

NOTE

If the LO BATT LED is flashing, replace the mem-ory retention battery on the data recorder module.See section IX, paragraph 9.9 for procedure.


Figure 6-5Data Recorder Module Component Locations

Steps 2 through 4b correspond to steps 23 through 25b, respectively, in the programmingprocedure (section V). If the parameters affected by these steps were previously programmed,perform steps 2 through 4b to verify correct date and time.

Step 2 Press the PROGRAM key and then use the up arrow key (ñ) to scroll through theProgram menu until the date display similar to that shown below appears.

PROGRAM DATEWED 09 APR 1997


Step 2b Enter the day of the month. The entry must consist of two digits (e.g., 01, 12, 27,etc.). When the second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first letter of themonth entry.

Step 2c Use the arrow keys to display the desired month entry.


Step 2e Enter all four digits of the year entry (e.g., 1997). As the last digit is entered, theday-of-the-week is automatically displayed. Review all entries and change any ifnecessary.



Step 3 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. A time display similar to that shown belowappears. Time is in hours:minutes:seconds (hh:mm:ss) format as shown below.



Step 3b Enter hours. The entry must consist of two digits (e.g., 01, 12, etc.). When thesecond digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the minutes entry.

NOTE

When 24-hour (military) time format is used, ensurethat hours are entered in the correct format (e.g.,01, 12, 18, 21, etc.).

Step 3c Enter minutes. The entry must consist of two digits (e.g., 01, 12, 21. etc.). Whenthe second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the seconds entry.

NOTE

To ensure accurate timing, set the minutes entry 2minutes ahead of the actual time to allow sufficienttime for steps 3d and 3e below. Then, as the enteredtime arrives, perform step 3f.

Step 3d Enter seconds. The entry must consist of two digits (e.g., 01, 12, 21, etc.). Whenthe second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first character of the timeformat (AM, PM, 24-HR).

Step 3e Use the arrow keys to display the desired time format entry. When using 24-hour(military) format, follow the time entry with (24 HR). When using standard 12-hour format, follow the time entry with AM or PM, whichever is appropriate.

Step 3f Press the ENTER key at the exact instant when the actual time coincides with thetime entered on the display. Verify that the seconds portion of the display is nowadvancing.

Step 4 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The following daylight savings display willappear:



Step 4a Press the NEW DATA key. Each time the NEW DATA key is pressed, the entrytoggles between Off and On. When daylight savings time is used, select On and therecording will change the time setting automatically at the beginning (2:00 a.m. onthe first Sunday in April) and end (2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October) of thedaylight savings time period; otherwise, select Off.


Step 5 To clear the data recorder memory, press and hold the CLEAR/OFF/PRINTswitch (see figure 6-5) in the CLEAR position for approximately 5 seconds untilthe LO BATT LED indicator begins to flash. Release the switch. The recordermemory is now clear.

NOTE

Data recorder memory should be cleared at initialinstallation by performing this step immediatelyprior to placing the system in operation.

6.7 DATA RECORDER OPERATIONAL CHECKS

With the data recorder module (80015) installed and the system programmed to enable the option(section V, programming steps 18 and 23 through 25b), perform the following operational checksto verify proper data recorder operation before placing the 3000 GCP in service. For proceduresfor downloading recorded data to a computer file or printing recorded data, refer to paragraph 9.3or 9.4, respectively.

• VERIFY CORRECT TIME AND DATE

Step 1 Press the SYSTEM STATUS key.

Step 1a Use the up arrow key (ñ) to scroll through the Status menu until the time/datedisplay similar to that shown below appears.

STATUS 11:23:46AWED 09 APR 1997

Step 1b Verify that the time and date appearing on the display are correct.

• VERIFY EVENT RECORDING OPERATION

Step 2 Press the EVENT key. A display similar to that shown below appears. Note thevalue in the upper right corner (17 in the following example).

EVENTS < 17>START PRINT: 1


Step 2a Observe one or more train moves.

Step 2b Press the EVENT key. Verify that the number in the upper right corner of thedisplay has advanced (note the new value).

Step 2c If any of the 16 external inputs to the data recorder are used, activate one of theinputs at the interface panel by momentarily removing and then restoring the input.(Removing and restoring an input constitutes two input changes.)

Step 2d Press the EVENT key. Verify that the number in the upper right corner of thedisplay has advanced by 2.

Step 2e Repeat steps 2c and 2d for each of the external inputs being used.

Step 2f To clear the data recorder memory, press and hold the CLEAR/OFF/PRINTswitch on the data recorder module (figure 6-5) in the CLEAR position forapproximately 5 seconds until the LO BATT LED on the module begins to flash.Release the switch. The recorder memory is now clear.


SECTION VII

DIAGNOSTICS(MAINTENANCE)

7.0 GENERAL

The advanced self-diagnostic capabilities of the 3000 GCP software provide the system maintainerwith three simple but effective diagnostic tools which consist of the Status Mode, the Error(diagnostic) Mode, and the History Mode. Maintainer interface with these modes is accomplishedvia the keyboard/display control unit (80019) which attaches to the front of the 3000 GCP case.The Status Mode enables the maintainer to monitor vital system parameters such as track ballastconditions, receiver signal levels, and critical voltage levels. The Error Mode provides a visualindication in the form of diagnostic messages of abnormal internal and external system status(external status includes track conditions that vary greatly from accepted levels while internalstatus can include memory and processor-related problems). The History Mode provides a recordof warning times and train speeds for the 20 most recent train moves (events) on a single-tracksystem (10 per track if two tracks are monitored). Each of these modes is described in some detailin the paragraphs that follow. Also provided are diagnostic message code reference tables.

In addition to the three diagnostic modes, the system provides the maintainer with furtherdiagnostic input through the use of status LED indicators located on each of the modules installedin the 3000 GCP case. The function of each of these indicators is described in paragraph 7.5.

7.1 STATUS MODE

The Status Mode permits the maintainer to monitor track ballast conditions (EX), main receiversignal levels (EZ), transceiver voltage and current levels, and the outputs of the ±5, ±8, and ±15-volt power supplies. This is a monitor mode only.

When power is initially applied to the 3000 GCP, or following a system reset, the unit executes asystem test and initialization routine. When the routine is completed, an initial Status Modedisplay similar to that shown below appears.


The Status Mode is the system default mode and the initial Status Mode display is the defaultdisplay. When the 3000 GCP is operating in any mode (e.g., Status, Program, History, etc.) andno keyboard entries are made within 90 seconds, the display automatically defaults to this display.

If the 3000 GCP is equipped with an 80044 or 80214 processor module, and the enhanced track-shunting detection (ED) operating mode (paragraph 4.16.7) is enabled, *ED* appears in theupper right corner of the system status display when poor shunting conditions are detected (see


example below). The *ED* indication remains on the display for the duration of the train move(until the train leaves the GCP approach).


7.2 VIEWING STATUS MODE MENU ENTRIES

The Status Mode is selected by pressing the SYSTEM STATUS key. When the initial StatusMode display appears, additional system parameters can be viewed by using the arrow keys toscroll through the Status Mode menu. The menu is continuous in that it starts over at thebeginning when the end of the menu is reached. The Status Mode menu is depicted in flowchartformat in figure 4-1.

The system parameters described in the following paragraphs are presented in the order in whichthey appear in the Status Mode menu when scrolling with the down arrow key (ò). The valuesappearing in each of these parameter displays are updated every 1/2 second.

If the system is programmed for two tracks, pressing the TRACK 2 key causes similarinformation for track 2 to be displayed. Pressing the TRACK 1 key returns to the track 1 display.

7.2.1 Current Status of EZ And EX

A typical initial Status Mode display is shown below and indicates the current level of each of theparameters shown for the track indicated.


EZ = Main receiver level where: 100 = Unoccupied track

EX = Indication of track conditions where: 100 = Ideal track 85 = Nominal conditions 50 = Poor ballast

7.2.2 EX at Highest EZ

The display shown below indicates the highest EZ value recorded (HZ) for the track indicated andthe value of EX when HZ was last updated.

STATUS T1 MEMORYHZ: 145 EX: 45


7.2.3 EZ at Lowest EX

The following display indicates the value of EZ when the lowest value of EX (LX) was recordedfor the track indicated.

STATUS T1 MEMORYEZ: 95 LX: 62

7.2.4 Transmit Current

The following display indicates the transmitter current (in amperes) for the indicated track and isupdated every 1/2 second.

STATUS T1 XMITCURRENT: 0.251 A

7.2.5 Transmit Voltage

The following display indicates the transmitter voltage (in volts) for the track indicated and isupdated every 1/2 second.

STATUS T1VOLTAGE: 1.32 V


The following display indicates the output voltage levels of the plus and minus 5-volt powersupplies and is updated every 1/2 second.



The following display indicates the output voltage levels of the plus and minus 8-volt powersupplies for the track indicated and is updated every 1/2 second.

STATUS T1 8 VOLT+8.03 --8.24


The following display indicates the output voltage levels of the plus and minus 15-volt powersupplies and is updated every 1/2 second.



7.2.9 Time/Date Display With Data Recorder Module Installed

If the data recorder option is installed and selected, the following status display is selectable:

STATUS 11:23:46AWED 09 APR 1997

The display shown on the previous page indicates current time and date. Time is shown in 12-hour format as hh:mm:ss followed by A (AM) or P (PM) or by a space in 24-hour format.

7.3 ERROR MODE

The Error (diagnostic) Mode provides a visual indication of abnormal system status (both internaland external). Diagnostic messages indicating external system status are recorded when trackconditions vary greatly from established levels while internal status messages can indicate memoryand processor errors.

Select the Error Mode by pressing the ERROR key. If no diagnostic messages have beenrecorded, the display appears as follows:

ERROR < 0>

If one or more messages have been recorded, the initial Error Mode display indicates the mostrecent diagnostic message recorded. A typical Error Mode display is shown below.

ERROR 9112 < 3>T2 GAIN CHECK

The four-digit number immediately following the word ERROR is a code corresponding to aspecific diagnostic message. The value enclosed by the bracket symbols (< >) indicates thenumber of messages recorded. Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to view the otherrecorded messages. Each time an arrow key is pressed, the number in the brackets increments ordecrements, depending upon which key is pressed, and the four-digit code corresponding to theassociated diagnostic message is displayed. A brief statement describing the diagnosed problemappears in the second row of the display. Table 7-2 at the end of this section lists the four-digitdiagnostic message codes and provides a brief description of each message.

To determine if an “ERROR” situation indicated on the display by a four-digit diagnostic messagecode is current and has not been corrected, perform a system reset as instructed on the followingpage to clear the memory. Any ERROR codes remaining after memory is cleared indicatecurrently active error situations.


NOTE

Clearing this portion of memory also resets the HZ(highest EZ value recorded) and LX (lowest EXvalue recorded) values in memory to the presentvalues of EZ and EX.

To clear the recorded messages from memory and reset the HZ and LX values, proceed asfollows:


SYSTEM RESET

Step 2 Press and hold the SYSTEM RESET key for approximately 3 seconds. Themessage shown below is displayed:



Step 3 Press the ENTER key. When memory is clear, the following message is displayedproviding all error situations have been corrected. However, any currently activeerror situation(s) will be indicated by the appropriate diagnostic message code(s).

ERROR < 0>

7.4 HISTORY MODE

The History Mode provides a record of four important parameters associated with the 20 mostrecent train moves on a single track (10 train moves per track when two tracks are monitored).The parameters include warning time, detected speed (speed of train when the GCP predicted),average speed (average speed of a train throughout the move), and island speed (speed enteringthe island).

Each train move is assigned a number (1 to 10 or 1 to 20, depending upon the number of tracksmonitored). Train move number 1 is the oldest and the highest numbered is the most recent.When the number of train moves exceeds 10 (20), the next train move recorded is assigned thehighest number (10 or 20), all previously recorded train moves drop to the next lowest number,and the oldest recorded train move is removed from the record. Performing a system reset,clearing the history, or removing power from the equipment for an extended period of time clearsthat portion of memory containing the train move records.


To view the train move records, select the History Mode by pressing the HISTORY key. Theinitial history display (see example below) identifies the track for which the train moves wererecorded, the number of train moves recorded (in brackets (< >)), and the warning time (inseconds) for the last train move recorded.


To view the recorded train moves for track 2, press the TRACK 2 key. Press the TRACK 1 keyto return to the track 1 display.

The up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys are used to select the train move number (indicated on thedisplay) for which the parameters will be displayed. Each time one of these keys is pressed, thetrain move number in the brackets increments or decrements, depending upon the key that ispressed. Once the desired train move number is displayed, use the NEXT key to scroll throughthe menu of the four parameters. The menu is continuous. Therefore, pressing the NEXT keywhen the Island Speed display (last parameter) is present causes the menu to advance to theWarning Time display (menu starts over).

The following paragraphs describe the display formats for the four parameters in the order inwhich they appear as the menu is scrolled.

7.4.1 Warning Time

The following History Mode display indicates the warning time (in seconds) for the indicated trainmove (number in brackets) on the associated track.


7.4.2 Detected Speed

The following display indicates the speed of the train at the time of prediction for the indicatedtrain move on the associated track (value shown in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>DET. SPEED: 46

7.4.3 Average Speed

The following display indicates the average speed of the train (from prediction to the island) forthe indicated train move on the track shown (value shown in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>AVG. SPEED: 47


7.4.4 Island Speed

The following display indicates the island speed (speed just prior to entering the island) for theindicated train move on the track shown (value shown in miles-per-hour).

HISTORY T1 <08>ISL. SPEED: 47

7.5 MODULE-MOUNTED STATUS INDICATORS

Each module installed in the 3000 GCP case (except the 80028 and 80037 transfer timers)contains a status LED indicator which is located on the front edge of the module near the top. Aglance at these normally-lighted indicators will quickly lead the maintainer to a malfunctioningmodule. In addition, certain modules are equipped with a second LED indicator (locatedimmediately below the status LED) which indicates the status of a vital system function directlyassociated with the module. These indicators are under direct control of the microprocessor andare identified in table 7-1.

Table 7-1Module-Mounted Status Indicators

ModulePart No.

IndicatorNomenclature

Indication 80011 STATUS Lighted steady = island relay drive present

Extinguished = no island relay drive80012 STA Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on module or associated track or wiresPRD Motion indicator. Normally lighted; extinguished when inbound motion is

detected80013 STA Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on module80014 STA Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on moduleACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational and program is

running; lighted steady or extinguished if processor fails80015 STATUS Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on moduleLO BATT On-board battery status indicator. Lighted steady when on-board lithium

battery voltage is normal; flashes when battery is low80016 STATUS Lighted steady = module operational

Flashing = problem on module80020

(3000, 3008,3000D2,

3008D2, &3000D2L only)

n/a Status LED. Mounted on keyboard interface printed circuit board (80017)and extends through panel above control interface assembly.Lighted steady = assembly operationalFlashing = problem on keyboard interface printed circuit board

80028(3000D2,

3000D2L, &3000ND2 only)

XFER Transfer indicator. Normally lighted; extinguishes when main-to-standbyGCP transfer occurs


Table 7-1 ConcludedModulePart No.

IndicatorNomenclature

Indication 80029

(3000ND2only)

n/a Status LED’s. Mounted on keyboard interface printed circuit board (80153)and extend through panel above control interface assembly. Each LEDindicates status for one of the two identical interface circuits on the printedcircuit board.Lighted steady = assembly operationalFlashing = problem in associated interface circuit on printed circuit boardExtinguished = circuit not in use

80037(3008D2 only)

XFER Transfer indicator. Normally lighted.; extinguishes when main-to-standbyGCP transfer occurs


ACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational and program isrunning; lighted steady or extinguished if processor fails


ACT Activity indicator. Flashes when processor is operational and program isrunning; lighted steady or extinguished if processor fails

SERVICE Flashes when the SERVICE REQUEST push button on the module ispressed and when the network is accessed

7.6 TROUBLESHOOTING

Field troubleshooting can be easily accomplished by following the TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART located at the back of this manual. The chart provides an orderly means of firstdetermining whether the track (track wires, couplers, termination shunts, bonds) or the 3000 GCPunit has a problem or failure. Secondly, if the 3000 GCP is determined to be the source of thefailure, the chart indicates which module to change out. Additional troubleshooting information isprovided in the following paragraphs.

7.6.1 High Signal Detection (Open Track)

An open track generally causes a high signal condition (error code 9015 or 9016, EZ in excess of115). This can be caused by open termination shunts, defective insulated joint couplers, oropen/high resistance bonds. See the following paragraphs for specific troubleshootinginformation.

7.6.1.1 Defective Termination Shunts

There are three types of termination shunts; hardwire, wideband, and narrow-band (NBS). To testthe termination shunt, place a hardwire shunt across the termination and note the change in EZ.

• If termination is hardwire, no EZ change should occur.• If termination is wideband, a change of no more than ±2 should occur.• If termination is NBS, a decrease in EZ of up to 30 can occur depending upon frequency and

approach length. Lower frequencies and shorter approaches produce greater change. If anincrease in EZ is noted, then the NBS is defective.


7.6.1.2 Defective Couplers

There are two types of insulated joint couplers; wideband and Tunable Insulated Joint Couplers(TIJC). The couplers can be field tested for proper operation as follows:

1. Connect a hardwire shunt on the crossing side of the joint coupler and note the EZ value.2. Move the hardwire shunt to the termination side of the joint coupler and note the EZ value.3. Remove the hardwire shunt. Note the difference in EZ values between steps 1 and 2.

• If the coupler is a wideband shunt, a difference in EZ of no more than ±2 should occur orthe wideband shunt is defective.

• If the coupler is a TIJC (located in the outer half of the approach), the EZ differenceshould be no more than ±3 or the TIJC is mistuned or defective.

7.6.1.3 Open Or High Resistance Bond, Broken Rail

When EZ is unstable or in high signal, it can be the result of varying bond resistance orintermittent open track due to bad bonds or broken rail. If bonding is suspected, the approachesshould be walked and the bonds checked for integrity.

7.6.2 Low EX

7.6.2.1 At New Installations

If a low EX condition is occurring at a cutover of a new installation, check for the following:• Bad bonds• Defective insulated joint couplers• Missing battery choke in approaches• Defective gauge rods or switch rods• Open termination shunt• Improper application of other frequency NBS in the approaches. Refer to 3000 GCP

Application Guidelines Manual, Section III

7.6.2.2 At In-service Installations (3000 GCP’s Equipped With 80044 Or 80214 ProcessorModules Only)

If track conditions are extremely wet (possibly salted crossing) at an in-service crossing and a lowEX condition is presently occurring (EX below 39), then perform the Low EX Test procedureprovided below to determine if the low EX threshold can be reduced below 39.

• Low EX Test (80044 and 80214 Processors Modules ONLY)

1. With EX in failure (below 39), connect a hardwire shunt at the termination shunt of thelongest approach and note the EZ value.

2. Move the hardwire shunt in to the 90% point of the approach and note the EZ value.3. The EZ value at the 90% point must be at least 5 less than the EZ value at the termination

shunt to allow safe adjustment of the EX threshold below 39.


• Low EX Adjustment (80044 and 80214 Processors Modules ONLY)

This adjustment must be initially made at low ballast when EZ is less than 39 and the “Low EXTest” provided above has been passed (EZ changes a minimum of 5). IF NOT - DO NOTPRECEED!

1. Press the STATUS key and note the value of EX (must be between 34 and 39 to be valid).2. If EX is between 34 and 39 (inclusive), subtract the EX value from 39 (remainder should be

between 0 and 5). Note this value.3. Press the FUNCTION key and then press the up arrow key (ñ) twice. Verify that LOW EX

ADJUSTMENT is displayed.4. Press the NEW DATA key.5. Enter the value (remainder) noted in step 2.6. Press the ENTER key. Verify that the value entered remains on the display.7. Enter the low EX adjustment value on the 3000 GCP Application History Card for track(s)

affected.

Table 7-2Diagnostic Message Code Reference

ErrorCode

TextDisplayed Description Possible Cause

1100 ROM ROM Checksum Error 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1200 RAM RAM Read/Write Error 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1300 NOVRAM NOVRAM Checksum Error 80020/80029 Keyboard/Display

Interface Module1400 ROM ROM Checksum Error (System Reset) 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1500 RAM RAM Read/Write Error (System

Reset)80014/80044/80214 Processor Module

1600 NOVRAM NOVRAM Checksum Error (SystemReset)

80020/80029 Keyboard/DisplayInterface Module

4000 ENA INPUT ENA Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4001 UAX INPUT UAX Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4002 T1 ISLAND INPUT Island Relay Drive 1 Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4003 T2 ISLAND INPUT Island Relay Drive 2 Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4004 MS/GCP CONTROL MS/GCP Control Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4100 DAX A OUTPUT DAX A Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (left)4101 DAX B OUTPUT DAX B Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (left)4102 GCP OUTPUT Prime GCP Relay Drive Output Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4103 DAX C OUTPUT DAX C Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (right)4104 DAX D OUTPUT DAX D Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (right)4105 AT OUTPUT Approach Track Output Error 80013 Relay Drive Module5001 DATA RECORDER Data Recorder Not Responding 80015 Data Recorder Module5002 DATA RECORDER Incorrect Data Transmission 80015 Data Recorder Module5003 RECORDER ROM Recorder ROM Checksum Error 80015 Data Recorder Module5004 RECORDER RAM Recorder RAM Checksum Error 80015 Data Recorder Module


Table 7-2 ConcludedErrorCode

TextDisplayed Description Possible Cause

8001 -5 VOLT SUPPLY - 5 Volt Power Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8002 +5 VOLT SUPPLY +5 Volt Power Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8003 T1 -8V SUPPLY Track 1 -8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8004 T1 +8V SUPPLY Track 1 +8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8005 T2 -8V SUPPLY Track 2 -8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8006 T2 +8V SUPPLY Track 2 +8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8007 -15 VOLT SUPPLY -15 Volt Power Supply Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8008 +15 VOLT SUPPLY +15 Volt Power Supply Out of

Range80013 Relay Drive Module

8113 T1 XMIT CURRENT Track 1 Transmit Current Low 80012 Transceiver Module (left),transmit track wires

8114 T1 XMIT CURRENT Track 1 Transmit Current High 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8117 T2 XMIT CURRENT Track 2 Transmit Current Low 80012 Transceiver Module (right),

transmit track wires8118 T2 XMIT CURRENT Track 2 Transmit Current High 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8200 FREQUENCY Processor Frequency Out of Range 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module8201 T1 FREQUENCY Track 1 Frequency Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8202 T2 FREQUENCY Track 2 Frequency Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8300 T1 SELF-CHECK Track 1 Self-check Not Successful 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8301 T2 SELF-CHECK Track 2 Self-check Not Successful 80012 Transceiver Module (right)9011 T1 LOW EX Track 1 EX Under Low Limit Low Ballast9012 T1 HIGH EX Track 1 EX Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (left)9013 T2 LOW EX Track 2 EX Under Low Limit Low Ballast9014 T2 HIGH EX Track 2 EX Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (right)9015 T1 HIGH EZ Track 1 EZ Over High Limit Bond, termination, tunable insulated

joint bypass couplers, or connections9016 T2 HIGH EZ Track 2 EZ Over High Limit Bond, termination, tunable insulated

joint bypass couplers, or connections9021 T1 CHECK CHANNEL Track 1 Channel 2 EZ Over High

Limit80012 Transceiver Module (left),

transmit track wires9022 T2 CHECK CHANNEL Track 2 Channel 2 EZ Over High

Limit80012 Transceiver Module (right),

transmit track wires9031 T1 LOW EX *ADJ* Track 1 EX Under Low Adjustment Low Ballast9032 T1 ADJ LOW EX Track 1 EX Under 39 Low Ballast9033 T2 LOW EX *ADJ* Track 2 EX Under Low Adjustment Low Ballast9034 T2 ADJ LOW EX Track 2 EX Under 39 Low Ballast9111 T1 GAIN CHECK Track 1 Channel 2 Out of Range Bond Within Island, Receiver

Connection, track wires9112 T2 GAIN CHECK Track 2 Channel 2 Out of Range Bond Within Island, Receiver

Connection, track wires9115 T1 EX PROCESS Track 1 EX Process Error High Resistance Bond9116 T2 EX PROCESS Track 2 EX Process Error High Resistance Bond

9400* T1 ENHANCED DET Track 1 Switched to *ED* Mode Poor Track Shunting Conditions onTrack 1

9401* T2 ENHANCED DET Track 2 Switched to *ED* Mode Poor Track Shunting Conditions onTrack 2

* Applies only to units equipped with 80044 or 80214 processor modules.


SECTION VIII

SYSTEM ENHANCEMENTS

8.0 GENERAL

System enhancements or new system operating features can be easily added to the microproces-sor-based 3000 GCP system. Incorporating system enhancements generally involves either of twomethods. The first method is limited by the processor module memory capacity and processingspeed, and involves simply installing new PROM’s which contain updated software required forthe additional features. The second method is for more advanced enhancements and requires anew processor module equipped with greater memory capacity and increased processing speed,which is necessary to perform the additional complex functions.

An interim processor module (80044) is currently available that provides faster processing speedand greater memory capacity than the 80014 processor. The 80044 processor is the same proces-sor as presently used in the Model 3008 and 3008D2 eight-DAX GCP’s. However, a new proces-sor module (80214) will become available in the very near future that will provide even greatermemory capacity and faster operating speed than the 80044. Both the 80044 and 80214 processormodules will provide 100 percent compatibility with all existing Model 3000 GCP’s currently inoperation.

8.1 NEW FEATURES OF THE 80044 AND 80214 PROCESSOR MODULES

The 80044 and 80214 processor modules both provide a feature referred to as “enhanced detec-tion” (ED) for operation in areas where poor track shunting conditions are experienced. The on-board software containing the poor shunting logic is designed to detect the nonlinear fluctuationsof the track signal resulting from poor shunting and automatically switch from GCP operation tothe poor shunting mode. All preempts and DAX’s are also switched to the poor shunting mode toensure adequate warning time and prevent over-rings and tail rings at the crossing. For any trainmoves where the 3000 GCP does not detect poor shunting conditions, the system continues tooperate as a conventional constant warning time device. The enhanced detection operating modecan be inhibited via system programming if so desired.

For areas where poor ballast conditions are a problem, a Low EX Adjustment mode is providedwith the 80044 or 80214 processor modules. This mode allows the low EX operating thresholdto be lowered below the preset value (39) when field conditions permit, and thus enable the GCPto operate under ballast conditions that might otherwise prohibit GCP operation.

In addition, the 80044 and 80214 processor modules both contain the software required for eight-DAX operation, including the enhanced track shunting feature. Therefore, both processor con-figurations are fully compatible with existing Model 3008 and 3008D2 eight-DAX GCP’s.


8.1.1 Additional Features Of The New 80214 Processor Module

In addition to the enhanced features discussed above, the new 80214 processor module also pro-vides independent frequency operation on both track 1 (T1) and track 2 (T2) when installed ineither of Safetran’s new dual-frequency 3000 GCP cases. The dual-frequency cases are identifiedin the chart below.

GCP Model Current Single-FrequencyCase Part Number

New Dual-FrequencyCase Part Number

3000 80000 802003000D2 80100 80110

While the 80214 processor is fully compatible with all 3000 GCP’s currently in operation (in-cluding eight-DAX units), the dual-frequency feature will operate in the newer dual-frequencycases, but is not operable when the 80214 processor module is installed in an existing single-frequency case.

8.1.2 Additional Programming Steps Required When Using 80044 And 80214 ProcessorModules

Additional programming steps have been added to the Function Menu and are associated with thepoor shunting enhancement software options. The steps include:

(1) Enhanced Detection - On/Off (see paragraph 4.16.7)

When the enhanced detection feature is On, the system will automatically switch to thepoor shunting logic when poor shunting conditions are detected. When the feature is Off,the system operates similar to units equipped with the 80014 processor module. When thefeature is Off, programming steps (2) and (3) listed below will not be displayed.

WARNING



Intermittent poor shunting can result just about anywhere due to numerous causes but gen-erally occurs due to light track usage, light cars, and/or transit operation. Lack of anyshunting generally occurs in dark territory where no DC or AC track circuits exist and fewtrains run. Track shunting in dark territory can be easily improved using methods similar tothose employed in style-C track circuits (but without the need for so many insulated joints).This involves the use of one insulated joint at the far end of each approach and the applica-tion of a DC voltage to the track at the crossing to improve shunting and thus allow the3000 Enhanced Detection software to function properly.

The Safetran DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, (see Section III) provides a very costeffective solution for improving shunting in dark territory by applying a nominal 6 volts DCto the track at the crossing to break down the film on the rails. This DC voltage is isolatedfrom the battery. Only two insulated joints are required; one at the far end of each ap-proach. The DC Shunting Enhancement Panel can also be easily incorporated in applica-tions involving overlapping approaches from two or more crossings. Narrow-band termi-nation shunts are required in all applications of the 80049 panel.

(2) Back-to-Back - On/Off (see paragraph 4.16.8)

When the enhanced detection feature is On, and there are two unidirectional GCP circuitsoperating back-to-back on both sides of a set of insulated joints, then back-to-back shouldbe programmed for On to accommodate the poor shunting logic requirements.

(3) Station Stop Timer - 10 Seconds to 120 Seconds (see paragraph 4.16.9)

When a passenger station stop is located in an outbound 3000 GCP approach, and the en-hanced detection feature is On, the station stop timer is generally programmed for a longertime interval than the train would normally remain stopped. For example, if a passengertrain normally remains stopped for 60 seconds, program the timer for approximately 90seconds. The time interval is entered on the numeric keypad and the maximum delay is 120seconds. For a two-track installation, this operating parameter must also be set for eachtrack (T1 and T2).

WARNING

WHEN THE STATION STOP TIMER ISPROGRAMMED TO A TIME OTHER THAN10 SECONDS (MINIMUM VALUE), THEREMUST NOT BE ANY TRAIN MOVESAPPROACHING THE CROSSING BETWEENTHE TIME A TRAIN LEAVES THE ISLANDAT THE CROSSING AND THE PRO-GRAMMED TIME OF THE STATION STOPTIMER ELAPSES (TIMER CAN BEPROGRAMMED TO RUN FOR UP TO AMAXIMUM OF 120 SECONDS (2 MINUTES)).


NOTE

The Station Stop Timer should normally be left atthe default setting of 10 seconds. The timer is initi-ated automatically after a train leaves the islandcircuit and operates in conjunction with the en-hanced detection logic. If the train makes a stationstop after passing the crossing, the timer can beprogrammed for up to 120 seconds to prevent tailrings due to poor shunting after the train hasstopped and then departs from the station. Thistimer is active only if Enhanced Detection is pro-grammed “ON”.

(4) Low EX Adjustment – 0 to 5 (see paragraph 4.16.11)

This adjustment allows the low EX operating threshold to be lowered below the presetvalue (39), when field conditions permit, and thus enable the GCP to operate under ballastconditions that might otherwise prohibit GCP operation. (The EX operating threshold waslowered from 45 to 39 in the 80044 and 80214 processors.) The adjustment value is en-tered on the numeric keypad and the maximum adjustment is 5 (lowers the threshold from39 to 34). For a two-track installation, this operating parameter should be set for eachtrack (T1 and T2) as needed.

WARNING

DO NOT ARBITRARILY REDUCE THE EXOPERATING THRESHOLD. IMPROPERADJUSTMENT MAY CAUSE SHORT OR NOWARNING TIME. THE EX OPERATINGTHRESHOLD HAS ALREADY BEENREDUCED TO 39 IN THE 80044 AND 80214PROCESSORS AND SHOULD BE SUFFI-CIENTLY LOW FOR MOST APPLICATIONS.

BEFORE REDUCING THE THRESHOLD,THOROUGHLY TEST THE BALLAST ATTHE LOCATION TO DETERMINEWHETHER OR NOT CONDITIONS PERMITTHE THRESHOLD REDUCTION (REFER TOSECTION VII, PARAGRAPH 7.6.2.2).


8.1.3 Eight-DAX Operation

Both configurations of the processor module (80044 and 80214) will operate in an eight-DAXGCP and each contains the necessary software to support full eight-DAX operation, including thefour additional DAX circuits (DAX’s E, F, G, and H). Programming for the additional DAX’sshould be used only when operating in an eight-DAX case (3008 or 3008D2).

8.1.4 Default Value Changes For 80044 And 80214 Processor Modules

When Set to Default is used with 3000 GCP’s equipped with either an 80044 or an 80214 proces-sor module, a limited number of default values have changed with respect to software versionsused on 80014 processor modules, and four new default values are added. All other default valuesand parameters are identical to those used for 3000 GCP’s equipped with the 80014 processormodules (see table 4-2). The default value differences for each processor module are shown in thechart below.

Processor Default ValuesModule Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits80014 300 7 280044 9600 8 180214 9600 8 1

The changed default values permit rapid downloading of the data recorder module memory con-tents to a PC, rather than to a printer.

Default values for the four additional programming steps are as follows:

Programming Step Default ValueEnhanced Detection Operating Mode OffBack-to-Back OffStation Stop Timer 10 SecondsLow EX Adjustment 0

8.2 APPLICATION INFORMATION FOR ENHANCED DETECTION OPERATION

When poor shunting conditions are anticipated at a remote unidirectional DAX or prime predic-tion offset application, an 80011 island module is required to ensure correct reverse train movelogic. When there is a remote 3000 GCP installed back-to-back and there is DAXing from bothsides of a set of insulated joints, only one island circuit is required. However, the 3000 GCPshould be programmed for back-to-back operation. Track wire spacing for the remote island mustbe a minimum of 80 feet (transmit to receive wires). When de-energized, the remote island doesnot affect a DAX or prime prediction offset relay drive output.

When poor shunting conditions are detected and the 3000 GCP switches to the poor shuntingmode logic, an enhanced detection message (*ED*) will be observed on the normal status modedisplay (see example at top of next page) for the applicable track as long as the system remains in


the poor shunting mode. In addition, when poor shunting conditions are detected, a diagnosticmessage code is sent to the data recorder and the diagnostic (error) menu. The codes are 9400 fortrack 1 and 9401 for track 2.


When poor shunting conditions are anticipated at an installation, it is recommended that the ter-mination shunts be located 5 seconds beyond what would be the normal approach distance toprovide an additional 5 seconds warning time.

8.3 PROCESSOR MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

Each processor module is equipped with a specific level or version of software. When power isinitially applied to the system, the software version number is displayed on the keyboard/displayassembly 16-character display. Additionally, the software version number is also provided on alabel affixed to the PROM’s on the 80014 and 80044 processor modules, or to the flash memorydevice or board surface on the 80214 module.

The basic software version number for each processor module is shown in the chart below.

ProcessorModule

Basic SoftwareVersion Number

80014 8V980-XXXX80044 9V065-XXXX80214 9V121-XXXX

Whenever software is updated, either by changing the PROM’s (80014 or 80044) or by down-loading new software to the flash device (80214), verify that the version number of the new soft-ware is reflected on the label and also appears on the initial power-up display.

8.4 PROM REPLACEMENT (FIRMWARE UPGRADE) (80014 And 80044 ProcessorsOnly)

The following paragraphs contain the procedures to be followed when replacing the PROM de-vices which contain the system operating program and are located on the processor module.These procedures apply to the 80014 and 80044 processor modules only.

8.4.1 GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING MODULES AND PROM’S

Before proceeding with any software upgrade, the Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautionspreceding section I and the following guidelines concerning proper handling of static-sensitiveelectronic devices should be reviewed to ensure that the PROM internal circuits are not acciden-tally damaged by high static voltages or electrostatic fields.

(1) Except when necessary, avoid touching the PROM leads.


(2) Use of integrated circuit extractor/inserter tools designed to remove and install electro-static-sensitive PROM’s (OK Industries, Inc., Model EX-2 Extractor and Model MOS-40Inserter (or equivalent) is highly recommended).

(3) When replacing the PROM’s, always lay the module on the electrostatic bag provided, notdirectly on the work surface. The bag will protect the pins extending from the solder side ofthe module from the work surface and prevent possible damage to the PROM’s or module.

(4) Following removal from a module, old PROM’s should be inserted into the conductivefoam material supplied with the upgrade PROM’s and returned to Safetran at the addressshown below for subsequent reprogramming.

Safetran Systems CorporationElectronic Division10655 7th Street

Rancho Cucamonga, CA 91730

CAUTION

ALL UPGRADE PROM’S SHOULD REMAIN INCONDUCTIVE FOAM MATERIAL UNTIL IN-STALLED ON THE MODULE.

8.4.2 PROM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Perform the following steps when replacing PROM’s.

Step 1 IMPORTANT! - Review the Program and Function Mode menus and com-pare the current system operating parameters (warning time, frequency, etc.)with those recorded on the Application History Card. If necessary, updatethe history card for future reference.

Step 2 Set the POWER switch on the 3000 GCP case to the OFF position.

Step 3 Locate the processor module (80014 or 80044) and remove the module from the3000 GCP case.

Step 4 Locate PROM Z7 on the 80014 module (figure 8-1) (or U53 on the 80044 module(figure 8-2)) and note the location of the notched end of the PROM. Using the ex-tractor tool, carefully remove Z7 (U53) from the socket.

Step 5 Refer to table 8-1 and, using the inserter tool, install the applicable upgrade PROMin the Z7 (U53) socket with the notched end of the PROM in the same position asnoted in step 4. This ensures proper pin 1 orientation.


Table 8-180014/80044 Processor Module PROM ID And Software Version Numbers

Processor Module

PROM ID AndSoftware Version Number

PROM ID AndSoftware Version Number

80014 Z78V980-AXXX

Z88V980-BXXX

80044 U539V065-AXXX

U529V065-BXXX

Step 6 Locate PROM Z8 on the 80014 module (figure 8-1) (or U52 on the 80044 module(figure 8-2)) and note the location of the notched end of the PROM. Using the ex-tractor tool, carefully remove Z8 (U52) from the socket.

Step 7 Refer to table 8-1 and, using the inserter tool, install the applicable upgrade PROMin the Z8 (U52) socket with the notched end of the PROM in the same position asnoted in step 6. This ensures proper pin 1 orientation.

CAUTION

FAILURE TO INSTALL THE PROM’S IN THEAPPROPRIATE SOCKETS WITH PROPER PIN 1ORIENTATION WILL RESULT IN INTERNALDAMAGE TO THE PROM’S.

Step 8 Return the processor module to its original position in the 3000 GCP case and en-sure that the module is fully seated in the edge connector.

Step 9 In redundant systems which use backup module sets (3000D2, 3000D2L, 3008D2,and 3000ND2), repeat steps 3 through 8 for the other processor module.

Step 10 Set the 3000 GCP case POWER switch to the ON position.

Step 11 Observe the 3000 GCP display and wait for the initial Status Mode display to ap-pear before proceeding.


Step 12 Press the FUNCTION key.

Step 13 Press the up arrow (ñ) key one time. Verify that the Set To Default display ap-pears as follows:

SET TO DEFAULT


Figure 8-1PROM Locations on 80014 Processor Module


Figure 8-2PROM Locations on 80044 Processor Module


Step 14 Press the NEW DATA key.

Step 15 Press the ENTER key.

Step 16 Press the PROGRAM key.

Step 17 Enter all non-default Program Mode values recorded on the Application HistoryCard (step 1).

Step 18 Press the FUNCTION key.

Step 19 Enter the non-default Function Mode values recorded on the Application HistoryCard (step 1).

Step 20 Refer to section VI and perform the appropriate system calibration procedures foreach track. After completing the applicable procedures, the system is fully opera-tional.

8.5 SOFTWARE UPGRADES ON THE 80214 PROCESSOR MODULE

When the 80214 module becomes available, it will be supplied with the latest version of 3000GCP software preloaded. As future software enhancements become available, they will be sup-plied on floppy disk for downloading to the 80214 module flash memory devices via a customersupplied laptop computer. When the 80214 processor module becomes available, procedures forupdating the flash memory will be published.


SECTION IX

DATA RECORDER

9.0 GENERAL

The optional data recorder module (80015) is a solid-state data recording device that maintainsevent records, including date and time of occurrence, for several types of events, both internal andexternal to the 3000 GCP. These events include train move data (warning time and train speeds)plus input changes that occur on any of the 16 external channels. The external channels aremonitored through a data recorder interface assembly (80025) via the RECORDER connector J1located on the 3000 GCP front panel. Also recorded are GCP error (diagnostic) messages, GCPpower on/off and system reset indications, plus track calibration indications. Refer to Paragraph9.5, PC File/Printout Format, for a description of each type of event.

On-board data memory consists of 64k bytes of RAM with battery backup. Approximate memorycapacity is 3,000 events. When memory becomes full, the oldest data is overwritten by the newestdata and the next oldest event remaining in memory then becomes event number 1. STATUS andLO BATT LED’s located on the front edge of the module (see figure 9-1) are normally lightedsteady, indicating the module is functioning properly and the on-board battery has sufficientcharge to protect the stored data. When the battery voltage is low, the LO BATT LED begins toflash, indicating the battery should be replaced. Multifunction CLEAR/OFF/PRINT toggle switchSW1, also located on the front edge of the module, controls the memory clear (CLEAR positionis momentary) and memory file download/print functions.

NOTE

With the data recorder installed in the 3000 GCPand enabled in the Program menu, data recordingbegins when power is applied to the 3000 GCP.Data can be recorded with CLEAR/OFF/PRINTswitch SW1 set to either the OFF or PRINTposition.

A 25-pin RS232C serial connector located on the front edge of the module provides a temporaryinterface between the module and an external PC/laptop, modem, or serial data printer. For apermanent installation, a modem can be connected to MODEM connector J2 on the data recorderinterface assembly (80025) to supply recorded data to a remote PC/laptop or printer via the 3000GCP front panel RECORDER connector J1. System programming and on-board DIP switchesallow the on-board data recorder I/O circuits to be configured to accommodate a wide variety ofPC/laptops, modems, and printers.


Figure 9-1Data Recorder Module, 80015

9.1 DATA RECORDER PROGRAMMING

With the data recorder module installed in the 3000 GCP, the system must be programmed toenable the recorder and to set the correct date and time. Computer/printer parameters associatedwith downloading the recorder’s memory contents to a file or printing it can be programmed atthe time of installation or any time prior to initiating the memory downloading or printing process.The recorder programming procedure is also included in Section V, System Application Program-ming.

NOTE

Programming steps 2 through 9b that follow corre-spond to steps 18 through 25b in section V.

Step 1 Press the PROGRAM key.

Step 2 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. One of the messages shown below isdisplayed, depending upon the current data recorder status:


PROGRAM RECORDERINSTALLED


If the data recorder option is to be used, program the system for recorder Installed(steps 2a and 2b below) and then perform programming steps 3 through 9b belowas required. If the data recorder option is not to be used, program the system forrecorder Not Installed (steps 2a and 2b below) and then proceed to step 26 insection V for extended application programming.

Step 2a Press the NEW DATA key. The recorder option status toggles between Installedand Not Installed each time the NEW DATA key is pressed.

Step 2b Press the ENTER key when Installed is displayed.

NOTE

Perform steps 3 through 6c below to set the RS232Cparameters to enable the 3000 GCP tocommunicate with an external PC/laptop or printerconnected to the data recorder module (80015) viathe connector on the front edge of the module. Referto Paragraph 9.3, Downloading Recorded Data ToA Computer File, (or other applicable PC softwareinstructions) or to the printer manufacturer’smanual to determine the appropriate values toenter. Steps 3 through 6c may be performed at afuture date prior to memory downloading orprinting.




Step 3b Use the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys to display the PC/laptop, modem, orprinter baud rate (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600). The default for units equippedwith an 80014 processor module is 300. The default for units equipped with an80044 or 80214 processor module is 9600. If the memory contents will be down-loaded to a PC/laptop computer file, set the baud rate to 9600.


Step 4 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The message shown below is displayed:




Step 4b Use the up (ñ) or down (ò) arrow keys to display the number of data bits for thePC/laptop, modem, or printer (7 or 8). The default for units equipped with an80014 processor module is 7. The default for units equipped with an 80044 or80214 processor module is 8. If the memory contents will be downloaded to aPC/laptop computer file, set the data bits to 8.





Step 5b Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the number of stop bits forthe PC/laptop, modem, or printer (1 or 2). The default for units equipped with an80014 processor module is 2. The default for units equipped with an 80044 or80214 processor module is 1. If the memory contents will be downloaded to aPC/laptop computer file, set the number of stop bits to 1.





Step 6b Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the type of parity used by thePC/laptop, modem, or printer (none, odd, even, mark, or space). The default isNone.


Step 7 Press the down arrow key (ò) until the date display message similar to that shownbelow appears.

PROGRAM DATEWED 09 APR 1997



Step 7b Enter the day of the month. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 12, 27, etc.).When the second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first letter of the monthentry.

Step 7c Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the desired month entry.


Step 7e Enter all four digits for the year entry (1997, 1998, etc.). As the last digit isentered, the appropriate day-of-the-week is automatically displayed. Review alltime entries and change any if necessary.


Step 8 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. A time display message similar to that shownbelow appears. Time is displayed in hours:minutes:seconds (hh:mm:ss) format.



Step 8b Enter the hours. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 02, etc.). When thesecond digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the minutes entry.

NOTE

If 24-hour (military) time format is used, be sure toenter the hours in the same format (01, 12, 18, 21,etc.).

Step 8c Enter the minutes. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 12, 21, etc.). Whenthe second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first digit of the seconds entry.

NOTE

To ensure precise time setting, it may be helpful toset the minutes entry approximately two minutesahead of the actual time to allow sufficient time tocomplete steps 8d and 8e. Then, when the enteredtime arrives, step 8f can be performed.

Step 8d Enter the seconds. The entry must consist of two digits (01, 12, 21, etc.). Whenthe second digit is entered, the cursor moves to the first character of the timeformat (AM, PM, 24-hour) entry.


Step 8e Use the up (ñ) and down (ò) arrow keys to display the desired time format entry.When using 24-hour (military) format, follow the time entry with 24 HR. Whenusing standard 12-hour format, follow the time entry with AM or PM, whichever isappropriate.

Step 8f Press the ENTER key at the exact second when real time coincides with the timeentered on the display. Verify that the seconds portion of the display is nowadvancing.

Step 9 Press the down arrow key (ò) once. The daylight savings time message shownbelow is displayed.


Step 9a Press the NEW DATA key. Each time the NEW DATA key is pressed, the entrytoggles between Off and On. If daylight savings time is to be used, select On andthe recorder will change the time setting automatically at the beginning (2:00 a.m.on the first Sunday in April) and end (2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October) ofthe daylight savings time period. If daylight savings time is not to be used, selectOff.


9.2 CLEARING DATA RECORDER MEMORY

Once the data recorder is enabled (Installed status) and configured, it may be desirable to clear therecorder memory before leaving the crossing site. To clear the memory, press and holdCLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 on the data recorder module (figure 9-1) in the CLEARposition for approximately 5 seconds until the LO BATT LED begins to flash. Release the switch.Memory is now clear. This procedure may be performed at any time, but it is required at initialinstallation prior to placing the equipment in service and when the on-board battery isreplaced.

9.3 DOWNLOADING RECORDED DATA TO A COMPUTER FILE

The following procedure enables downloading of data recorder memory contents to a PC/laptopusing the Microsoft® Windows™ Terminal application. A number of other widely used softwareprograms are available that can be used to accomplish the same task. When using another pro-gram, refer to the documentation supplied with the software package for applicable instructions.

Step 1 Connect an appropriate interface cable (see paragraph 9-10) between PC/printerconnector J1 on the front edge of the data recorder module (figure 9-1) and anavailable serial port on the PC/laptop (normally COM1 or COM2).

Step 2 Apply power to the PC/laptop. At the DOS prompt (C:\>), type WIN and thenpress the Enter key on the PC/laptop keyboard to start Windows™.


Step 3 If the Windows™ Accessories group is not already open, select theAccessories group.

Step 4 From the Accessories group, select the Terminal application.

Step 5 From the Terminal application menu bar, select Settings.

Step 6 From the Settings menu, select Communications. The dialog boxshown in figure 9-2 appears.

Figure 9-2Windows™ Terminal Communications Dialog Box

Step 7 From the Communications dialog box, select the connector first (normally COM1or COM2; however, either COM3 or COM4 may also be used if available) andthen select the following parameters:

Baud Rate: 9600Data Bits: 8Stop Bits: 1Parity: NoneFlow Control: Xon/Xoff

NOTE

The above settings must be the same as those set forthe data recorder module in paragraph 9-1, steps3b through 6b.


Step 8 Select the OK button.

Step 9 From the Terminal application menu bar, select the Transfers menu.

Step 10 From the Transfers menu, select Receive Text File. The dialog box shown in figure9-3 appears.

Figure 9-3Receive Text File Dialog Box

Step 11 In the File Name text box, enter the name of the destination file where the datarecorder contents are to be copied. Always include the directory path in the filename (e.g., C:\TEMP\filename.TXT) or set the directory path in the Directorieslist box.

Step 12 Select the OK button.

Step 13 On the 3000 GCP keypad, press the PROGRAM key.

Step 14 Use the up arrow key (ñ) on the 3000 GCP keypad to scroll through the Programmenu to the data recorder RS-232-C parameters and set or verify that the parame-ters are as follows:

Parity: NoneStop Bits: 1Data Bits: 8Baud Rate: 9600

Step 15 On the data recorder module, set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the PRINTposition to start the download process. The recorded data appears on thecomputer display as it is being downloaded.


Step 16 When file downloading has been completed, select the STOP button located in thelower left corner of the display to save the file. The file can now be printed out anytime a hard copy is needed.

Step 17 The data recorder functions can be controlled from the PC/laptop keyboard afterCLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 on the data recorder module has been set to thePRINT position. To control the printout from the keyboard, perform steps 17athrough 17d as required.

Step 17a To interrupt (pause) the downloading process at any time, press and hold the Ctrl(control) key on the PC/laptop keyboard and then press the letter S key.

Step 17b To resume the downloading process following a pause (step 17a), press and holdthe Ctrl (control) key on the PC/laptop keyboard and then press the letter Q key.

Step 17c To abort the downloading process, press and hold the Ctrl (control) key and thenpress the letter C key.

Step 17d To start the downloading process at the beginning (event number 1 or specifiedstart print event) after the downloading process has been aborted, momentarilypress the Enter key on the PC/laptop keyboard.

9.4 PRINTING RECORDED DATA

The data recorder memory contents are printed beginning with the earliest recorded (oldest) datain memory (event number 1) and ending with the last event recorded prior to initiating the printfunction. Memory contents can be printed from beginning to end, or the print can be started at adesignated event number. Printing is controlled from the data recorder module usingCLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1. The print function can also be controlled from the printer if itis equipped with a keyboard. Printer interface requirements and printing procedures are describedin the paragraphs that follow.

9.4.1 Printer Compatibility

To obtain a hard-copy printout of the data recorder memory contents, the data recorder modulemust be connected to a suitable printer via RS232C serial PC/printer connector J1 located on thefront edge of the module. Generally, any 80-column serial printer can be used. The data recordermodule supports Xon/Xoff protocol.

Before printing, ensure that the data recorder module is programmed for compatibility with theprinter being used. Refer to the printer manufacturer’s instruction manual and program the datarecorder module baud rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, and parity accordingly (seeparagraph 9.1, steps 3 through 6c for programming instructions).


9.4.2 Printing Procedure

Perform the following steps to print the memory contents of the data recorder module.

• SELECTING A SPECIFIC EVENT FOR PRINTOUT

Step 1 When a printout is initiated, the first event printed is event number 1 (oldest data).If a large number of events have been recorded, the printout can be quite lengthy.However, it is possible to begin the printout at any point other than event number1 and review events of specific interest while reducing the length of the printout.To select an alternate starting point (event number) for the printout, proceed asdirected in steps 1a through 1d; otherwise, proceed to step 2.

Step 1a Press the EVENT key. A display similar to that shown below appears.

EVENTS < 27>START PRINT: 1

NOTE

The number appearing in brackets indicates thetotal number of events recorded. The 1 in the lowerright corner indicates the event number where theprint will start (event number 1 is the oldest event inmemory and is the default start point).

Step 1b Press the NEW DATA key.

Step 1c Enter the event number where the printout is to begin (the number should notexceed the total number of events recorded). The number entered appears in thelower right corner of the display.

Step 1d Press the ENTER key.

NOTE

After the ENTER key is pressed, do not press anyother key on the 3000 GCP keyboard/displayassembly until printing has started. If the Eventsdisplay is replaced by any other display, the eventnumber where the printout will begin reverts to 1.

• PRINTING

Step 2 On the data recorder module, set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the OFFposition (if not already in this position).


Step 3 Apply power to the printer.

Step 4 Set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the PRINT position. The printer shouldbegin printing the memory contents. Refer to paragraph 9.5 for a description of theprintout format.

NOTE

Printing continues until the last event recorded inmemory prior to beginning the print function isprinted. Events recorded after the print function isstarted are stored in memory but are not printed.The print function must be stopped and startedagain to print newly recorded data.

The print function can be stopped (aborted) at anytime by setting CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 tothe OFF position. Returning the switch to thePRINT position restarts the printout at the begin-ning (event number 1 or designated event numberstart point).

Step 5 When printing is complete, set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the OFFposition.

9.4.3 Print Control Option

When using a printer equipped with a keyboard, the data recorder print function can be controlledfrom the printer after CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 on the data recorder module has been setto the PRINT position. To control the printout from the printer keyboard, perform the followingsteps.

Step 1 To interrupt (pause) the print function at any time, press and hold the Ctrl(control) key on the printer keyboard while pressing the letter S key.

Step 2 To resume the printout following a pause (step 1), press and hold the Ctrl(control) key on the printer keyboard while pressing the letter Q key.

Step 3 To abort the printout, press and hold the Ctrl (control) key while pressing theletter C key.

Step 4 To start the printout at the beginning (event number 1 or specified start point)after the print function has been aborted, momentarily press the Enter key on theprinter keyboard.


9.5 PC FILE/PRINTOUT FORMAT

The hard copy printout provides a permanent record of several types of events, both internal andexternal to the 3000 GCP, which are recorded and stored by the data recorder module. Theseevents include train move data (warning time and train speeds), input changes on the 16 externalchannel inputs, GCP error (diagnostic) messages, and GCP power on/off, system reset, and trackcalibration indications.

The printout format (figure 9-4) consists of an identification header followed by column headingsidentifying the data fields. Below the column headings are lines of data; one or two lines for eachrecorded event.

SAFETRAN SYSTEMS CORPORATION

Software Version 8V993-A01C

10-APR-1997 04:01 PM

Number of Events Recorded = 1568

Start Print Event = 1562

DATE TIME - INPUT CHANNELS - ----- SPEEDS -----MM/DD----------

HH:MM:SS---------------

1-------8 9-------16----------------------------

WT-------

DET-------

AVG-------

ISL-------

STATUS-------------------------------

04/0904/0904/09

04/1004/1004/1004/10

02:21:15A02:22:57A02:34:12A

10:27:15A10:40:22A10:59:18A11:01:49A

1--4--78 -012-4-612-4--78 -012-4-612-4--78 -012-4-6

12-4--78 -012-4-612-4--78 -012-4-612-4--78 -012-4-612-4--78 -012-4-6

35------

------------

37------

------------

39------

------------

36------

------------

T1 Train MoveInput ChangeERROR 9111T1 GAIN CHECKPower OffPower OnT1 CalibrationSystem Reset

Figure 9-4Typical Data Recorder Printout

Safetran Systems Corporation appears in the first line of the header followed by the data recordermodule software version in the second line. The date the printout was generated appears next inthe following format: Day of the month/month/year/time/AM or PM. Below the date line is astatement indicating the total number of events recorded between the time memory was lastcleared and the date and time indicated for the printout. If an event number other than 1 isdesignated as the start point for the printout, a statement identifying that event number appearsbelow the statement indicating the number of events recorded.

Data lines are printed beginning with the earliest (oldest) event recorded in memory (eventnumber 1), or with a designated event number (see paragraph 9.4.2), and ending with the lastevent recorded before the print was initiated. The first two data fields in each data line indicate the


date and time when the event was recorded. The next two data fields indicate the current status ofexternal input channels 1 through 8 and 9 through 16. The next four data fields indicate warningtime and train speeds recorded during a train move. Data appears in these four fields only if thedata line is for a train move. The last data field indicates the type of event the data line represents.

The Date data field appears in each data line and indicates the month and day (MM/DD) the eventwas recorded. The Time data field appears in each data line and indicates the hour, minute, andsecond (HH:MM:SS) the event was recorded. Also indicated after the seconds entry is A for AMor P for PM when the standard time format is used, or a blank when the 24-hour (military) timeformat is used.

The Input Channels data fields appear in each data line regardless of whether an input changeoccurred. For all data lines where no input change occurred, the last recorded input states areindicated. If an input state changed, the data line is labeled as an input change in the last data field(Status) and the new channel input states are shown. A high (energized) state on an input isindicated by the presence of the channel number in the corresponding channel column of the datafield (second digit of the channel number shown for two-digit numbers). A low (de-energized)input state is indicated by a dash in the channel column.

The Speeds data fields contain data only when the data line is for a train move (Status data fieldindicates track (T1 or T2) and train move). The first data field in this group indicates the warningtime (WT) recorded during the train move. The next three data fields indicate the detected speed(DET), average speed (AVG), and island speed (ISL) for that move.

The Status data field indicates the type of event for which the data was recorded. Table 9-1indicates the six types of events recorded, their corresponding entry in the Status data field, and abrief description of the event.

Table 9-1Data Recorder Printout Status Message Descriptions

Event Type Status Data Field Entry Event DescriptionTrain Move T1 Train Move

orT2 Train Move

Train move on track 1

Train move on track 2Input Change Input Change Input change (active to inactive or

inactive to active) occurred on oneor more of the 16 external channelinputs.

Error (Diagnostic)Message Generated

Error (followed by four-digitmessage code and a briefdescription in the second line)

Error (diagnostic) message identifiedby four-digit code has beenrecorded. See table 7-2 for messagedescriptions for each code.

14Document No.: SIG-00-96-05 Version: C

Table 9-1 ConcludedEvent Type Status Data Field Entry Event Description

Power Applied to3000 GCP

Power On Indicates 3000 GCP POWER switchwas set to the ON position, or in a3000D2, power was applied to themodule set containing the datarecorder module.

Power RemovedFrom 3000 GCP

Power Off Indicates 3000 GCP POWER switchwas set to the OFF position, or in a3000D2, power was removed fromthe module set containing the datarecorder module.

CalibrationProcedurePerformed

T1 Calibration orT2 Calibration

Setup For Calibration procedureperformed on track 1

Setup For Calibration procedureperformed on track 2

System Reset System Reset Complete system reset has beenperformed

9.6 REFERENCE INFORMATION FOR SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION

Electronic devices such as PC/laptops, modems, and printers that are equipped with RS232Cserial interface connectors (ports), operate either as data terminal equipment (DTE) or datacommunications equipment (DCE). The difference lies in the serial connector pin assignments (seetable 9-2). To enable the data recorder module (80015) to communicate with any of theseexternal devices over a standard pin-to-pin serial cable (no pins swapped), the operating modes(DTE or DCE) for the two devices must be opposite. Since the majority of these serial devicesgenerally operate in the DCE mode, the data recorder module is shipped from the factory with theRS232C PC/printer serial port (J1) configured in the DCE mode. A pair of double-pole rockerswitches (SW2 and SW3) are provided on the data recorder module (see figure 9-1) to controlthe module operating mode (DCE or DTE) by switching pin assignments of connector J1. Seefigure 9-5 for switch positions.

Figure 9-5Data Recorder Module Serial Port Mode Select Switch Positions


NOTE

Both sections of rocker switches (SW2 and SW3)should always be set to the same positions. Therocker positions are toward connector J1 for DCEmode and away from the connector for DTE modeas illustrated in figure 9-5.

Table 9-2Data Recorder Module RS232C Connector (J1) Pin Assignments

Pin Signal - DTE Mode1 Signal - DCE Mode2

1 Ground Ground2 Transmit Data (TxD) Receive Data (RxD)3 Receive Data (RxD) Transmit Data (TxD)4 Request To Send (RTS) Request To Send (RTS)5 Clear To Send (CTS) Clear To Send (CTS)6 Data Set Ready (DSR) Data Set Ready (DSR)7 Ground Ground8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Data Carrier Detect (DCD)

20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Data Terminal Ready (DTR)1Serial port configured for modem communications2Serial port configured for PC/laptop and printer communications

9.7 DATA RECORDER MODULE (80015) SPECIFICATIONS

Power:Voltage 9.0 – 16.5 VDC

Current 150 mA

Battery Lithium, BCX-72-AA, 3.9V, P/N 3B64(A fresh battery will support 64k bytes of RAM for aminimum of 5 years.)

Data Inputs:(Internal) Via 3000 GCP 8-bit data/access bus

(External) 1 to 16 channels (parallel) via interface assembly (80025)and 3000 GCP front panel RECORDER connector J1

Input Resistance 5k ohms (optoisolator interfaces on 80025 assembly)

Input Voltage 8-36 VDC (optoisolator interfaces on 80025 assembly)

Signal Persistence 0.500 milliseconds (minimum)


Specifications (Concluded)

Memory Capacity: 64k bytes of data; approximate capacity = 3,000 events

Time Base: Crystal controlled; 24 hour, minutes, seconds

Resolution 1 second

Stability Accurate to within 30 seconds per year

Signature Time and date recorded with each event orchange of input state

Date: Day/month/year (in printout header)Month/day (for each data line printed)

Operating Temperature: -40°F to +160°F (-40°C to +71°C)

Dimensions:Data Recorder Module 8.00 inches (20.32 centimeters) wide(80015) 8.875 inches (22.54 centimeters) long

Interface Assembly 1.875 inches (4.76 centimeters) high(80025), 16 Channel 9.375 inches (23.81 centimeters) wide

8.375 inches (21.27 centimeters) deep

Weight: 1 pound (0.45 kilogram) (approximate) (each unit)

9.8 PROM REPLACEMENT (FIRMWARE UPGRADE)

The versatility of microprocessor-controlled equipment permits operational features to beenhanced by simply installing upgraded firmware (system operating program stored in a hardwaredevice). On the data recorder module (80015), the operating program is contained in a PROMdevice (U1 on figure 9-1). Perform the procedure in the following paragraphs to replace thePROM.

9.8.1 Guidelines For Handling Modules And PROM’s

Before proceeding with any software upgrade, review the following guidelines concerning properhandling of static-sensitive electronic devices. Improper handling of the PROM’s could result inaccidental damage to their internal circuits due to high static voltages or electrostatic fields.

1. Except when necessary, avoid touching the PROM leads.

2. Use of integrated circuit extractor/inserter tools designed to remove and install electrostatic-sensitive PROM’s (OK Industries, Inc., Model EX-2 Extractor and Model MOs-40 Inserter, orequivalent) is highly recommended.


3. When replacing a PROM, always lay the module on the electrostatic bag provided, not directlyon the work surface. The bag will isolate the pins extending from the solder side of the modulefrom the work surface and prevent possible damage to the PROM or module.

4. Following removal from a module, old PROM’s should be inserted into the conductive foammaterial supplied with the upgrade PROM’s and returned to Safetran in California forsubsequent reprogramming.

CAUTION

ALL UPGRADE PROM’S SHOULD REMAIN INCONDUCTIVE FOAM MATERIAL UNTILINSTALLED ON THE MODULE.

9.8.2 PROM Replacement Procedure

Step 1 Set the 3000 GCP case POWER switch to the OFF position.

Step 2 Remove the data recorder module (80015) from the 3000 GCP case.

Step 3 Refer to figure 9-1 and locate PROM U1. Note the location of the notched end ofthe PROM and, using an extractor tool, carefully remove U1 from the socket.

Step 4 Install the upgrade PROM in the U1 socket with the notched end of the PROM inthe same position as noted in step 3 above (ensures proper pin 1 orientation).

Step 5 Install the data recorder module in the proper card slot in the 3000 GCP case.Ensure that the module is fully seated in the edge connector.


Step 7 Press and hold data recorder module CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 in theCLEAR position for approximately 5 seconds until the LO BATT LED on themodule begins to flash. Release the switch.

Step 8 Connect a PC/laptop or printer to the data recorder module RS232C PC/printerserial connector (J1).

NOTE

If a PC/laptop/printer was not previously used withthe data recorder module, or if a different device isto be used, verify that the device is compatible withthe data recorder module and that the system isprogrammed as described in paragraph 9.1.

Step 9 Apply power to the PC/laptop or printer.


Step 10 Set data recorder module CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the OFF position.

Step 11 Set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 to the PRINT position. The PC/laptop orprinter should begin displaying or producing the file/printout header and data linesfor any data recorded since the data recorder memory was last cleared. Verify thatthe file/printout format is the same as that shown in figure 9-4.

Step 12 When file downloading or printing is complete, set CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switchSW1 to the OFF position.

9.9 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

The on-board lithium battery is provided to retain the data recorder memory contents in the eventthe battery supply to the 3000 GCP is interrupted. If the LO BATT LED on the front edge of themodule (see figure 9-1) begins to flash, the battery voltage is low and the battery must bereplaced. Perform the following steps to replace the battery.

NOTE

If the battery fails or is removed from the datarecorder module, and power is then removed fromthe 3000 GCP case or the data recorder module isremoved from its slot in the 3000 GCP case, alldata in memory will be lost.

Step 1 Set the 3000 GCP case POWER switch to the OFF position.

Step 2 Remove the data recorder module (80015) from the 3000 GCP case.

Step 3 Locate the battery (see figure 9-1). Note the location of the battery positiveterminal and carefully remove the battery from the holder.

Step 4 Install the fresh battery with the positive terminal toward the front edge of themodule as noted in step 3 above.

Step 5 Return the data recorder module to its original position in the 3000 GCP case(step 2). Ensure that the module is fully seated in the edge connector.


Step 7 On the data recorder module, press and hold CLEAR/OFF/PRINT switch SW1 inthe CLEAR position for approximately 5 seconds until the LO BATT LED on thefront edge of the module begins to flash. Release the switch.

Step 8 Refer to paragraph 9.1, steps 7 through 9b and reprogram the date and time.


9.10 INTERFACE CABLES

Table 9-3 lists a number of typical interface cable configurations required to download recordeddata to a PC/laptop or to print the information. Recorded data can be downloaded directly viaRS232C PC/printer serial connector J1 on the data recorder module (80015), or from MODEMconnector J2 on the data recorder interface assembly (80025) via RECORDER connector J1 onthe 3000 GCP front panel.

Table 9-3Interface Cable Configurations

Application Connector/Pin Connections CommentsPC/printer connector J1 on thedata recorder module (80015)to a PC/laptop or modem

DB-25 to DB-25. Straight-through wiring (pins 1-1, 2-2,3-3, etc.)

25-pin male to 25-pin female.For PC/laptop connection,configuration switches SW2and SW3 on the data recordermodule must be set towardPC/printer connector J1(DCEmode). For modem connec-tion, SW2 and SW3 must beset away from J1 (DTE mode)(see paragraph 9.6).

PC/printer connector J1 on thedata recorder module (80015)to a modem or to a TexasInstruments, Silent 700 printer

DB-25 to DB-25.Straight through wiring (1-1,2-2, 3-3, etc.)

25-pin male to 25-pin male.For modem connection,configuration switches SW2and SW3 on the data recordermodule must be set away fromPC/printer connector J1 (DTEmode). For printer connection,switches SW2 and SW3 mustbe set toward J1 (DCE mode)(see paragraph 9.6).

PC/printer connector J1 on thedata recorder module (80015)to a PC/lap-top or modem

DB-25M to DB-9F 8 -------- 1 3 -------- 2 2 -------- 3 20 -------- 4 7 -------- 5 6 -------- 6 4 -------- 7 5 -------- 8 22 -------- 9

25-pin male to 9-pin female.For PC/laptop applications,configuration switches SW2and SW3 on the data recordermodule must be set towardPC/printer connector J1 (DCEmode). For modemapplications, SW2 and SW3must be set away from J1(DTE mode) (see paragraph9.6)

INDEX

Index-1

—A—

Additional Programming Steps Required When Using80044 And 80214 Processor Modules, 8-2

adjacent crossing circuits, 1-3Adjustable Inductor Assembly, 8A398-6, 3-30Application History Card, 4-5, 4-24, 5-2, 8-7, 8-11Application Information For Enhanced Detection

Operation, 8-5Application Programming, 5-6, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27application programming instructions, 5-1Approach (Distance), 4-8Automatic Switch Over Test, 6-14Automatic transfer systems, 1-3Automatic Transfer Timer Module (80028 or 80037),

6-14Automatic Transfer Timer Unit, 80024, 3-6, 6-5, 6-12,

6-14, 6-15Auxiliary Equipment Panels, 3-51Average Speed (History), 4-20Average Speed, 7-6

—B—

back-to-back display, 5-21Back To Back T1 And T2, 4-32Back-to-Back - On/Off, 8-3ballast resistance conditions, 1-5Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by Frequency,

Bidirectional Applications, 1-6Ballast Resistance Vs. Approach Length by Frequency,

Unidirectional Applications, 1-6Battery Replacement, 9-18battery power, 1-3bidirectional simulation, 3-1Bidirectional Simulation Coupler, 62664-MF, 3-1binary values, 3-6baud rate, 8-3binary values, 2-13

—C—

Cab Signal AC, 3-37Cable Termination Panel Assembly, 91042, 3-51calculated DAX pickup delay, 4-29calculated prime pickup delay time, 4-28Calibration Procedure, 6-4Card cage module slot numbering, 2-1Change Password, 5-12, 5-28changed default values, 8-5check channel, 2-10check receiver wires, 2-1, 4-34Clear Errors Function, 4-22CLEAR Key, 4-16

Clear Mode, 4-21CLEAR/OFF/PRINT toggle switch SW1, 9-1Clearing Data Recorder Memory, 9-6Clearing Recorded Diagnostic Messages From

Memory, 6-18Clearing Train Move History From Memory, 6-18Compensation Value, 4-30condensed programming procedures, 5-1, 5-24constant current signal, 1-2Control Interface Assembly, 80020, 2-13Control Interface Assembly, 80029, 2-15Current Status of EZ And EX, 4- 3, 7-2

—D—

data communications equipment (DCE), 9-14data fields, 9-12, 9-13Data lines, 9-12Data Recorder Interface And Vital AND-Gate Driver

Panel Assembly, 91043, 3-51data recorder interface assembly, 80025, 3-12, 9-1data recorder memory, 6-22Data Recorder Module, 80015, 2-12, 4-14, 9-1Data Recorder Module RS232C Connector (J1) Pin

Assignments, 9-15Data Recorder Module Serial Port Mode Select Switch

Positions, 9-14Data Recorder Module Setup, 6-19Data Recorder Operational Checks, 6-22Data Recorder Printout Status Message Descriptions,

9-13Data Recorder Programming, 5-14, 5-29, 9-2data terminal equipment (DTE), 9-14Date, 4-15Date And Time Programming, 5-30DAX Distance, 4-11DAX module, 80016, 1-3, 2-13, 3-16DAX NOT USED position, 2-15DAX pickup delay interval, 4-29DAX Setting on Transfer Timer Module

(80028/80037), 6-13DAX Track (Track Assignment), 4-11DAX USED position, 2-15DAX Warning Time, 4-12day of the month, 9-5day-of-the-week, 9-5Daylight Savings Time, 4-15, 9-6DC Shunting Enhancer Panel, 80049, 1-3, 2-12, 3-64,

4-32, 5-20, 6-17, 8-3Default Value Changes For 80044 And 80214

Processor Modules, 8-5Detected Speed, 7-6Detected Speed (History), 4-20diagnostic message code, 8-6Diagnostic Message Code Reference, 7-10

INDEX

Index-2

Diagnostic Mode, 4-23diagnostic tools, 7-1Diagnostics, 7-1DIP switch S1, 2-15, 3-6, 6-13DIP switch S4, 2-13DIP switch SW3, 2-16DIP switches SW1 and SW2, 6-13Disable Password, 5-28display viewing angle, 2-8Downloading Recorded Data to a Computer File, 9-6Downstream adjacent crossing (DAX) control, 3-16dual-frequency feature, 2-12dual-frequency 3000 GCP cases, 2-12, 8-2Dual Polarity (Polar) Coded Track Systems Other

Than GRS Trakode, 3-37

—E—

*ED*, 7-2, 4-3, 4-32, 5-2, 7-1, 7-11, 8-5ED operating mode, 5-20ED software program, 2-12Eight-DAX GCP’s, 8-1eight-DAX operation, 8-1, 8-5ejector lever, 2-1Electro Code Electronic Coded System, 3-34Enable Password, 5-12, 5-28enhanced detection operating mode, 4-31, 7-1Enhanced Detection - On/Off, 8-2enhanced detection message (ED), 8-5ENTER Key, 4-21Error (diagnostic) Mode, 7-1, 7-4ERROR Key, 4-23Error Mode display, 7-4event capacity, 2-13EVENT Key, 4-23EX at Highest EZ, 4-3, 7-2Extended Application Programming, 5-17, 5-30extended programming mode, 5-2Extender Module, 80021, 3-48EZ at Lowest EX, 4-4, 7-3

—F—

“F” level software, 4-9, 4-27, 4-28, 4-29fixed pickup delay prime time, 4-28flash device, 8-6flash memory, 4-35, 5-5, 5-24, 6-2Frequency, 4-7frequency-coupling devices, 1-3frequency-shifted oscillator, 2-10FUNCTION Key, 4-24Function Mode, 4-24

—G—

gain check error, 1-9GCP relay voltage, 2-10GRS Trakode (Dual Polarity) Systems, 3-37Guidelines For Handling Modules And PROM’s, 8-6,

9-16

—H—

hardware changes, 4-35high-frequency island module, 1-2high power, 1-4High power transmitter drive, 2-10history display, 4-19HISTORY Key, 4-19History Mode, 4-19, 4-20, 7-1, 7-5

—I—

impedance, maximum, 1-2Instructions For Taking a Track Out of Service, 3-44insulated joints, 1-2independent frequency operation, 2-12Interface Cables, 9-19Island Adjustment - Track 1 And Track 2, 6-11island circuit, 1-2Island (Distance), 4-10island frequency, 1-3Island Module, 80011, 2-10island receiver circuits, 2-10Island Speed, 7-7Island Speed (History), 4-20

—K—

Keyboard, 2-18Kearney connectors, 1-7Keyboard/Display Control Unit, 80019, 2-17keyboard interface printed circuit board, 2-13, 2-15

—L—

lithium battery, 9-18liquid crystal, alphanumeric display, 2-18Low EX Adjustment, 4-3, 4-34, 4-35, 5-4, 5-23, 8-1,

8-4, 8-5

—M—

Making Program Changes, 5-3Maximum Transmit Wire Lengths, 1-7Medium power, 1-4

INDEX

Index-3

membrane keyboard, 2-18Minimum approach distances, 1-5, 1-8Minimum Approach Length Vs. Frequency, 1-8minimum distance restrictions, 1-2, 1-9Minimum Distance to Insulated Joints When Coupled

With 62785 Tunable Insulated Joint BypassCouplers, 3-41

MODEM connector J2, 3-12, 9-1, 9-19module locator guides, 2-19Module-Mounted Status Indicators, 7-7Module slot numbering, 2-1motherboard, 2-1MS/GCP Termination Shunt Burial Kit, A62776, 3-49Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62775, 3-21, 3-22Multifrequency Narrow-band Shunt, 62780, 3-24, 3-25

—N—

Narrow-band Shunt, 1-2, 3-64Narrow-band Shunt, 62775-F, 3-19Narrow-band Shunt, 62780-F, 3-23New Data Key, 4-15New Features of The 80044 And 80214 Processor

Modules, 8-1, 8-2Next Key, 4-24No XFER WHEN LIT LED, 6-15Number Keys, 4-37Number of Data Bits, 9-4Number of DAX’s, 4-10, 5-10Number of Stop Bits, 9-4Number of Tracks, 4-7

—O—

Operational Performance Checks, 6-16operating program, 2-10overrings, 4-29

—P—

parity, 9-4Password Disabled/Enabled, 4-13password feature, 4-6PC File/Printout Format, 9-12Pickup Delay DAX, 4-29Pickup Delay Prime, 4-28Plug-in Printed Circuit Modules, 2-1poor shunting conditions, 1-3, 2-11, 3-64, 4-3, 4-31

thru 4-34, 5-2, 5-20, 5-22, 5-31, 6-17, 7-1, 7-11, 8-1thru 8-6

poor shunting enhancement software options, 8-2poor shunting mode, 4-31, 8-1poor track shunting conditions, 4-31, 8-1power-up display, 8-6

Prime Prediction Offset, 4-27prime prediction offset function, 1-3Print Control Option, 9-11printed circuit modules, 2-1Printer Compatibility, 9-9Printing, 9-10Printing Procedure, 9-10Printing Recorded Data, 9-9Processing speed, 8-1Processor Module memory capacity, 8-1Processor Module, 80014, 2-10Processor Module, 80044, 2-11Processor Module, 80214, 2-12Program And Function Menus, 5-2PROGRAM Key, 4-5Program Mode, 4-5, 5-2Program Mode display, 4-5, 4-7Program Mode menu, 4-5Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM), 2-10Programming Changes Requiring System

Recalibration, 5-4Programming For an External Printer or PC, 5-29Programming Step Index, 5-4PROM Replacement (Firmware Upgrade), 9-16PROM Replacement Procedure, 8-7, 9-17PROM U1, 9-17PROM U52, 8-8PROM U53, 8-7PROM Z7, 8-7PROM Z8, 8-8

—R—

recalibration and reprogramming requirements, 6-2Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Module Replacement, 6-2Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Programming Changes, 6-2Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to

Track Equipment Changes, 6-4Receive Text File Dialog Box, 9-8receiver leads, 1-7RECORDER connector J1, 9-1Rectifier Panel Assembly, 80033, 3-51Reference Information For Serial Port Configuration,

9-14Relay Coded DC Track, 3-35Relay Drive Module, 80013, 2-10relay drive signal gate, 2-10RESET switch, 6-15reset system function, 4- 22Returning a Track to Service, 3-46rocker switches (SW2 and SW3), 9-15RS232C Baud Rate, 4-14RS232C Data Bits, 4-14

INDEX

Index-4

RS232C interface, 2-12RS232C Parity, 4-15RS232C PC/printer serial connector J1, 9-19RS232C serial connector, 9-1RS232C Stop Bits, 4-14

—S—

Safetran S-Code Electronic Coded System, 3-34Selecting a Specific Event For Printout, 9-10Self-check circuits, 1-3self-diagnostic capabilities, 7-1Sentry Data Recorder Panel Assembly, 91041, 3-51Set To Default, 4-35, 5-5, 5-25Set To Default, Reprogramming, And Recalibration

Requirements, 6-1Setup For Approach Length And Linearization, 6-6Setup For Approach Length Procedure, 4-18Setup For Calibration Procedure, 4-16Setup For Calibration - Track 1 And Track 2, 6-5Setup For Calibration - Track 2, 6-6Setup For Linearization Procedure, 4-18SETUP Key, 4-16Setup Mode, 4-22shortest approach, 1-8shunt, 1-2signal voltage level, 1-2simulated bidirectional configuration, 3-2Simulated Track Assembly, 80071, 3-43Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617, 3-27Simulated Track Inductor, 8V617, Mounting

Terminals, 3-29Single Polarity Systems (Fixed Polarity), 3-35single-track cases, 4-7six-wire application, 1-7six-wire connection, 1-8six-wire hookups, 1-7Six-Wire Simulated Track Burial Assembly, 80074,

3-48Slaving Master/Slave, 4-13software levels, 6-2Software Upgrades On The 80214 Processor Module,

8-11software version, 9-12software version number, 8-6Solid-State Vital And-Gate, 90975, 3-15static-sensitive electronic devices, 8-6, 9-16Station Stop, 5-21Station Stop Timer, 4-33, 8-3Status Mode, 4-1, 5-3, 7-1Steady Energy DC Track Circuits, 3-33Style C Track Circuits, 3-38Surge Panels, 80026, 3-49Switch S1, 2-18Switch to MS EZ Level, 4-26

Switches SW1 and SW2, 2-17switch-over interval, 2-13System Calibration, 6-1System Default Parameters, 4-34System Enhancements, 8-1system frequency generator, 2-10System Module/Assembly Requirements, 2-9System Programming, 5-4System Programming Requirements, 6-1SYSTEM RESET Key, 4-21System Specifications, 1-3SYSTEM STATUS Key, 4-1system test and initialization routine, 7-1

—T—

termination shunts, 1-2Time, 4-15time display, 9-5Time/Date Display With Data Recorder Module

Installed, 4-5, 7-4Track Circuit Isolation Devices, 3-32track impedance, 1-2track impedance fluctuations, 2-11Track Leads, 1-7Traffic signal preemption, 1-3traffic signal preemption application, 4-12train history information, 2-12train move event records, 7-6train move number, 4-19, 7-6transceiver module, 80012, 2-10, 4-11Transfer Delay MS to GCP, 4-26transfer interval, 3-6transfer intervals, 2-13transfer module, 1-3Transfer Timer, 80028, 2-13Transfer Timer, 80037, 2-16Transmit Current, 4-4, 7-3Transmit Voltage, 4-4, 7-3transmit wire gauge and length, 1-8Transmitter and receiver track lead connections, 1-7transmitter leads, 1-7Tunable Insulated Joint Bypass Couplers, 62785-f,

1-2, 3-39Typical Data Recorder Printout, 9-12

—U—

UAX Checkout, 6-15UAX Pickup Delay, 4-9

—V—

Verify Correct Time And Date, 6-22

INDEX

Index-5

Verify Event Recording Operation, 6-22Viewing Status Mode Menu Entries, 7-2Vital AND-Gate Driver Panel Assembly, 91044, 3-51

—W—

Warning Time, 4-8, 7-6Warning Time (History), 4-20wideband shunt, 1-2Wideband Shunt, 8A076A, 3-26Windows™ Terminal Communications Dialog Box,

9-7

—X—

Xmit Level, 4-7XFER LED, 6-15

—Y—

year entry, 9-5

—NUMERICAL ENTRIES—

±5 Volt Power Supply Status, 4-4, 7-3±8 Volt Power Supply Status, 4-4, 7-3±15 Volt Power Supply Status, 4-4, 7-33000 GCP Slaving Unit, 80065, 3-468-DAX models (3008 and 3008D2), 2-9, 2-11, 2-13,

2-17, 2-32, 4-10, 4-11, 5-10, 6-13, 6-15, 8-1, 8-580026-XX Surge Panel Applications, 3-5080037 Transfer Timer Module, 6-1380214 Processor Module, 8-2

3000 GCP TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

To determine if there are current active error codes,proceed as follows:

1. Press and hold SYSTEM RESET key forapproximately 3 seconds until the followingmessage is displayed.


2. Press the ENTER key.

Note:Any error codes that remain after theabove steps are performed are activeand current. Look up the error codenumber(s) in the Error Code Chart onthe back of this page to determinepossible cause.

High resistance bonds, insulated joint couplers/trackconnections, or termination shunts/track connectionscan produce the following error codes:

ErrorCode

Text Displayed TrackAffected

9015 T1 HIGH EZ T19016 T2 HIGH EZ T2

See Error Code Chart on the back of this page.

Possible increased track wire resistance or trackconnections can produce the following errorcodes:

ErrorCode

Text Displayed TrackAffected

8113 T1 XMIT CURRENT T18117 T2 XMIT CURRENT T29111 T1 GAIN CHECK T19112 T2 GAIN CHECK T29021 T1 CHECK CHANNEL T19022 T2 CHECK CHANNEL T2

See Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirement Chartson the back of this page.

Erratic shunting, including that caused by maintenancevehicles, is generally recognized by multiple error codeswhich may include any combination of the following:

Track 1 Track 2ErrorCode

TextDisplayed

ErrorCode

TextDisplayed

8201 T1 FREQUENCY 8202 T2 FREQUENCY9011 T1 LOW EX 9013 T2 LOW EX9015 T1 HIGH EZ 9016 T2 HIGH EZ8300 T1 SELF-CHECK 8301 T2 SELF-CHECK

NOTE: When using an 80044 or 80214 processormodule with the Enhanced Detection (ED) operatingmode enabled (On), erratic shunting will producemessage code 9400 (T1) or 9401 (T2) instead of theabove error codes.

If a redundant (D2) system, then switch to thestandby unit and see if the identical failure is present.If it is, the problem is generally track related.

3000 GCPTROUBLESHOOTING

CHART(see Section VII, Diagnostics

(Maintenance) for further information)3000TRBL1.DOC

ERROR CODE CHARTErrorCode

TextDisplayed

Description Possible Cause

1100 ROM ROM Checksum Error 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1200 RAM RAM Read/Write Error 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1300 NOVRAM NOVRAM Checksum Error 80020/80029 Keyboard/Display Interface Module

1400 ROM ROM Checksum Error (System Reset) 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module1500 RAM RAM Read/Write Error (System

Reset)80014/80044/80214 Processor Module

1600 NOVRAM NOVRAM Checksum Error (SystemReset)

80020/80029 Keyboard/Display Interface Module

4000 ENA INPUT ENA Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4001 UAX INPUT UAX Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4002 T1 ISLAND INPUT Island Relay Drive 1 Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4003 T2 ISLAND INPUT Island Relay Drive 2 Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4004 MS/GCP CONTROL MS/GCP Control Input Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4100 DAX A OUTPUT DAX A Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (left)4101 DAX B OUTPUT DAX B Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (left)4102 GCP OUTPUT Prime GCP Relay Drive Output Error 80013 Relay Drive Module4103 DAX C OUTPUT DAX C Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (right)4104 DAX D OUTPUT DAX D Relay Drive Output Error 80016 DAX Module (right)4105 AT OUTPUT Approach Track Output Error 80013 Relay Drive Module5001 DATA RECORDER Data Recorder Not Responding 80015 Data Recorder Module5002 DATA RECORDER Incorrect Data Transmission 80015 Data Recorder Module5003 RECORDER ROM Recorder ROM Checksum Error 80015 Data Recorder Module5004 RECORDER RAM Recorder RAM Checksum Error 80015 Data Recorder Module8001 -5 VOLT SUPPLY - 5 Volt Power Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8002 +5 VOLT SUPPLY +5 Volt Power Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8003 T1 -8V SUPPLY Track 1 -8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8004 T1 +8V SUPPLY Track 1 +8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8005 T2 -8V SUPPLY Track 2 -8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8006 T2 +8V SUPPLY Track 2 +8 Volt Power Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8007 -15 VOLT SUPPLY -15 Volt Power Supply Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8008 +15 VOLT SUPPLY +15 Volt Power Supply Out of Range 80013 Relay Drive Module8113 T1 XMIT CURRENT Track 1 Transmit Current Low 80012 Transceiver Module (left), transmit track wires8114 T1 XMIT CURRENT Track 1 Transmit Current High 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8117 T2 XMIT CURRENT Track 2 Transmit Current Low 80012 Transceiver Module (right), transmit track wires8118 T2 XMIT CURRENT Track 2 Transmit Current High 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8200 FREQUENCY Processor Frequency Out of Range 80014/80044/80214 Processor Module8201 T1 FREQUENCY Track 1 Frequency Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8202 T2 FREQUENCY Track 2 Frequency Out of Range 80012 Transceiver Module (right)8300 T1 SELF-CHECK Track 1 Self-check Not Successful 80012 Transceiver Module (left)8301 T2 SELF-CHECK Track 2 Self-check Not Successful 80012 Transceiver Module (right)9011 T1 LOW EX Track 1 EX Under Low Limit Low Ballast9012 T1 HIGH EX Track 1 EX Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (left)9013 T2 LOW EX Track 2 EX Under Low Limit Low Ballast9014 T2 HIGH EX Track 2 EX Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (right)9015 T1 HIGH EZ Track 1 EZ Over High Limit Bond, Termination, tunable insulated joint bypass couplers, or

connections9016 T2 HIGH EZ Track 2 EZ Over High Limit Bond, Termination, tunable insulated joint bypass couplers, or

connections9021 T1 CHECK CHANNEL Track 1 Channel 2 EZ Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (left), transmit track wires9022 T2 CHECK CHANNEL Track 2 Channel 2 EZ Over High Limit 80012 Transceiver Module (right), transmit track wires9031 T1 LOW EX *ADJ* Track 1 EX Under Low Adjustment Low Ballast9032 T1 ADJ LOW EX Track 1 EX Under 39 Low Ballast9033 T2 LOW EX *ADJ* Track 2 EX Under Low Adjustment Low Ballast9034 T2 ADJ LOW EX Track 2 EX Under 39 Low Ballast9111 T1 GAIN CHECK Track 1 Channel 2 Out of Range Bond Within Island, Receiver Connection, track wires9112 T2 GAIN CHECK Track 2 Channel 2 Out of Range Bond Within Island, Receiver Connection, track wires9115 T1 EX PROCESS Track 1 EX Process Error High Resistance Bond9116 T2 EX PROCESS Track 2 EX Process Error High Resistance Bond9400* T1 ENHANCED DET Track 1 Switched to *ED* Mode Poor Track Shunting Conditions on Track 19401* T2 ENHANCED DET Track 2 Switched to *ED* Mode Poor Track Shunting Conditions on Track 2

*Applies only to units equipped with 80044 or 80214 processor modules.

Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Module Replacement

Module/Assembly Replacement

Requiring Recalibration


Setup For ApproachLength And Linearization

Required

Island AdjustmentRequired

Set To Default AndReprogramming

Required80011 Island No No Yes

(For track associatedwith 80011 only)

No

80012 Transceiver Yes (For track associated

with 80012 only)

No No No

80013 Relay Drive No No No No80014,80044,80214

Processor No No No No

80014,80044,80214

Processor (With new softwarelevel)*

Yes(Both tracks)

Yes**(Both tracks)

No Yes(Both tracks)

80015 Data Recorder No No No No80016 DAX No No No No80020,80029

Control Inter-face Assembly* Yes(Both tracks)

Yes**(Both tracks)

No Yes(Both tracks)

80023,80028,80037

Switch Over Yes(Both tracks)

No Yes(Both tracks)

No

*When a new software level is added (new PROM’s) or the control interface assembly is replaced, first set the system to the default parametersand then perform complete reprogramming and recalibration.

**Can be accomplished by re-entering the EZ and linearization data from the History card.

Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Programming Changes

Programming ChangesRequiring Recalibration



Required

Increased Number of Tracks From 1 to 2 Yes(For track 2 only)


GCP Frequency Changed Yes(Both tracks)

Yes(Both tracks)

Application Changed From:Unidirectional to Bidirectional

orBidirectional to Unidirectional


was changed)


was changed)

Transmit Level Changed From:Medium to Maximum

orMaximum to Medium


was changed)

No

Approach Length Changed Yes(Only for the track that

was changed)


was changed)Ballast Compensation Value Changed Yes

(Only for the track thatwas changed)

No

Recalibration/Reprogramming Requirements Due to Track Equipment Changes

Track Equipment ChangesRequiring Recalibration



Required

Island AdjustmentRequired

Termination Shunts Changed or Moved toNew Location*

Yes Yes No

Termination Shunts of OtherFrequencies Added, Removed From, orMoved Within 3000 GCP Approach(es)

Yes Yes No

Wideband Insulated Joint Couplers(8A076 or 8A077) Replaced in 3000 GCPApproach(es)

Yes No No

Tuned Insulated Joint Couplers (62785-f)Replaced in 3000 GCP Approach(es)

Yes Yes No

3000 GCP Track Wire(s) Replaced Yes No Yes*Approach length in the Program menu must be changed to reflect the new approach length.

3000TRBL2.DOC

elcome to the safetran systems - home -...

Documents